Skoda Superb (2014/05) Owner Manual

SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠKODA Superb
Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual has been systematically designed to make it easy for you
to search for and obtain the information you require.
Notes
WARNING
The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING. These
WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury.
Chapters, table of contents and subject index
The text of the Owner's manual is divided into relatively short sections which
are combined into easy-to-read chapters. The chapter you are reading at any
particular moment is always specified on the bottom right of the page.
CAUTION
A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle
(e.g. damage to gearbox), or points out general risks of an accident.
Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)
The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed
Subject index at the end of the Owner's Manual helps you to rapidly find the
information you are looking for.
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the direction
of travel of the vehicle.
Units of measurement
All values are expressed in metric units.
Explanation of symbols
 Denotes a reference to a section with important information and safety
advice in a chapter.

Denotes the end of a section.

Denotes the continuation of a section on the next page.

Indicates situations where the vehicle must be stopped as soon as
possible.
®
Denotes a registered trademark.

Indicates the texts displayed in the MAXI DOT screen.

Indicates the texts shown in the segment display.
Display
In this owner's manual, the screen on the MAXI DOT display is used as the display illustration, provided it is not otherwise stated.

3T0012791AG
For the sake of the environment
An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects. This is where you will, for example, find tips aimed at reducing your fuel
consumption.
Notice
A normal Note draws your attention to important information about the operation of your vehicle.
Preface
You have opted for a ŠKODA – our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
You have received a vehicle with the latest technology and range of amenities. Please read this Owner's Manual carefully, because operation in accordance with these instructions is a prerequisite for
proper use of the vehicle.
If you have any questions about your vehicle, please contact a ŠKODA Partner.
We hope you enjoy driving your ŠKODA and wish you a pleasant journey at all times.
Your ŠKODA AUTO a.s. (hereinafter referred to only as ŠKODA or manufacturer)

Terms used
The on-board literature contains the following terms relating to the service
work for your vehicle.
› “Specialist garage” - a company that carries out specialist service tasks for
ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist can be a ŠKODA Partner, a ŠKODA Service Partner, or an independent workshop.
› “ŠKODA Service Partner” - A workshop that has been contractually authorized by the manufacturer ŠKODA AUTO a.s. or its sales partner to perform
service tasks on ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
› “ŠKODA Partner” - A company that has been authorized by the manufacturer
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. or its sales partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and, when
applicable, to service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and to sell ŠKODA
Genuine Parts.
Owner's Manual
These operating instructions apply to all body variants of the vehicle and to all
related models.
This Owner's Manual describes all possible equipment variants without identifying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equipment.
Consequently, your vehicle does not need to contain all of the equipment
components described in this Owner's Manual.
The level of equipment in your vehicle refers to your purchase contract for the
vehicle. More information is available from the ŠKODA Partner from whom you
bought the vehicle.
The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended for general information.
Supplementary Information (applies to Russia)
The full licence number of the means of transport is indicated in the registration documents.
Electric boot lid (Superb Combi)
Electric power windows
Electric sliding/tilting roof
Panoramic sliding/tilting roof (Superb Estate)
Table of Contents
Abbreviations
Safety
Passive Safety
General information
Correct and safe seated position
6
6
7
Seat belts
Using seat belts
Inertia reels and belt tensioners
10
10
13
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
Airbag overview
Deactivating airbags
14
14
15
19
Transporting children safely
Child seat
Fastening systems
21
21
23
Using the system
Cockpit
Overview
27
26
Instruments and Indicator Lights
Instrument cluster
Warning lights
28
28
32
Information system
Driver information system
Multifunction display (MFA)
MAXI DOT display
Service interval display
39
39
41
44
46
Unlocking and opening
Unlocking and locking
Anti-theft alarm system
Luggage compartment lid
48
48
54
55
57
59
62
63
Lights and visibility
Lights
Interior lights
Visibility
Windscreen wipers and washers
Rear mirror
65
65
71
73
75
77
Seats and useful equipment
Adjusting the seats
Seat features
Practical equipment
Luggage compartment
Removable light (Superb Combi)
Variable loading floor in the luggage
compartment (Estate)
Extending variable loading floor with
integrated aluminium rails and faseting
elements (Superb Combi)
Net partition (Superb Combi)
Roof rack system
79
79
83
86
95
101
102
103
105
106
Air conditioning system
Heating, ventilation, cooling
Air conditioning system (manual air
conditioning system)
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning
system)
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and
ventilation)
108
108
Communication and multimedia
General information
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl
WLAN
119
119
122
124
127
110
113
116
Voice control
Multimedia
129
131
Driving
Starting-off and Driving
Starting and stopping the engine using the
key
Starting and stopping the engine - KESSY
Brakes
Manual gear changing and pedals
Automatic transmission
Running in
Economical driving and environmental
sustainability
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
Driving abroad
135
135
137
140
141
142
145
145
149
150
Assist systems
Brake assist systems
Parking aid
Park assist
Cruise Control System
START-STOP
Fatigue detection (break recommendation)
151
151
153
154
158
159
162
Towing a trailer
Towing device
Trailer
163
163
166
General Maintenance
Car care
Services, modifications, and technical
alterations
Washing your car
Taking care of your vehicle exterior
Taking care of the interior
Table of Contents
169
169
172
173
176
3
Inspecting and replenishing
Fuel
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Coolant
Brake fluid
Vehicle battery
179
179
182
185
187
188
189
Wheels
Tyres and wheel rims
Winter operation
193
193
198
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help
Emergency equipment
Changing a wheel
Tyre repair
Jump-starting
Towing the vehicle
Radio remote control
Emergency unlocking/locking
Emergency operation of the sliding/tilting
roof
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
200
200
201
205
207
209
211
212
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuses
Bulbs
216
216
219
213
214
Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle data
Index
4
Table of Contents
224
224
Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Meaning
rpm
Engine revolutions per minute
ABS
Anti-lock brake system
AF
Multi-purpose vehicles
AHL
Adaptive headlights
AG
Automatic gearbox
APN
Access Point Name - the name of an access point for the WiFi network
TCS
Traction control
CO2 in g/km
discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven
kilometer
DPF
Diesel particle filter
DSG
Automatic double clutch gearbox
DSR
Active driver-steering recommendation
EDL
Electronic differential lock
ECE
Economic Commission for Europe
EPC
EPC fault light
ESC
Electronic Stability Control
EU
European Union
FSI
Stratified petrol direct injection
GSM
Groupe Spécial Mobile - a digital network of mobile devices
for the transmission of voice and data
HFP
Hands-free profile - connection of a mobile device by means
of its Bluetooth® profile
kW
Kilowatt, measuring unit for the engine output
MG
Manual gearbox
MFD
Abbreviation
Meaning
PIN
Personal Identification Number - personal identification
number for the connection of electronic devices using Bluetooth® or WiFi
rSAP
Remote SIM Access Profile - remote transmission of SIM data
SSP
Simple Security Pairing - connection of two devices using
Bluetooth® profile
TDI CR
Diesel engine with turbocharging and common rail injection
system
TDI PD
Diesel engine with injection system and unit injector injection system
TSA
Trailer stabilisation
TSI
Petrol engine with turbocharging and direct injection
UMTS
Universal Mobile Telecommunication System - the next evolution of the GSM network (3G)
WLAN
Wireless Local Area Network - wireless connection of electronic devices for data transfer (WiFi)
Multifunction display
N1
Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transportation of goods
Nm
Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque
Abbreviations
5




Safety
Passive Safety
General information




Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
6
6
6
Before setting off
Driving safety
Safety equipment
In this section you will find important information, tips and notes on the subject of passive safety in your vehicle.
We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, child seats and safety of children.
WARNING
This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for
the driver and his occupants.
■ You can find further information on safety concerning you and those travelling with you in the following chapters of this owner's manual.
■ The complete on-board literature should always be in the vehicle. This
applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the vehicle.
■
Before setting off

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 6.
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please
pay attention to the following points before setting off.
 Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly.
 Make sure that the function of the wipers and the condition of the wiper
blades are perfect.
 Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
 Adjust the rear-view mirror so that viewing to the rear is assured.
 Ensure that the mirrors are not covered.
6
Safety

Check the tyre inflation pressure.
Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level.
Secure all items of luggage.
Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of
the vehicle.
Close all doors and the engine compartment and luggage compartment lid.
Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals.
Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat
belts » page 21, Transporting children safely.
Adopt the correct seated position » page 7, Correct and safe seated
position. Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position.
Driving safety

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 6.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants. If your driving
safety is effected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk.
The following guidelines must therefore be observed.





Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, e.g.
by your passengers or mobile phone calls.
Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, e.g. due to medication, alcohol or drugs.
Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather conditions.
Take regular breaks on long journeys – at least every two hours.
Safety equipment

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 6.
The following list contains only part of the safety equipment in your vehicle.
› Three-point seat belts for all the seats.
› Belt force limiter for front and outer rear seats.
› Belt tensioner for front and outer rear seats.
› Seat belt height adjusters for the front seats.
› Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger.
› Driver’s knee airbag.

› Front side airbags.
› Rear side airbags.
› Head airbags.
› Anchoring points for child seats using the ISOFIX system.
› Anchoring points for child seats using the TOP TETHER system.
› Head restraints adjustable for height.
› Adjustable steering column.
WARNING (Continued)
If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright, the risk of injury
is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt.
■ The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving, otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag
system – risk of injury!
■
The specified safety equipment works together, in order to optimally protect
you and those travelling with you in accident situations.
Correct seated position for the driver
The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you, if
you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is
not correctly adjusted or used.
If the seat belt is not fastened properly, this may result in injuries if an airbag is
activated in the event of an accident.
Correct and safe seated position

Introduction
Fig. 1 Correct driver seating position / properly adjusted headrest
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Correct seated position for the driver
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Correct seated position for the front passenger
Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats
Examples of incorrect seated positions
WARNING
At all times, the front seats and head restraints must be adjusted to
match the person's body size and the seat belt must be attached properly
to provide the most effective levels of protection to passengers.
■ Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened » page 21, Transporting children safely with a
suitable restraint system.
■ If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position, he is exposed to lifethreatening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed airbag.
■
7
8
8
9
9

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 7.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,
we recommend the following setting.
 Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs.
 Adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that gap B » fig. 1
between the legs and the dash panel in the vicinity of the knee airbag is at
least 10 cm.
 Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel
can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
 Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance A between the steering
wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm » fig. 1. Adjusting the steering
wheel » page 8, Adjusting the steering wheel position.
 Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of your head C » fig. 1.
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 10.
Setting the seats and head restraints » page 79.

Passive Safety
7
WARNING
Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not
change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt
the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is
moving.
■ Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel, and a distance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height
of the knee airbag. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that
the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
■ When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position. Never hold the steering
wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the middle or
inner edge of the steering wheel). In such cases, you could severely injure
the arms, hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed.
■ Ensure that there are no objects in the driver's footwell as they may get
caught behind the pedals when driving or applying the braking. You would
then no longer be able to operate the clutch, brake or accelerate.
■
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Fig. 2
Adjustable steering wheel: Lever
below steering wheel
WARNING
The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked whilst driving
so that the steering wheel cannot accidentally change position during the
journey – risk of accident!
■ Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when
the vehicle is stationary!
■
Correct seated position for the front passenger

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 7.
The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted.
› Swivel the lever underneath the steering wheel downwards » fig. 2.
› Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position (with regard to the height
and forward/back position).
› Push the lever upwards to the stop.
8
Safety
auf Seite 7.
For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the following instructions must be observed.
 Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so
that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed.
 Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of your head C » fig. 1 on page 7.
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 10.
Setting the seats and head restraints » page 79.
In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated » page 19, Deactivating airbags.
WARNING
Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel. Not maintaining
this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to
properly protect you – hazard!
■ Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – never place your feet on the dash panel, out of the window or on the surfaces
of the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury when braking or
in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal
injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!
■

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 7.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an
accident, the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following.
 Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of the head C » fig. 1 on page 7.
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 10.
 Use a suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehicle » page 21, Transporting children safely.







Do not lean out of the window.
Do not put your feet out of the window.
Do not put your feet on the dash panel.
Do not put your feet on the seat cushion.
Do not allow anybody to travel in the footwell.
Do not drive without fastening your seat belt.
Do not delay in the luggage compartment.
Setting the seats and head restraints » page 79.
Examples of incorrect seated positions

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 7.
Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if seat belts are fastened correctly.
Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the
seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing
of the seat belt.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and passengers, especially children.
Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is
moving.
The following list contains instructions which, if not observed, may cause serious injuries or death. This list is not complete, however we would like you to
familiarise yourself with this subject.
Observe the following instructions while driving.








Do not stand up.
Do not stand on the seats.
Do not kneel on the seats.
Do not tilt the seat backrest too far back.
Do not lean against the dash panel.
Do not lie on the rear seats.
Do not sit only on the front part of the seat.
Do not sit facing to the side.
Passive Safety
9
WARNING
Fasten your seat belt before each journey - even when driving in town!
This also applies to the passengers seated at the rear – risk of injury!
■ Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way
of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child » page 12, Fastening
and unfastening seat belts.
■ Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seated » page 7, Correct and safe seated position.
■ The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
Seat belts
■
Using seat belts

Introduction
Fig. 3
Driver wearing seat belt
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
The physical principle of a frontal collision
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
Belt height adjustment on the front seats
11
12
13
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an
accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival
in the event of a major accident.
Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated
position » fig. 3.
The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy (energy of motion) to a considerable
extent. They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries.
Occupants of a vehicle who have correctly fastened their seat belts have the
major benefit of the fact that the kinetic energy is absorbed as effectively as
possible by the belts.
The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety measures, such as the airbag system, also contribute to the kinetic energy being reduced as effectively as possible. The energy produced is thus absorbed and
there is less risk of injury.
Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the
vehicle » page 21.
10
Safety
WARNING
Information on the correct routing of the belt
■ Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even
in minor accidents.
■ Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the
belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder - on no account across your neck.
■ A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
■ The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. spectacles, ball-point pens, bunches of keys etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
WARNING
Information on dealing with the safety belts
■ The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twisted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
■ Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it.
WARNING
Information on the proper use of safety belts
■ Never use one seat belt to secure two persons (including children). The
seatbelt must not be placed over a child who is sitting on the lap of another
passenger.

WARNING (Continued)
The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
■ The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked, otherwise the belt
tongue will not lock in place properly.
■ Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jacket) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
the seat belts.
■ It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e. g. for
shortening the belts for smaller persons).
■ The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably
when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 85.
The physical principle of a frontal collision
■
WARNING
Information on the care and maintenance of safety belts
■ The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may impair proper operation of the inertia reel » page 178.
■ The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
■ Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If any damage
to the seat belts, seat belt connections, inertia reel or the lock is detected,
the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage.
■ Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident
and were therefore stretched, must be replaced – this is best done by a
specialist garage. The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspected. The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked.
Notice
The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts.
Fig. 4 Driver without a fastened seat belt/rear seat passenger without a
fastened seat belt

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 10.
Motion energy, so-called kinetic energy, is produced as soon as the vehicle is
moving, both for the vehicle and its occupants.
The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at
which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the
occupants. The greater the speed and weight increase, the greater the
amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident.
The speed of the vehicle is the most important factor. Doubling the speed of
the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour increases the kinetic energy four
times.
The idea that it is possible to support your body with your hands in a minor accident is incorrect. Even in a collision at only a low speed, the forces acting on
the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body.
Even if you only drive at a speed of 30-50 km/h, the forces that your body is
exposed to in the event of an accident can exceed a metric ton (1000 kg).
For example, a person's weight of 80 kg “increases” to 4.8 tons (4800 kg) at
50 km/h.
In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt
are thrown forward and strike parts of the vehicle interior in an uncontrolled
manner, such as the steering wheel, dash panel or windscreen » fig. 4 - . In
certain circumstances you could even be thrown out of the vehicle, which
could cause life threatening or even fatal injuries.
Seat belts
11

It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they will
otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the
event of an accident.
› Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle for the seat » fig. 5 -  until it au-
Rear seat passengers who have not fastened their seat belts are a danger not
only to themselves but also to those seated at the front » fig. 4 – .
A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is
easy to get hold of.
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
dibly clicks into place.
› Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
maximum protection.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must
roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest.
The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis, must not be positioned
across the stomach and must always fit snugly » fig. 6 - .
Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way of
ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child.
With pregnant women, the lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as
possible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen » fig. 6 - .
Fig. 5 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt
Release
Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary.
› Press the red button in the belt buckle » fig. 5 - ; the lock tongue pops out.
› Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing,
the seat belt does not twist.
CAUTION
When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not damage the door trim or other parts of the interior.
Fig. 6 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt/Routing of belt webbing for an expectant mother

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 10.
Fasten
› Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint before fastening the seat
belt » page 7.
› Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis.
12
Safety
Belt height adjustment on the front seats
Belt tensioners
The safety for the driver, front passenger and passengers on the outer rear
seats who are wearing their seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels on the front and rear external three-point seat belts.
Fig. 7
Front seat: Seat belt height adjuster
The three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal
collision of a certain severity. The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the
seat belts are not fastened.
The fastened three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event
of a collision of a certain severity.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions, side
and rear-end collisions, in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in
which no major forces are produced from the front.
auf Seite 10.
The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the
front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size.
WARNING
Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation
of system components because of other repair work, must only be carried
out by a specialist garage.
■ The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single accident. If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace the entire system.
› Press the seat belt height adjuster and move up or down in the desired di-
■
rection » fig. 7.
› Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has
correctly locked in place.
Inertia reels and belt tensioners

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Inertia reels
Belt tensioners
Inertia reels
Notice
Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
■ When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system, it is important to comply with national legal requirements. ŠKODA service partners
are familiar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed information.
■
13
13
Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel.
When pulling slowly on the seat belt, the belt can move freely. When pulling
sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the inertia reel.
The belts also lock when full braking, when the car accelerates, when driving
downhill and when cornering.
WARNING
If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have it inspected
immediately by a specialist garage.
Seat belts
13
System description
Airbag system

Description of the airbag system

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
WARNING
An airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a
fastened seat belt.
■ The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but instead forms part of
the complete passive vehicle safety concept.
■ To ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect
when the airbag is deployed, the front seats must be correctly adjusted to
match the body size » page 7, Correct and safe seated position.
■ If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far forward or
adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to increased
risk of injury in the event of an accident.
■
WARNING
Information on the use of the airbag system
■ If there is a fault, the airbag system must be checked by a specialist garage immediately. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident.
■ No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system.
■ Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
■ Never make any changes to the front bumper or bodywork.
■ It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this
might result in the airbag being deployed.
■ The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one accident. The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed.
14
Safety
auf Seite 14.
The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the indicator light 
in the instrument cluster » page 38.
Introduction
System description
Airbag deployment
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
When the airbags are deployed, they fill with gas and inflate.
14
14
A grey white or red, non-harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated.
This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the
following modules.
› Electronic control unit.
› Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger » page 15.
› Driver’s knee airbag » page 16.
› Side airbags » page 17.
› Head airbags » page 18.
› Airbag warning light in the instrument cluster » page 38.
› Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 20.
› Warning light for the front passenger airbag deactivation/activation in the
middle of the dash panel » page 20.
Notice
The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life.
■ If you sell your vehicle, provide the complete vehicle documentation to the
new owner. Please note that the information relating to the possibility of deactivating the front passenger airbag must be included!
■ When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system, it is important to
comply with the national legal requirements.
■
Airbag deployment

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 14.
The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be
able to offer additional protection in the event of an accident.
The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on.
In certain accident situations, the several airbags may be deployed simultaneously.

The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions,
rear-end collisions, tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover.
Side airbags
Head airbags
Deployment factors
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to
the airbag system in every situation. An important role is played by factors
such as the type of object that the vehicle hits (hard/soft), the impact angle,
vehicle speed etc.
17
18
Front airbags
A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which
occurs. The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the
relevant restraint system.
If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision
remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit,
the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal
collision.
› Driver’s front airbag.
› Front passenger airbag.
› Driver’s knee airbag.
Fig. 8 Driver airbag in the steering wheel/front passenger airbag in the
dashboard
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision.
› Front side airbag on the side of the accident.
› Rear side airbag on the side of the accident.
› Head airbags on the side of the accident.
In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed:
› the interior lighting comes on (if the switch for the interior light is in the door
contact position),
› the hazard warning light is switched on;
› all the doors are unlocked;
› the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
Fig. 9 Safe distance to steering wheel/inflated airbags.
In the event of a severe frontal collision, the front airbag system offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger.
Airbag overview
The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel » fig. 8 - .

The front airbag for the front seat passenger is located in the dash panel
above the storage compartment » fig. 8 - .
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front airbags
Driver’s knee airbag
15
16
When the airbags are deployed, they inflate in front of the driver and front
passenger » fig. 9 - . The forward movement of the driver and of the front
passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag
and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced.
Airbag system
15

WARNING
Information on correct seating position
■ It is important that the driver and front passenger maintain a distance of
at least 25 cm to the steering wheel or dashboard A » fig. 9. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able
to properly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints
must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
■ The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to
injuries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct.
■ There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned between the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag.
WARNING
Front airbag and transporting children
■ Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a
proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident,
the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries!
■ The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 19, Deactivating airbags. If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child
on the front passenger seat, pay attention to any relevant national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
WARNING
General information
■ The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash panel on the passenger side must not have stickers attached, be covered or
modified in any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth
that is dry or has been moistened with water. No objects such as cup holders, mobile phone mounts, etc. must be attached to the covers of the airbag modules or be located within their immediate vicinity.
■ Never place objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module
in the dash panel.
16
Safety
Notice
In vehicles with head airbags, the word AIRBAG can be seen on the steering
wheel.
■ In vehicles with front passenger airbags, the word AIRBAG is located on the
dash panel on the passenger side.
■
Driver’s knee airbag
Fig. 10 Installation of the airbag / Safe distance from the control panel
The driver's knee airbag offers adequate protection for the driver's legs.
The driver's knee airbag A is located in the lower part of the dash panel below
the steering column » fig. 10.
In the event of a severe frontal collision, the driver's knee airbag and front airbags are deployed.
The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with
the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the legs of the driver is thus
reduced.

WARNING
Adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that there is a gap
of at least 10 cm between the legs B and the dash panel in the vicinity of
the knee airbag » fig. 10. If it is not possible to meet this requirement due
to your body size, visit a specialist garage.
■ The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel below the steering column not have stickers attached, be covered or modified
in any other way. This part should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or
has been moistened with water. No objects must be attached to the cover
of the airbag module or located within the immediate vicinity.
■ Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects (bunch of keys etc.) to the ignition key. These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and
can cause injuries.
■
Notice
In vehicles with a driver's knee airbag, a symbol with the word AIRBAG is located on the side panel on the driver's side.
Side airbags
Fig. 11 Location of the side airbag in the driver's seat / gas-filled side airbags
In the event of severe side collisions, the side airbag system provides additional protection for the upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) of passengers in
the vehicle.
When the side airbags » fig. 11 -  are deployed, the head airbag and belt tensioner are also automatically deployed on the relevant side.
The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated
airbag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) is reduced on the side facing the door.
WARNING
Information on correct seating position
■ Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side
airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident. This applies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable
child safety seat » page 22, Child safety and side airbag.
■ There must not be any further persons, animals as well as objects positioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. No
accessories, such as cup holders, should be attached to the doors.
■ If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling, they may
be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This
can result in serious injuries » page 21, Child seat.
WARNING
The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Resulting damage
can have a negative impact on the function of the airbag system. Any work
on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist garage. The following guidelines must therefore be observed.
■ Never drive with inner door panels removed.
■ Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the
resulting openings have not been properly sealed.
■ Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed, unless
the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed.
■ Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional
loudspeakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner
door panels.
■ Always have work carried out by a ŠKODA service partner or a professional specialist garage.
The front side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of
the front seats » fig. 11 - .
The rear side airbags are located between the entrance area and the seat
backrest.
Airbag system
17

WARNING
Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle. Never
leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of
clothing.
■ Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent knocks, kicks
etc., impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be
damaged. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case!
■ Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by ŠKODA. In view
of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of
non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective function of the side airbag.
■ Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag module must be repaired immediately by a specialist garage.
■ The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage,
cracks or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force in order to open
the modules.
■
Notice
In vehicles with side airbags at the front, a label with the word AIRBAG is located on the front seat backrests.
■ In vehicles with rear side airbags, the word AIRBAG is located between the
entrance area and the rear seat rest.
■
Head airbags
Fig. 12 Location of the head airbag/gas-filled head airbag
In the event of a severe side collision, the head airbag system offers additional
protection for the head and neck area of passengers.
18
Safety
The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides of the vehicle
interior » fig. 12 - .
In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the
relevant side airbag and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the
accident occurs.
When deployed, the airbag covers the window area of the front and rear doors,
as well as the area of the door pillar » fig. 12 - .
Head impact with interior parts is reduced by the inflated head airbag. The reduction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area.
The head airbag also offers additional protection in the case of an offset impact by covering the front door pillar.
WARNING
General information
■ There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head airbags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly.
■ Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle. Never
leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of
clothing. Additionally, clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items
of clothing.
■ The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head
airbags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in
the event of it being deployed. When the deployed head airbag is inflated,
parts of the accessories fitted could be thrown into the interior of the car
and injure the occupants » page 169.
■ The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the
deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens,
etc. are attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if
the head airbag is deployed.
■ There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned between the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag.
In addition, none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window when driving, or extend their arms and hands out of the window.

WARNING
The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Resulting damage
can have a negative impact on the function of the airbag system. Any work
on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist garage. The following guidelines must therefore be observed.
■ Never drive with inner door panels removed.
■ Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the
resulting openings have not been properly sealed.
■ Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed, unless
the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed.
■ Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional
loudspeakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner
door panels.
■ Always have work carried out by a ŠKODA service partner or a professional specialist garage.
Notice
In vehicles with head airbags, the word AIRBAG can be seen on the B column
cladding.
Deactivating airbags

of a physical disability.
› If different seats have been fitted (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags).
The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated
switch » page 20, Deactivating the front passenger airbag.
We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA service partner to deactivate any other
airbags.
Monitoring the airbag system
The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically, including when one of the airbags is switched off.
Airbag deactivated using diagnostic equipment
› The warning light  lights up for approximately 4 seconds after the ignition
is switched on and then flashes again for approximately 12 seconds.
Front passenger airbag deactivated using the key switch in the storage compartment
› The warning light  lights up for approximately 4 seconds after the ignition
is switched on.
› The indicator light   3 » fig. 13 on page 20 lights up after the ignition is
switched on.
Notice
The national regulations for switching off airbags must be observed.
A ŠKODA service partner will be able to inform you which, if any, of your vehicle's airbags can or must be deactivated.
■
■
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Deactivating airbags
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
› If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because
19
20
Deactivating airbags
Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones below.
› If using a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat (due to different
legal regulations, the airbag must be deactivated if using a forwards-facing
child seat in some countries) » page 21, Transporting children safely.
› If it is not possible to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the middle of the steering wheel and chest, despite the driver's seat being correctly
adjusted.
Airbag system
19
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
WARNING
The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched off.
■ Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag.
■ If the warning light  is flashing, the front passenger airbag will not be
deployed in an accident. Have the airbag system checked by a specialist garage immediately.
■ The key can not be inserted in the key switch while driving.
■ Shocks can cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag!
■ The airbag can be triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result
in injury or death!
■
Fig. 13 Key switch for front passenger airbag/warning light for front passenger airbag activation/deactivation
Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch.
Switching off
› Switch off the ignition.
› Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
› Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
› Insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
› Use the key carefully to turn the slot of the key switch into position
2 » fig. 13 OFF.
› Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
› Close the storage box on the front passenger's side.
› Check that warning light  3     in the text lights up after
the ignition is switched on.
Switching on
› Switch off the ignition.
› Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
› Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
› Insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
› Use the key carefully to turn the slot of the key switch into position
1 » fig. 13 ON.
› Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
› Close the storage box on the front passenger's side.
› Check that warning light  3     lights up after the ignition is
switched on.
20
Safety
CAUTION
An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch!
Transporting children safely
Child seat

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat
Child safety and side airbag
Classification of child seats
Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt
21
22
23
23
Children are generally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger
seat.
In contrast to adults, the muscles and bone structure of children are not yet
fully developed. Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury.
Children should be transported in accordance with the relevant statutory provisions.
Child seats complying with the ECE-R 44 standard must be used. ECE-R stands
for: Economic Commission for Europe - Regulation.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard are identified with a test
mark that cannot be removed: a large E within a circle with the test number
below.
WARNING
The national legal requirements must be observed when using child
seats.
■ One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
■ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Certain outside climatic
conditions can cause life-threatening temperatures in the vehicle.
■ The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey! Otherwise, the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an accident, causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants.
■ Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries
if the airbag system is deployed!
■
WARNING (Continued)
Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents.
■ Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fittings.
■ The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat. Further information » page 21, Use
of a child seat on the front passenger seat.
■
CAUTION
When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the head
restraints so that they are as high as possible.
Notice
We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA vehicles.
They meet the ECE-R 44 standard.
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat
Never use a backwards-facing child restraint system on a seat that is protected by an active airbag installed in front of it. This could cause the child severe
injury or even death.
Fig. 14
Sticker on the B column on the
front passenger side.
Transporting children safely

21
WARNING
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 19, Deactivating airbags.
■ Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
■ This fact is also indicated by the label that can be found in one of the following locations.
■ On the B-column on the front passenger side » fig. 14. The sticker is visible upon opening the front passenger door.
■ On the front passenger's sun visor. In some countries, the sticker is located on the front seat passenger's sun visor » fig. 15.
■ With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3, make sure that the loop-around
fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at
the same height as the loop-around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side.
■ As soon as the rear-facing child seat is no longer being used on the passenger seat, the front passenger airbag should be re-activated again.
■
Fig. 15 Front passenger sun visor / label

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 21.
For safety reasons, we recommend that you install child seats on the rear
seats whenever possible.
The following instructions must be followed when using a child seat on the
front passenger seat.
› The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing child
seat » .
› If possible, adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical,
so as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the
back of the child seat.
› If possible, move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no contact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it.
› With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3, make sure that the loop-around fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the
same height as the loop-around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side.
› Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
› Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible.
› Place and fasten the child seat on the seat and the child in the child seat according to the specifications in the manufacturer's user manual of the child
seat .
Child safety and side airbag
Fig. 16
Incorrect seated position of a
child who is not properly secured
- risk from the side airbag/Child
properly protected by safety seat

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 21.
The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag » fig. 16 - .
There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of
the side airbag to ensure that the airbag can provide as much protection as
possible » fig. 16 - .
22
Safety

WARNING
Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of
the side airbag – risk of injury!
■ Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags –
risk of injury!
U
“Universal” child seat category - a child seat designed to be attached to
the seat using the seat belt.
■
Classification of child seats

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Fastening systems

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
and
23
24
24
Anchor eyelets for the ISOFIX system
Use of child seats with the ISOFIX system
Anchor eyelets for the TOP TETHER system
auf Seite 21.
Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
Group
Weight of the child
Approximate age
0
0
1
2
3
up to 10 kg
up to 13 kg
9-18 kg
15-25 kg
22-36 kg
up to 9 months
up to 18 months
up to 4 years
up to 7 years
over 7 years
Anchor eyelets for the ISOFIX system
Fig. 17
Labels on the ISOFIX system
Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 21.
Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of
the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
0
up to 10 kg
0+
up to 13 kg
1
9-18 kg
2
15-25 kg
3
22-36 kg
Front passenger
seat
Rear seats
external
Rear seat
Centre
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
There are two locking eyes between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of
the outer rear seats and front passenger seat for fixing the ISOFIX system
child seat in place.
On the rear outside seats, the fixing eyes are located below the upholstery.
The places are marked with labels with the ISOFIX logo » fig. 17.
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the ISOFIX system.
■ Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the anchor eyelets intended for the installation of a child seat with the ISOFIX system – risk to
life.
■
Transporting children safely

23
Notice
A child seat fitted with the ISOFIX system can only be mounted in a vehicle
fitted with an ISOFIX system if the child seat has been approved for this type
of vehicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
■ Child seats with the ISOFIX system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original
Accessories.
■
Use of child seats with the ISOFIX system
Overview of the usability of child seats with the ISOFIX system on each of the
seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
Size class of
the child seata)
Front passenger seatb)
Outer rear seats
Rear seat middle
0
up to 10 kg
E
X
IL-SU
X
X
IL-SU
X
X
IL-SU
IUF
X
0+
up to 13 kg
1
9-18 kg
a)
b)
E
D
C
D
C
B
B1
A
The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.
If the front passenger seat is fitted with the ISOFIX system attachment points, it is suited for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat with the “Semi-Universal” approval.
IL-SU The seat is suited for installation of an ISOFIX child seat with “SemiUniversal” approval. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child
seat with the ISOFIX system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the
list of vehicles that comes with the child seat.
IUF The seat is suitable for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat with
“Universal” approval and attachment with the TOP TETHER belt.
X
The seat is not fitted with fixing eyes for the ISOFIX system.
24
Safety
Anchor eyelets for the TOP TETHER system
Fig. 18
Anchor eyelets on the TOP
TETHER system

The anchor eyelets for attaching the belt for a child seat with the TOP TETHER
system are located on the back of the outer rear seat backrests » fig. 18.
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the TOP TETHER system.
■ Only use child seats with the TOP TETHER system on the seats with the
locking eyes.
■ Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye.
■ On no account should you equip your vehicle, e.g. mount screws or other
anchorage points.
■
Transporting children safely
25
Fig. 19 Cockpit
26
Using the system
21
Using the system
22
Cockpit
23
Overview
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Electric windows
Door opening lever
Central locking system
Air outlet vent
Parking ticket holder
Operating lever:
› Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight
flasher
› Speed regulating system
Steering wheel:
› With horn
› With driver’s front airbag
› with push-buttons for radio, navigation system phone and information system
Instrument cluster: Instruments, warning lights and display
Operating lever:
› Information system
› Windscreen wiper and wash system
Air outlets in the central part of the dash panel
Regulator for left seat heating
Button for hazard warning light system
Regulator for right seat heating
Depending on equipment fitted:
› Radio
› Navigation system
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Front passenger airbag
Air outlet vent
Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag (in front
passenger storage compartment)
Door opening lever
Electric exterior mirror adjustment
59
53
52
108
25
26
27
28
29
30
67
158
15
120, 132
28
39
75
108
83
70
83
92
15
108
31
32
33
34
Light switch
Bonnet release lever
Regulator for the instrument lighting and regulator for the headlight beam range adjustment
Storage compartment on the driver's side
Lever for adjusting the steering wheel
Driver’s knee airbag
Ignition lock
Pedals
Handbrake
Bars with buttons depending on the equipment fitted:
›  START STOP
›  Tyre control display
›  Traction control TCS
›  Electronic Stability Control ESC
›  Park Assist
›  Parking aid
›  Tailgate operation (Superb Combi)
Depending on equipment fitted:
› Gearshift lever (manual gearbox)
› Selector lever (automatic gearbox)
Depending on equipment fitted:
› Ashtrays
› Storage compartment
Warning light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag
Depending on equipment fitted:
› Operating controls for the air conditioning system
› Operating controls for Climatronic
66
183
66, 66
87
8
16
136
142
141
159
38
152
151
154
153
57
141
142
89
88
20
110
113
Notice
The position of some of the controls on right-hand drive models may differ
from that shown in » fig. 19. The symbols on the controls and switches are the
same as for left-hand drive models.
20
53
78
Cockpit
27
Overview
Instruments and Indicator Lights
Instrument cluster

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Overview
Revolutions counter
Speedometer
Coolant temperature gauge
Display
Fuel gauge
Counter for distance driven
Setting the time
Display of the alternative speed
Display in rear centre console
Auto-Check Control
28
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
31
31
31
Fault display
If there is a fault in the instrument cluster, the Error message will appear in
the display. Have the fault rectified as soon as possible by a specialist garage.
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully
responsible for road safety.
■ Never operate the controls in the instrument cluster while driving, but
only when the vehicle is stationary! Only operate the controls when the vehicle is stationary.
Fig. 20 Instrument cluster

1
2
3
■
4
5
6
7
1)
Applies to vehicles with a segment display.
28
Using the system
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 28.
Engine revolutions counter » page 29
with indicator lights » page 32
Speedometer » page 29
› with indicator lights » page 32
Button for display mode:
› Time settings » page 30
› Enable / disable the display of the second speed1) » page 31
› Service intervals - Display of the number of days and kilometres remaining until the next service1) » page 46
Coolant temperature gauge » page 29
Display » page 29
Fuel gauge » page 30
Button for:
› Reset daily trip counter » page 30
› Setting the time » page 30
› enable / disable the mode selected by means of the 3 key
›
Revolutions counter

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 28.
The red scale of the revolution counter 1 » fig. 20 on page 28 indicates the
range in which the system begins to limit the engine speed. The system automatically restricts the engine speed to a steady limit.
You should shift into the next higher gear before the red scale of the revolution counter is reached, or select mode D on the automatic gearbox.
Follow the recommended gear to prevent engine speeds that are too high or
too low » page 40.
Speedometer

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 28.
Warning against excessive speeds
An audible warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km/
h1). The audible warning signal is switched off when the vehicle speed falls below 120 km/h.
Cold range
If the pointer is still in the left area of the scale, this indicates that the engine
has not yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid high speeds, full throttle
and high engine loads. This prevents possible damage to the engine.
The operating range
The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer
moves into the mid-range of the scale. At very high ambient temperatures or
heavy engine loads, the pointer may move even further to the right.
High temperature range
If the pointer reaches the red area of the scale, the coolant temperature is too
high. Further information » page 34.
CAUTION
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
■ Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
■
Display
Fig. 22
Display types
Coolant temperature gauge
Fig. 21
Coolant temperature gauge


Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 28.
The coolant temperature gauge » fig. 21 only operates when the ignition is
switched on.
1)
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 28.
The Display will show the following information.
› Distance driven » page 30
› Time » page 30
› Details of the information system » page 39
› Details of the service interval display » page 46

This function is only valid for some countries.
Instruments and Indicator Lights
29
Display types » fig. 22.
Counter for distance driven
 Segment display
 MAXI DOT display
Fig. 24
Segment display / MAXI DOT display
CAUTION
Pull out the ignition key if coming into contact with the display (e.g. when
cleaning) to prevent any possible damage. On vehicles with the KESSY system,
switch off the ignition and open the driver's door.
Fuel gauge
Fig. 23
Fuel gauge

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 28.
Display » fig. 24
A Bottom counter
B Odometer
Daily trip counter (trip)
The daily trip counter indicates the distance which you have driven since it was
last reset - in steps of 100 metres or 1/10 of a mile.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 28.
The fuel gauge » fig. 23 only operates if the ignition is switched on.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres. If the amount of fuel reaches
the reserve area (the pointer reaches the red scale range), the indicator symbol
 is illuminated » page 37.
CAUTION
Never drive when the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of
fuel can cause misfiring. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the
engine and the exhaust system.
Notice
After filling up, it can occur that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous curves,
braking, driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indicates approx. a fraction less. When stopping or during less dynamic driving, the fuel
gauge displays the correct fuel level again. This is not a fault.
30
Using the system
Reset daily trip counter
› Press and hold the
7 » fig. 20 on page 28 button.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has travelled.
Notice
If the second speed display is enabled on vehicles with a segment display, this
speed will be shown instead of the odometer.
Setting the time

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 28.
The clock is set using the buttons 3 and 7 » fig. 20 on page 28.
3 The choice to change the display (hours or minutes).
7 The change of the displayed value.
In vehicles equipped with the MAXI DOT display, it is also possible to set the
clock in the Time menu » page 44.
Display of the alternative speed

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Auto-Check Control
auf Seite 28.
The display can show the current speed in mph 1).
This feature is provided for driving in countries with different speed units.
Maxi DOT display
The display of the second speed can be set in the Alt. speed dis. menu
item » page 44, Settings.
Segment display
3 » fig. 20 on page 28 key repeatedly, until the odometer display
flashes » page 30.
› Press the 7 key while the display flashes.
› Press the
The second speed is displayed instead of the odometer.
The display of the second speed can be disabled in the same way.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 28.
Vehicle condition
Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked
continuously when the ignition is switched on.
Some error messages and other information are displayed in the MAXI DOT
display. The messages are displayed simultaneously with the symbols in the
MAXI DOT display or with the warning lights in the instrument cluster » page 32, Warning lights.
The menu item Vehicle status is shown in the main menu of the MAXI DOT
display whenever at least one fault message exists. After selecting this menu,
the first of the error messages is displayed. Several error messages are shown
on the display under the message e.g. 1/3. This indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is being displayed.
Warning symbols in the MAXI DOT display
Display in rear centre console
Fig. 25
Centre console at rear: Display

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 28.
The time and the outside temperature is displayed on the display in the rear
centre console when the ignition is switched on » fig. 25.
The values are taken over by the instrument cluster.
1)





Engine oil pressure too low
Clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG are
too hot
Inspecting the engine oil level,
engine oil sensor faulty
» page 34
» page 31
» page 35
Thickness of brake pads
» page 38
Problem with engine oil pressure
» page 31
 Problem with the engine oil pressure
If the  symbol is shown in the MAXI DOT display, you must have your vehicle
checked immediately by a specialist garage. The information about the maximum permissible engine speed is displayed together with this symbol.
 Clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG are too hot
The  symbol in the MAXI DOT display indicates that the temperature of the
automatic gearbox clutches is too high.

For models with the speedometer in mph, the second speed is displayed in km/h.
Instruments and Indicator Lights
31
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Gearbox overheated. Stop! Owner's manual!

 do not continue to drive! Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and wait
until the  icon goes out – risk of gearbox damage! You can continue your
journey as soon as the symbol disappears.
WARNING
If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard
warning light system » page 70. The warning triangle must be set up at
the prescribed distance - observe the national legal provisions when doing
so.
Notice
If the MAXI DOT display shows warning messages, these messages must be
confirmed in order to access the main menu » page 40 .
■ As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the symbols are always indicated again. After they are displayed for the first time, the symbols continue
to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver.
■
 Antilock brake system (ABS)
 Rear fog light
 Bulb failure
 Adaptive headlights (AFS)
 Exhaust inspection system
 Glow plug system (diesel engine)
 Engine performance check (petrol engine)
 Diesel particulate filter (diesel engine)
 Fuel reserve
 Airbag system
 Tyre inflation pressure
 Windscreen washer fluid level
 Pads
  Turn signal system
 Low beam
 Fog lights
 Cruise control system
 Lever lock / tempering (KESSY system)
 Main beam
36
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
38
38
38
38
38
39
39
39
39
39
Warning lights
The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults.

Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in
the display of the instrument cluster.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
 Handbrake
 Brake system
 Seat belt warning light
 Generator
 Door open
 Engine oil pressure
 Coolant
 Bonnet
 Boot lid
  Power Steering / steering lock (system KESSY)
 Engine oil level
 Traction Control System (ASR)
 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
32
Using the system
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
After switching on the ignition, some warning lights illuminate briefly as a
function test.
If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights go out a few
seconds after switching on the ignition or leaving the vehicle.

WARNING
Ignoring illuminated warning lights and related messages or instructions
in the display of the instrument cluster may lead to serious personal injury
or damage to the vehicle.
■ If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard
warning light system » page 70. The warning triangle must be set up at
the prescribed distance - observe the national legal provisions when doing
so.
■ The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the engine compartment » page 182, Engine compartment.

 Handbrake
The warning light  comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder
for the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belt.
■

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The warning light  comes on if the handbrake is applied.
An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h for at least
3 seconds while the handbrake is applied.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Release parking brake!

 Brake system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
WARNING
If the warning light  is displayed simultaneously with warning light
 » page 36,  Antilock brake system (ABS),  do not continue your
journey! Seek help from a specialist garage.
■ A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehicle's braking distance – risk of accident!
■ The following guidelines should be observed when opening the bonnet
and checking the brake fluid level » page 182, Engine compartment.
■
 Seat belt warning light
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The indicator light  expires after the respective seat belt is fastened.
If the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and the vehicle
speed is more than 20 km/h, the warning light  flashes and you will hear an
acoustic signal.
If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next
90 seconds, the warning signal is deactivated and the indicator light  lights
up permanently.
 Generator
auf Seite 33.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The indicator light  illuminates if the brake fluid level in the braking system
is too low or there is a fault in the ABS.
If the indicator light  lights up when the engine is running, the vehicle battery is not being charged.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. The electrical system requires checking.

Brake fluid: Owner's manual!
› Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the level of the brake fluid » page 189 »
.
CAUTION
If the  warning light (cooling system fault) lights up in addition to the 
warning light while driving,  do not continue to drive! Stop the engine there is a risk of engine damage! Seek help from a specialist garage.
Instruments and Indicator Lights
33
If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the indicator light  is still
illuminated,  do not continue your journey!
 Door open

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
The warning light  comes on, if one or several doors are opened.
WARNING
Carefully open the coolant expansion bottle. If the engine is hot, the cooling system is pressurized - risk of scalding! It is therefore best to allow the
engine to cool down before removing the cap.
■ Do not touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan may switch itself on automatically even if the ignition is off.
■
 Engine oil pressure

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
When the indicator light  is flashing , the engine oil pressure is too low.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Oil pressure: Owner's manual!

› Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the level of the engine
oil » page 186.
If the warning light  flashes, do not drive any further, even if the oil level is
correct! Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed.
auf Seite 33.
If the warning light  lights up or flashes, either the coolant temperature is
too high or the coolant level is too low.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
PLEASE CHECK ENGINE COOLANT! Owner's manual!

› Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the coolant lev-
el » page 188.
› If the coolant level is too low, add coolant to the reservoir » page 188.
If the indicator light  disappears after adding coolant and switching on the
ignition, you may continue your journey.
If the coolant level is within the specified range and the indicator light  is still
illuminated, then there may be a malfunction of the cooling fan.
› Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary » page 218, Fuses in
the engine compartment.
34
Using the system
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The indicator light  comes on if the bonnet is unlocked.
 Coolant
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
 Bonnet

Seek help from a specialist garage.

CAUTION
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
■ Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
■
 Boot lid

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The indicator light  comes on if the boot lid is opened.
  Power Steering / steering lock (system KESSY)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
Power steering
If the warning light  lights up, this indicates a partial failure of the power
steering and the steering forces can be greater.
If the indicator light  lights up, this indicates a complete failure of the power
steering and the steering assist has failed (significantly higher steering forces).
› Stop the car, turn the ignition off and on again.
If the indicator light  or  does not light up any more after you switch the
engine back on, the ASR is fully functional again.

If the warning light  or  comes on again, then immediately seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
Steering lock (KESSY system)
While the warning light  is flashing, the steering lock cannot be released.
If the warning light  flashes, a signal tone sounds, and the following message appears in the MAXI DOT-display: Steering column lock. Workshop! , as
the electrical steering lock is faulty. Seek assistance from a specialist garage
immediately.
If the warning light  flashes, a beep sounds and in the MAXI DOT display the
message Steering lock defective appears, then the electric steering lock is
faulty. Park the car,  do not continue the journey. After switching off the ignition, it is then no longer possible to lock the steering, to activate the electrical components (e.g. radio, navigation system), to switch on the ignition again
and to start the engine. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Notice
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, the indicator light  comes on after switching on the ignition. If the warning light 
does not go out after moving a short distance, this means there is an error in
the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Engine oil level

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The indicator light  lights up (oil quantity too low)
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
 Check oil level!
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Traction Control System (ASR)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The warning light  flashes to show that the ASR is currently operating.
If the warning light  illuminates, there is a fault in the ASR.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.

Error: Traction control (ASR)
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
If the indicator light  comes on immediately after starting the engine, the
ASR can be switched off for technical reasons.
› Switch the ignition off and on again.
If the indicator light  does not light up again after you switch the engine
back on, the ASR is fully functional again.
Further information » page 152.
Notice
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, the indicator light  comes on after switching on the ignition. If the warning light 
does not go out after moving a short distance, this means there is an error in
the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
› Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the level of the engine

The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds. If no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on
again after driving about 100 km.
If the warning light  illuminates, there is a fault in the ESC.
oil » page 186.
The indicator light  flashes (engine oil level sensor faulty)
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
 Oil sensor: Workshop!
If the engine oil level sensor is faulty, the warning light  flashes several
times and an audible signal sounds when the ignition is turned on.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The warning light  flashes to show that the ESC is currently operating.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.

Error: Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
If the indicator light  comes on immediately after starting the engine, the
ESC can be switched off for technical reasons.
› Switch the ignition off and on again.

Instruments and Indicator Lights
35
If the indicator light  does not light up after you switch the engine back on,
the ESR is fully functional again.
Further information » page 151.
Notice
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, the indicator light  comes on after switching on the ignition. If the warning light 
does not go out after moving a short distance, this means there is an error in
the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
The following message, for example, may be shown in the MAXI DOT display.

INFORMATION Check front right low beam!
 Adaptive headlights (AFS)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
If the indicator light  flashes for 1 minute while driving or after switching on
the ignition, there is a problem with the adaptive headlights.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
 Antilock brake system (ABS)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst

auf Seite 33.
If the warning light  lights up, there is a fault in the ABS.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Error: ABS

Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
WARNING
If the warning light  is displayed simultaneously with the warning light
 » page 33,  Brake system ,  do not continue your journey! Seek help
from a specialist garage.
■ A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehicle's braking distance – risk of accident!
■
 Rear fog light

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The warning light  comes on when the rear fog light is switched on.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The warning light  comes on if a bulb is faulty.
The indicator light  lights up within a few seconds after switching on the ignition or when a light with a faulty bulb is switched on.
36
Using the system
 Exhaust inspection system
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
If the warning light  lights up, there is a fault in the exhaust inspection system. The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Glow plug system (diesel engine)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The warning light  lights up after the ignition has been switched on. Once
the light has gone out, the engine can be started immediately.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the indicator light  does not come
on at all or lights up continuously.
If the warning light  begins to flash while driving, a fault exists in the engine
control. The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Bulb failure

When the “tourist light” (travel mode) is » page 69 active, the warning light
flashes  for 10 seconds each time the ignition is switched on.

The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS.
Cornering light (AFS) has no function. Owner's manual!
WARNING
The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a
fire hazard and could cause serious injury. Therefore, never stop the vehicle
at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact with
flammable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel or
the like.
■ Always adjust your speed to suit weather, road, region and traffic conditions. The recommendations indicated by the indicator light must not
tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic.
 Engine performance check (petrol engine)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
■
auf Seite 33.
If the warning light  illuminates, there is a fault in the engine control. The
system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Diesel particulate filter (diesel engine)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust. The
soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a
regular basis.
If the indicator light  lights up, soot has accumulated in the filter.
To clean the filter, and where traffic conditions permit » , drive as follows for
at least 15 minutes or until the indicator light  goes out.



4th or 5th gear engaged (automatic transmission: Position S).
Vehicle speed at least 70 km/h.
Engine speed between 1800-2500 rpm.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning icon  goes out.
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light  does not go out and
the warning light  begins to flash.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.

Diesel particulate filter: Owner's manual!
The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode. After switching the
ignition off and on again the indicator light, the indicator light  also lights up.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
CAUTION
As long as the indicator light  lights up, one must take into account an increased fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of
the engine.
■ Using diesel fuel with an increased sulphur content can considerably reduce
the life of the diesel particle filter. A ŠKODA partner will be able to tell you
which countries use diesel fuel with a high sulphur content.
■
Notice
To assist the combustion process of the soot particles in the filter, we recommend that regularly driving short distances be avoided.
■ If the engine is turned off during the filter cleaning process or shortly afterwards, the cooling fan may turn on automatically for a few minutes.
■
 Fuel reserve

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The indicator light  lights up if the fuel level is less than about 9 litres.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.

Please refuel. Range: ... km
CAUTION
Never drive when the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of
fuel can cause misfiring. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the
engine and the exhaust system.
Notice
The text in the display goes out only after refuelling and driving a short distance.
Instruments and Indicator Lights
37
If the warning light  flashes after re-starting the engine again, then immediately seek the assistance of specialized dealer.
 Airbag system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
If the warning light  lights up, there is a fault in the airbag system.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Error: Airbag

The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically even if one
of the airbags is switched off.
Further information » page 196, Tyre pressure monitor.
Notice
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, the indicator light  comes on after switching on the ignition. If the warning light 
does not go out after moving a short distance, this means there is an error in
the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Windscreen washer fluid level
If a front, side or head airbag or belt tensioner has been switched off using
the vehicle system tester:
› The warning light  lights up for approx. 4 seconds after switching on the
ignition and then flashes again for approx. 12 seconds.
If the windscreen washer fluid level is too low, the indicator light  comes on.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Airbag/belt tensioner deactivated.

If the air bag was switched off using the key-operated switch on the side of
the dash panel on the passenger side:
› The indicator light  comes on for around 4 seconds after the ignition has
been switched on;
› The deactivated air bag is indicated by the illumination of the warning
light » page 20    in the middle of the dash panel .
WARNING
When there is a fault in the airbag system, there is a risk that the system
will not be triggered during an accident. Therefore, it must be checked immediately by a specialized dealer.
 Tyre inflation pressure

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst


Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
Top up wash fluid!
Top up with liquid » page 184, Windscreen washer system.
 Pads

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
If the indicator light  is lit, the brake pads are worn.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.

Check brake wear!
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
  Turn signal system
auf Seite 33.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The warning light  lights up, if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in one of the tyres.
Either the left  or right  indicator light flashes depending on the position of
the turn signal lever.
An audible signal sounds as a warning signal.
If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice
its normal rate.
› Check and adjust the pressure in all tyres » page 194, Service life of tyres.
If the indicator light  lights up, there is a fault in the system.
› Stop the car, turn the ignition off and on again.
38
Using the system
When the hazard warning light system is switched on, all of the turn signal
lights as well as both warning lights will flash as well.
 Low beam

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Information system
auf Seite 33.
The warning light  comes on when low beam is selected.
 Fog lights

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
 Cruise control system
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
The warning light  comes on when the cruise control is active.
 Lever lock / tempering (KESSY system)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 33.
If the warning light  lights up, operate the brake pedal. This is necessary to
move the selector lever from position P and N » page 143or to start the engine in vehicles with the KESSY system » page 139.
 Main beam

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
auf Seite 33.
The warning light  comes on when the fog lights are operating.

Driver information system
auf Seite 33.
40
40
40
41
Using the information system
Display of a low temperature
Gear recommendation
Door, boot lid or bonnet warning
The information system provides the driver with alerts and messages about
individual vehicle systems. This information and advice is shown in the instrument cluster display or indicated by the lighting up of the corresponding warning light in the instrument cluster.
The information system provides the following information and instructions
(depending on vehicle equipment).
› Data relating to the multi-function display (MFD) » page 41.
› Data relating to the Maxi DOT display » page 44.
› Service interval display » page 46.
› Auto Check Control » page 31.
› Selector lever positions for an automatic gearbox » page 142.
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
The warning light  comes on when the main beam is selected or when the
headlight flasher is operated.
Information system
39
Display of a low temperature
Using the information system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 39.
Prompt in the MAXI DOT display
If the outside temperature while driving drops to below +4°C, the following
icon appears on the display in front of the temperature display . An audible
signal is emitted.
If the outside temperature is already below +4°C when turning the ignition on,
the  icon appears immediately.
Fig. 26 Buttons / dial: on the operating lever / on the multifunction
steering wheel

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 39.
Some functions of the information system can be operated using the buttons
on the operating lever » fig. 26 or on the multifunction steering wheel.
Description of the operation
Button /
wheel
» fig. 26
A
B
Action
Operation
Briefly push up or down
Select data / set data values
Open main menu in the
MAXI DOT display » page 44
Show indication / confirm information
to go back one level in the menu of the
MAXI DOT display » page 44
Open main menu in the
MAXI DOT display » page 44
Press and hold button
Press briefly
Press briefly
C
Press and hold button
D
Turn upwards or downwards
Press briefly
Prompt in the segment display
If the outside temperature while driving drops to below +4°C, the temperature
display will show up with the following icon in front . An audible signal is
emitted.
If the outside temperature is already below +4°C when turning the ignition on,
the temperature display and the  icon appear immediately.
After pressing button A » fig. 26 on page 40 , the information which was
shown last is indicated.
WARNING
Even at temperatures around +4 °C, black ice may still be on the road surface! Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature display that there is no ice on the road.
Gear recommendation
Fig. 27
Information on the selected
gear / Gear recommendation
Select data / set data values
Show indication / confirm information

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 39.
The function of the gear recommendation helps to reduce fuel consumption.
40
Using the system

Caption » fig. 27
Vehicles with a segment display
If at least one door or the boot or bonnet is open, the indicator lights  or 
and  come on in the instrument cluster » page 32, Warning lights .
 Optimal gear engaged
 Recommended gear
Recommended gear
The gear recommendation is intended only for vehicles with a manual transmission or for vehicles with an automatic transmission in manual shift mode
(Tiptronic).
An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a
door is open.
Multifunction display (MFA)

The recommended 1) gear and an arrow icon 2) displayed.
›  - Recommends that you shift to a higher gear
›  - Recommends that you shift to a lower gear
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
If, for vehicles with manual transmission in the display e.g.   is shown in the
Display, it means that it is better to change from a lower gear to 4th. Switch
gear.
Memory
Information overview
Warning at excessive speeds
If in vehicles with automatic mode for manual shifting (Tiptronic), for example,
  is shown in the Display, it means that it is better to change from the 4th
gear to a higher gear.
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different
driving situations, such as overtaking.
For the sake of the environment
A suitably selected gear has the following advantages.
■ It helps to reduce fuel consumption.
■ It reduces the operating noise.
■ It protects the environment.
■ It benefits the durability and reliability of the engine.
Door, boot lid or bonnet warning

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 39.
Vehicles with a MAXI DOT display
If at least one door, the boot or bonnet is open, the display indicates the relevant open door, boot or bonnet vehicle icon.
1)
2)
Introduction
42
42
43
The driving data is displayed on the multifunction display.
The multifunction display only operates if the ignition is switched on. After the
ignition is switched on, the function that was last selected before switching
off the ignition is displayed.
For vehicles with a MAXI DOT display, the menu item MFA must be selected
and confirmed in the main menu » page 44, MAXI DOT display.
On vehicles with a MAXI DOT display, there is an option to fade out some of
the information » page 44, Settings.
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully
responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
■ Even at temperatures around +4 °C, black ice may still be on the road surface! Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature display that there is no ice on the road.
■
CAUTION
Pull out the ignition key if coming into contact with the display (e.g. when
cleaning) to prevent any possible damage. On vehicles with the KESSY system,
switch off the ignition and open the driver's door.
On vehicles with automatic mode for manual shifting (Tiptronic), the currently engaged gear is displayed.
For vehicles with segment display, the arrow is displayed behind the gear indication.
Information system
41

Notice
In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of
measures.
■ If the display of the second speed is activated in mph, the current speed is
not indicated in km/h on the display.
■ The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.
■
If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically
erased.
Total-trip memory (memory 2)
The total trip memory collates the data from any number of individual trips up
to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or a 1999 km distance or, for vehicles
with a MAXI DOT display, 99 hours and 59 minutes, or a 9999 km distance.
The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calculation starts all over again.
Memory
Fig. 28
Multi-function display - memory display
Unlike the single-trip memory, the total-trip memory is not deleted after a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours.
The following values of the selected memory are set to zero.
› Average fuel consumption.
› Distance driven.
› Average speed.
› Driving time

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 41.
The multifunction display is equipped with two automatic memories, 1 and 2.
Display of the selected memory in the display at the position A » fig. 28 .


Single-trip memory
Total-trip memory
Select memory
› Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display » page 42.
Confirm the element again to switch between the individual memories.
Reseting
› Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display » page 42.
› Select the desired memory.
› Press and hold button B or adjustment wheel D » fig. 26 on page 40 .
Single-trip memory (memory 1)
The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the
ignition is switched on until it is switched off.
New data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information if
the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition.
42
Using the system
Notice
Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data.
Information overview

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 41.
Outside temperature
The current outside temperature is displayed.
For vehicles with a MAXI DOT display this information is always shown.
Driving time
The time travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed.
If you want to measure the time travelled from a particular moment in time on,
at this moment, reset the memory by setting the button to zero » page 42,
Memory.
The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes and
on vehicles which are fitted with a MAXI DOT display, it is 99 hours and 59 minutes. The indicator is set back to zero if this period is exceeded.

Current fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption level is displayed in litres/100 km1). You can use
this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel consumption.
The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low
speed2).
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is displayed
in litres/100 km1 ).
If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of
time, you must set the memory at the start of the new measurement to
zero » page 42, Memory. After erasing the memory, no value is displayed until
you have driven approx. 300 m.
The display is updated regularly while you are driving.
Range
The range indicates the distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on
the level of fuel in the tank and the same style of driving as before.
The display is shown in steps of 10 km. After lighting up of the indicator light 
the display is shown in steps of 5 km.
The fuel consumption over the last 50 km is used to calculate the information.
The range will increase if you drive in a more economical manner.
If the memory is set to zero (after disconnecting the battery), a fuel consumption of 10 l./100 km is calculated for the range; afterwards the value is updated
according to the style of driving.
Distance travelled
The distance travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed.
If you want to measure the distance travelled from a particular moment in time
on, at this moment, reset the memory by setting the button to zero » page 42,
Memory.
The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1 999 km or 9 999 km on
vehicles with a MAXI DOT display. The indicator is set back to zero if this period
is exceeded.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Average speed
The average speed since the memory was last erased is displayed in km/hour .
To determine the average speed over a certain period of time, set the memory
to zero at the start of the measurement » page 42, Memory.
After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m driven.
The display is updated regularly while you are driving.
Current driving speed
The current speed displayed is identical to the display on the speedometer
2 » fig. 20 on page 28.
Oil temperature3)
If the engine oil temperature is in the range 80-110 °C, the engine operating
temperature is reached.
If the oil temperature is lower than 80 °C or above 110 °C, avoid high engine
revs, full throttle and high engine loads.
If the oil temperature is lower than 50 °C or if a fault in the system for checking the oil temperature is present,  . symbols are displayed instead of the oil
temperature.
Warning against excessive speeds
Set the speed limit, for example, for the maximum permissible speed in
town » page 43, Warning at excessive speeds.
Warning at excessive speeds

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 41.
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary
› Select the menu item Warning at (MAXI DOT display) or  (segment display).
› Activate the speed limit option by confirming this menu item4).
› Set the desired speed limit, e.g. 50 km/h.
› Store the speed limit by confirming the set value, or wait several seconds;
your settings will be saved automatically.
On some models in certain countries, the display appears in kilometres/litre.
On some models in certain countries, - -.- km/ltr. is displayed when the vehicle is stationary.
Applies to vehicles using the MAXI DOT display.
If no value is set the output value 30 km/h is automatically displayed.
Information system
43

The speed limit can be adjusted from 30 km/h to 250 km/h in 5 km/h increments.
Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
› Select the menu item Warning at (MAXI DOT display) or  (segment display).
› Drive at the desired speed, e.g. 50 km/h.
› Confirm the current speed as the speed limit.
If you wish to adjust the set speed limit, you can do so in 5 km/h intervals (e.g.
the accepted speed of 47 km/h increases to 50 km/h or decreases to 45 km/h).
CAUTION
Pull out the ignition key if it comes into contact with the display (e.g. when
cleaning) to prevent any possible damage. On vehicles with the KESSY system,
switch off the ignition and open the driver's door.
Main menu

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 44.
› Store the speed limit, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved au-
In order to activate the main menu MAIN MENU press and hold down Button
A or C » fig. 26 on page 40. By briefly pressing the C button you will reach
one level higher.
Change or disable speed limit
› Select the menu item Warning at (MAXI DOT display) or  (segment display).
› By confirming the stored value, the speed limit is disabled.
› By reconfirming, the option to change the speed limit is activated.
Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment)
tomatically.
If the set speed limit is exceeded, an audible signal will sound as a warning.
The menu item Speed warning (MAXI DOT display) or  (Segment display) appears in the display at the same time as the set threshold.
The set driving mode is stored even after switching the ignition on and off.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Main menu
Settings
Compass point display
44
Using the system
Notice
If warning messages are displayed, these messages must be verified to access the main menu » page 40, Using the information system.
■ If the display is not activated at that moment, the menu always shifts to one
of the higher levels after approx. 10 seconds.
■ Using the factory-fitted radio or navigation system » Radio operating instructions or» navigation system operating instructions.
■
44
44
46
The MAXI DOT display provides you with information about the current operating state of your vehicle. Depending on the vehicle equipment, it also provides
you with data relating to the radio, multifunction display (MFD), mobile phone,
navigation system, automatic gearbox and devices connected via the MDI input. Furthermore, it allows the adjustment of some other features of your vehicle.
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
MFD (Multifunction display) » page 41
Audio » Operating instructions for the radio
Navigation » Operating instructions for the navigation system
Phone » page 119;
Aux. heating » page 116
Assistants » page 162
Vehicle status » page 31
Settings » page 44
The Audio and Navigation menu items are only displayed when the factory-fitted radio or navigation system is switched on.
MAXI DOT display

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Settings

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 44.
You can change certain settings by means of the MAXI DOT display. The current menu item is shown in the top of the display under a line.
The following information can be selected (depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle).

Language
You can set the language for the display texts here.
Lights and Visibility
The following functions can be activated, deactivated or adjusted here:
Autom. blind (Estate)
This is where the automatic roll-up function of the boot roll cover can be deactivated/activated when opening the boot lid.
Coming Home
MFD displays
Activate or deactivate certain displays of the multifunction display here.
Leaving Home
Comfort
The following functions can be activated, deactivated or adjusted here:
Footwell light
Rain closing
ATA confirm
Central locking
Window op.
Mirror down
Mirror adjust.
Factory setting
a)
b)
Activate/deactivate the function for automatically
closing the window and the tilt/slide sunroof in a
locked vehicle when it starts raininga). If the function
is set and it is not raining, the windows including the
panoramic tilt/ slide sunroof will close automatically
after approx. 12 hours.
Switch on/off the audible signal indicating activation
of the anti-theft alarm system. Further information » page 54.
Switch on/off the central locking and automatic locking function, also applies to the KESSY system. Further information » page 52, Individual settings.
Only convenience mode for the driver window or for
all of the windows can be adjusted here. Further information » page 61, Window convenience operation.
Activate/deactivate the function for mirror lowering
on the front passenger side when engaging the reverse gearb). Further information » page 78, Fold in
passenger's mirror.
Activation / deactivation of the function of synchronous exterior mirror settings. Further information » page 78, Synchronous adjustment of both
mirrrors.
Restore the Convenience factory setting.
This function is only available on vehicles with a rain sensor.
This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable driver seat.
Daytime running
lights
Rear wiper
Lane ch. flash
Travel mode
Factory setting
Activate/deactivate and adjust the light duration of
the COMING HOME function. Further information » page 70.
Switch on/off and adjust the light duration of the
LEAVING HOME function. Further information » page 70.
Activate/deactivate and adjust the footwell light intensity.
Activate/deactivate “DAY LIGHT” function. Further information » page 67, Daylight running lights (DAY
LIGHT).
Activate/deactivate the function of the automatic
rear window wiping. Further information » page 76,
Automatic rear window wiper (Superb Combi).
Activate/deactivate the lane ch. flash function. Further information » page 67.
Activate/deactivate the travel mode feature. Further
information » page 69, Tourist lights (Travel mode).
Restore the factory setting for the lighting.
Time
The time, time format (12 or 24 hour indicator) and the changeover between
summer/winter time can be set here.
Winter tyres
Here, the speed and the switching on and off of the acoustic signals when exceeding this speed can be adjusted. This function is, for example, used for winter tyres where the maximum permissible speed is lower than the maximum
speed of the vehicle » page 193.
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and
the following message appears in the information display.
maximum ... km/h.
Units of measurement
The units for the temperature, consumption and distance driven can be set
here.
Information system

45
Assistants
The tones of the audible signals for the parking aid can be adjusted here.
The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or,
where applicable, days until the service due date is reached.
Alt. speed dis.
Here, the display of the second speed in mph1) can be activated.
The information regarding the service intervals can be found in the service
schedule.
Further information » page 31, Display of the alternative speed.
Notice
Information is retained in the Service Interval Display even after the vehicle
battery is disconnected.
Service
The days and kilometres remaining until the next service can be displayed
here.
Prompt in the MAXI DOT display
Further information » page 46, Service interval display.
Oil change service
If an oil change service is due, the message appears, Oil change in ... km or ....
days.
Factory setting
The factory setting of the functions of the MAXI DOT display can be restored
here.
As soon as the service interval date has arrived, the message Oil change now!
appears once the ignition has been switched on.
Compass point display

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 44.
For vehicles with a factory fitted navigation system, an abbreviation for each
point of the compass (depending on the current direction of travel) is shown at
the top left-hand corner of the display.
Service interval display
Introduction
The following message is displayed for 10 seconds.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Prompt in the MAXI DOT display
Prompt in the segment display
Resetting Service Interval Display
46
47
47
The service interval display shows the time and mileage to next service event.
The service due date is automatically displayed on the display and this information can be displayed manually at any time if necessary.
1)
For models with the speedometer in mph, the second speed is displayed in km/h.
46
Using the system
As soon as the service interval date has arrived, the message Inpection now!
appears once the ignition has been switched on.
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
You can view the remaining distance and days until the next service appointment at any time when the ignition is switched on by going to the Service
menu item » page 44, Settings or from the Vehicle status Vehicle status in the
main menu of the MAXI DOTdisplay » page 44, Main menu.
The compass point display only operates when the ignition is switched on.

Inspection
If an inspection is due, the message appears Inspection in ... km or ... days.
Oil change ... km / ... days
Inspection ... km / ... days
Prompt in the segment display
Fig. 29
Segment display: Example of a
message
Information on the oil change service is displayed at first, followed by information on the inspection when button 3 is pressed again.
› The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position A .
› The symbol  and the number of days remaining until the next service interval are displayed in position B .
› The symbol  and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service
interval are displayed in position C .
Resetting Service Interval Display
We recommend that this reset is completed by a specialist garage.
Explanation of graphic » fig. 29.
 Service due
A Differentiating between types of service
B Days remaining until the next service interval
C Kilometres remaining until the next service interval1)
Differentiating between types of service
The service type is determined by the number in position A » fig. 29.

Oil change service

Inspection
We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. Incorrectly setting the service interval display could cause problems to the vehicle.
Variable Service Interval
For vehicles with variable service interval, after resetting the oil change service
display new values of the service interval are displayed, which are based on
the previous operating conditions of the vehicle.
These values are then further adapted by going to the actual operating conditions of the vehicle.
Service due
If a service becomes due, then the following information is displayed for about
10 seconds » fig. 29.
› The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position A .
› The symbol  and the number of days remaining until the next service interval are displayed in position B .
› The symbol  and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service
interval are displayed in position C .
As soon as the due date for the service has been reached, the flashing icon 
and the message OIL CHNG or INSPEC_ appear in the display for about 20 seconds after the ignition has been switched on.
Display the days and distance until the next service interval
You can press button 3 » fig. 20 on page 28 continuously to display the remaining distance and days until the next service interval whenever the ignition
is switched on.
1)
The kilometres remaining until the next service interval are displayed instead of the odometer.
Information system
47
› The indicator light in the driver door begins flashing.
› The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
Unlocking and opening
Unlocking and locking

Displaying an error
If the indicator light in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2
seconds, and then lights up for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle key
Unlock/lock with remote control
Unlocking / locking - KESSY
Information message
Parking vehicle
Safe securing system
Individual settings
Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the inside
Child safety lock
Opening/closing a door
WARNING
Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthorized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the
ignition or start the engine - there is the danger of injury and accidents occurring!
■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. Children might, for
example, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear. The vehicle
might then move off – risk of accident! In an emergency, they would be unable to leave the vehicle on their own or to help themselves. Very high or
very low temperatures can be fatal!
■ If the car is locked from the outside and the safelock system is switched
on, there must not be any person in the car as it is then not possible to
open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked doors make it
more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to
life.
49
49
50
51
51
51
52
52
53
53
■
Your car is equipped with a central locking system.
The central locking system allows you to lock and unlock all doors, the fuel filler flap and tailgate at the same time based on the current setting1).
The safe securing system » page 51 is integrated in the central locking system. Once the car is locked from the outside, the door locks2) are automatically
blocked by the safe securing system » .
The following takes place after unlocking1).
› The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.
› The interior light, which is switched by the door contact, comes on.
› The safe securing system is switched off .
› The indicator light in the driver door stops flashing.
› The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
2)
The following takes place after locking1).
› The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are locked.
› The interior lights switched by the door contact come on.
› The safe securing system is switched on2).
1)
2)
Depending on the individual setting » page 52 .
This function only applies to certain countries.
48
Using the system
Notice
When leaving the vehicle, always check if this is locked.
In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked
doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to
the vehicle.
■ Upon failure of the central locking system, only the driver's door can be unlocked or locked using the key. The other doors and the tailgate can be emergency locked or emergency unlocked.
■ Emergency locking of the door » page 212.
■ Emergency unlocking of the boot lid » page 213.
■
■
Unlock/lock with remote control
Vehicle key
Fig. 31
Remote control key
Fig. 30
Remote control key

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 48.
Two remote control keys » fig. 30 are supplied with the vehicle.
The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control
key. The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle.
The operating range of the remote control key is approx. 30 m. But this range
of the remote control can be reduced if the batteries are weak.
The wireless key has a flip-out key bit.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 48.
Explanation of graphic » fig. 31
 Unlocking the vehicle
 Locking the vehicle
 Unlocking the boot lid
A Folding out/folding up of the key bit
B Warning light
The spare key must by initialised by a specialist garage after repair or replacement of the receiver unit. Only then can the remote control key be used again.
Unlocking
The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been unlocked.
CAUTION
Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected
against moisture and severe shocks.
■ Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust,
etc.) have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ignition lock.
■ The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti-theft alarm system
does react to the remote control at less than approx. 3 metres
away » page 211.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
30 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safelock system1)
or anti-theft alarm system will be switched on. This function is intended to
prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.
Notice
If you lose a key, please contact a specialist garage, who will be able to provide
you with a new one.
If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the
turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.
■
1)
The seat and mirror are adjusted after the vehicle is unlocked » page 82.
Locking
The turn signal lights flash once as confirmation that the vehicle has been
locked.
The current position of the seat and mirror after the vehicle is
locked » page 82.

This function only applies to certain countries.
Unlocking and opening
49
Checking the battery condition
If the red indicator light B » fig. 31 does not flash when you press a button on
the remote control key, the battery is empty. Replace the battery » page 211.
CAUTION
Only operate the remote control when the doors and boot lid are closed and
the vehicle is in your line of sight.
■ If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote control key.
■ The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by signal interference from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same
frequency range (e.g. mobile phone, TV transmitter).
■
Notice
For vehicles with anti-theft alarm the acoustic signals can also be activated/
deactivated by locking/unlocking » page 44.
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and
locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key. The key
must be in one of the areas A, B or C » fig. 32 (up to about 1.5 meters away
from the vehicle).
Unlocking
› Grab the door handle of the front door or cover the sensor 2 » fig. 32 with
the whole palm of your hand » .
Locking
› Touch the sensor 1 » fig. 32 with your fingers.
On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved
into the position P before unlocking.
Unlocking the boot lid
› Press the button in the handle of the boot lid » page 55.
Switching off the safelock system
› Use your fingers to touch the sensor
Unlocking / locking - KESSY
1 » fig. 32 twice within 2 seconds.
If you cover the sensor 2 at the same time as the sensor 1 when unlocking
the vehicle, it is not unlocked.
If the vehicle is locked via the sensor 1 , it will not be possible to unlock it
again in the following 2 seconds via the sensor 2 - prevents accidental unlocking.
The KESSY system can find the valid key, even if it was left in the front of the
vehicle's roof for example D » fig. 32. It is therefore not always necessary to
know where the key is.
Fig. 32 KESSY: Name of the zones/sensors in the handle of the front door

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 48.
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and
locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key.
Unlocking or locking areas » fig. 32
Front door left
Front door right
C Luggage compartment lid
D Roof front
A
B
50
Using the system
CAUTION
Do not use objects which might prevent direct contact between the hand
and the sensor.
■ Some types of gloves can impair the function of the grip sensor.
■ After leaving the vehicle, it does not lock automatically, the procedure for
locking the vehicle must therefore be observed.
■ If the battery in the key is weak or discharged, the vehicle may not be unlocked or locked via the KESSY system. In this case, use the emergency unlocking or emergency locking on the driver's door » page 212.
■
Information message

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Parking vehicle
auf Seite 48.
Key in the vehicle
The protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle unlocks the
vehicle automatically if the following conditions are met.
 The vehicle, including the boot lit, has been locked.
 The key with which the vehicle has been locked remains in the vehicle in
the zone D » fig. 32 on page 50.
The turn signal lights flash four times as confirmation that the vehicle has
been unlocked again.
The following message is shown in the information cluster display.


Key in vehicle.
KEY IN VEHICLE
Additionally, on vehicles which are fitted with the anti-theft alarm system, an
audible signal sounds.
The system has not found a key
If the system has not found a key in the vehicle, the following message appears in the display of the instrument cluster.
 Key not found.
 NO KEY
This can occur if the key is outside the vehicle, the battery in the key is discharged, the key is defective or the electromagnetic field is strongly disturbed.
Fault in KESSY system
If there is a fault in the KESSY system, the following message will appear in
the display of the instrument cluster.
 Keyless access system faulty.
 CHECK KEYLESS
Low voltage of the key battery
If the voltage of the battery in the remote control key is too low, the following
message appears in the display of the instrument cluster.
 Change the key battery!
 KEY BATTERY
Change the key battery » page 211!

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 48.
If the vehicle is not unlocked within 60 or 90 hours, the sensors in the handle
of the driver's or front passenger's door are deactivated automatically » fig. 32
on page 50.
Activation after 60 hours
› Unlock the driver's door using the sensor 2 » fig. 32 on page 50.
› Press the handle of the boot lid.
› Unlock the vehicle using the symbol button  on the remote control key.
› Unlocking the driver's door in an emergency » page 212.
Activation after 90 hours
› Unlock the vehicle using the symbol button  on the remote control key.
› Unlocking the driver's door in an emergency » page 212.
Safe securing system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 48.
The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the outside. Afterwards, it is not possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the inside or from the outside.
This fact is pointed out by the following message on the display of the instrument cluster after switching out the ignition.


Observe SAFE locking! Owner's manual!
CHECK SAFELOCK
Switching off
Closing can take place in one of the following ways.
› By locking twice within 2 seconds.
› By disabling the interior monitoring » page 54, Interior monitor and towing
protection.
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off, the door
can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever.
Switching on
The safelock switches on automatically the next time the vehicle is locked and
unlocked.
Unlocking and opening
51

Switch-on display
The indicator light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession, afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals.
If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked again.
In addition, it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the car by
pressing the central locking button .
Switch-off display
The indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out
and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.
The vehicle doors can be unlocked and opened at any time by pulling once on
the door opening lever.
WARNING
If the car is locked and the safe securing system activated, no people must
remain in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or
open a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for
rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
WARNING
Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside, for example at road crossings.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the inside
Fig. 33
Central locking button
Notice
This function only applies to certain countries.
Individual settings

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 48.
The following central locking functions can be set via the MAXI DOT display » page 44, Settings .
Opening a single door
This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver's door. The other
doors and the fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked after being
opened again.
Unlocking doors on one side of a vehicle
This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver's side. The other
doors and the fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked after being
opened again.
Unlocking the vehicle with the KESSY system
This function enables you to unlock all the doors, individual doors, both doors
on the left or right vehicle side. The other doors and the fuel filler flap remain
locked and are only unlocked after being opened again.
Automatic locking/unlocking
All doors are locked from a speed of around 15 km/h. The button in the handle
of the boot lid is deactivated.
52
Using the system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 48.
If the vehicle was not locked from the outside, it can also be unlocked and
locked with the rocker switch on the door opening lever of the driver's or front
passenger door » fig. 33 even without the ignition switched on. While a door is
opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
Locking
› Press /» fig. 33 press.
The symbol  in the button comes on.
Unlocking
› Press /» fig. 33 press.
The symbol  in the button is no longer illuminated.

The following applies if your vehicle has been locked using the central locking
button.
› It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside (safety
feature, e.g. when stopping at traffic lights etc.).
› The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the
opening lever of the respective door.
› In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked
doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access
to the vehicle.
WARNING
Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
■ If the safelock system is switched on » page 51, the door opening lever
and the central locking buttons do not operate.
Opening/closing a door
■
Fig. 35 Door handle/door opening lever:

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 48.
Opening from the outside
Child safety lock
› Unlock the vehicle and pull the door handle
Fig. 34
Parental Control: Left rear door
A » fig. 35 on the door you wish
to open.
Opening from the inside
› Pull on door opening lever B of the respective door and push the door away
from you.
Closing from the inside
› Grasp pull handle C and close the door.
WARNING
Make sure that the door has closed correctly as it can open suddenly
while driving – risk of death!
■ Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening/closing
range – risk of injury!
■ An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the
vehicle is on an incline – risk of injury!
■ Never drive with the doors open - it can be fatal!
■

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 48.
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the inside. The door can only be opened from the outside.
You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.
Switching on
› Turn the slot of the safety lock in the direction of the arrow » fig. 34 (mirrorinverted on the right-hand door).
Switching off
› Turn the slot of the safety lock in the opposite direction to the arrow » fig. 34
(mirror-inverted on the right-hand door).
Unlocking and opening
53
Anti-theft alarm system

Activating/deactivating

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Activating/deactivating
Interior monitor and towing protection
54
54
The anti-theft alarm system (hereinafter referred to only as alarm system) increases protection against break-in attempts into the vehicle.
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to
break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to only as alarm).
An alarm is triggered when the following monitored areas of the vehicle have a
fault.
› Bonnet.
› Boot lid.
› Doors.
› Ignition lock.
› Vehicle inclination » page 54.
› Interior of car » page 54.
› A drop in voltage of the on-board power supply.
› Socket of the factory-fitted towing device » page 163, Towing a trailer.
An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is disconnected while the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
The alarm is switched off by unlocking the vehicle or switching on the ignition.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 54.
Activating
The anti-theft alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
30 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safelock system
or anti-theft alarm system will be switched on. This function is intended to
prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.
Deactivating
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated automatically after the vehicle is
unlocked. If the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds, the anti-theft alarm
system is automatically activated again.
The alarm system is also deactivated if you unlock the driver door using the
key within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle.
Notice
If the car is unlocked with the key in the driver door, insert the key into the
ignition and switch the ignition to deactivate the alarm system.
■ You can switch the audible signalling of the activation of the warning system
on and off in the MAXI DOT display in the menu item ATA confirm. » page 44.
■
Interior monitor and towing protection
CAUTION
Before leaving the vehicle, it must be checked that all of the windows, doors
and the sliding/tilting roof are locked in order to ensure the full functionality of
the anti-theft alarm system.
Fig. 36
Button for interior monitor and
towing protection
Notice
The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 54.
The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and then triggers the
alarm.
54
Using the system

The tow-away protection triggers the alarm if a vehicle is registered as being
on an inclination.
WARNING
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the luggage compartment lid. Otherwise, the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is
moving, even if the lid was locked – risk of accident!
■ Never drive with the boot lid open or ajar, as otherwise exhaust gases
may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
■ Do not press on the rear window when closing the luggage compartment
lid, as otherwise this could crack – risk of injury!
■
Activating
The interior monitor and the towing protection are activated automatically after the vehicle is locked.
Deactivating
› Switch off the ignition.
› Open the driver door.
› Press the symbol button  » fig. 36 on the B-column on the driver's side.
The symbol lighting in the button changes  from red to orange.
› Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
CAUTION
If the vehicle was locked before the boot lid was closed, the lid is automatically
locked right away as soon as it is closed » page 56.
Deactivate the interior monitor and the towing protection if there is a possibility of the alarm being triggered by movements from (e.g. children or animals)
within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train
or ship) or towed.
CAUTION
The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the
interior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the
glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehicle.
■ The anti-theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked even if
the safe securing system is deactivated. The interior monitor is however not
activated.
■
Notice
The function of the button in the grip above the licence plate is deactivated
when starting off or at a speed of 5 km/hour or more for vehicles with central
locking. The function is restored after the vehicle stops and the door is
opened.
■ Repeated opening and closing of the boot lid can lead to a temporary failure
of the function due to the overheating protection of the motors of the Twindoor system.
■
Twindoor - open/close small boot lid
Luggage compartment lid

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Twindoor - open/close small boot lid
TwinDoor - open / close large boot
Open / close (Superb Combi)
Delayed locking of the boot lid
55
56
56
56
Fig. 37 Handle of boot lid/opened small boot lid

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 55.
After unlocking, the boot lid can be opened with the button in the handle
above the number plate.
Unlocking and opening

55
Opening
› Press the button in the handle at the lower edge of the boot lid 1 » fig. 37
and lift the boot lid.
Open / close (Superb Combi)
Closing
› Pull down and strike the lid with the handle 2 » fig. 37 .
The small boot lid can also be opened by the Symbol key  button on the remote control key » page 49.
TwinDoor - open / close large boot
Fig. 39 Boot lid handle/opening the boot lid
Fig. 40
Handle in the inner panelling of
the boot lid
Fig. 38 Handle of boot lid/opened large boot lid

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 55.
After unlocking, the boot lid can be opened with the button in the handle
above the number plate.
Opening
› Press the button in the handle at the lower edge of the tailgate 1 » fig. 38.
› Wait until the brake light 2 in the rear window flashes twice and then lift
the lid.
Closing
› Pull down and strike the lid with the handle 3 » fig. 38 .

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 55.
After unlocking, the boot lid can be opened with the button in the handle
above the number plate.
Opening
› Press the handle A » fig. 39 and raise the lid in the direction of the arrow
B .
Closing
› Pull the lid down with the handle C » fig. 40 and close with a slight swing.
Delayed locking of the boot lid

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 55.
If the boot lid with the key symbol  is unlocked on the remote control key,
then the door is automatically locked after closing.
56
Using the system

The period after which the luggage compartment lid is locked automatically
can be extended by a specialist garage.
After the activation of the delayed locking, the door can be opened after closing within a limited period again.
Delayed locking can be deactivated by a specialist garage at any time.
CAUTION
There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked
automatically. We therefore recommend that the vehicle is locked with the key
symbol  lock on the remote control key.
Electric boot lid (Superb Combi)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operating description
Acoustic signals
Adjusting/deleting the top lid position
Malfunctions
CAUTION
The movement of the lid can be stopped by applying an abrupt and quick
force against the lid.
■ Do not try to close the lid manually during the electrical closing process.
Damage can occur to the system of the electric boot lid.
■ If the lid is closed manually, it must be ensured that when moving the lid into
the lock, pressure is applied to the centre edge of the lid above the ŠKODA
logo. Handling the sides of the lid can damage the electric lid.
■
57
59
59
59
Force limiter
The electric luggage compartment lid (hereinafter referred to only as a lid) is
equipped with a force limiter. If the lid hits an obstacle when closing, it stops
and an audible signal sounds.
CAUTION
Before opening or closing the lid, check if there are any objects in the opening or closing range which could obstruct the movement (e.g. a load on the
roof rack or on the trailer, etc.) – risk of causing damage to the lid!
■ Ensure that there is at least 10 cm of clearance above the opened lid (e.g. distance from the garage ceiling). Otherwise, it may happen that the clearance
above the opened lid is no longer sufficient after relieving the vehicle of a load
(e.g. after unloading) – risk of causing damage to the lid.
■ In certain circumstances, if the lid is loaded (e.g by a thick layer of snow), the
opening process of the lid can be interrupted. Remove the load on the lid to reenable the electrical operation.
■ If the lid closes automatically (e.g. under load of snow), you will hear an intermittent beep.
■
Operating description
If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the
boot lid, the whole vehicle may jerk and as a result the movement of the lid
can be interrupted.
Manual operation
Manually opening and closing the lid is only possible in exceptional cases. It
must be completed slowly and without sudden movements as close to the
centre of the lid as possible » .
WARNING
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was
locked – risk of accident!
■ Never drive with the lid open or unlatched, as otherwise exhaust gases
may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
■
Fig. 41 Operation of the lid

Unlocking and opening
57
Lid operation with the handle A
Action
Opening
Stop
Closing
Range
Closed
Lid
1
2
3
Open
Lid















The operation of the lid using the handle A is only possible when the vehicle
is unlocked.
Lid operation with the button B
Fig. 42 Lid operation/operating areas

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 57.
Control elements
The lid can be operated with the following control elements.
› With the Symbol key  on the key (press for about 1 s).
› With the button in the handle A on the outer part of the lid » fig. 41.
› With the button B on the inner part of the lid » fig. 41.
› With the button C in the centre console » fig. 42.
Operating areas
The system distinguishes 3 operating areas where the function of the individual operating elements changes » fig. 42. The end positions of the lid - fully
closed in the secured lock and fully opened - differ as well.
The range of the area 3 changes proportionally, depending on the setting of
the top position of the lid » page 59.
If the lid is set in the uppermost position in the area 2 , the area 3 is not active. The range of the area 2 changes proportionally, depending on the setting of the top position of the lid.
Symbol explanation in the operating description

Feasible action

Non-feasible action

Movement in the opposite direction to the previous movement
58
Using the system
Action
Opening
Stop
Closing
Range
Closed
Lid
1
2
3
Open
Lid















Operating the lid with the button B is only possible when the lid is open.
Lid operation with the symbol button  on the remote control key and the
button C
Range
Closed
Open
Action
Lid
Lid
1
2
3
Opening
Stop
Closing















When the ignition is switched on, the operation of the lid does not function using the remote control key.
Operating the lid with the button C does not work if the vehicle was locked
from the outside.
Operating the lid with the symbol button  on the remote control key and the
button C does not work when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle.
Acoustic signals

Malfunctions
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 57.
The acoustic signals serve as a safety function and provide information about
the success of a performed action.
Signals
Status
Open (using the button  on the remote control key
or the button C » fig. 42 on page 58 )
Interrupted tone
1 continuous tone
3 rising tones
3 identical tones
Automatic closing of the lid » page 57, in chapter Introduction
Force limiter
Confirmation of the storage of the lid position
fault
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 57.
If the battery is disconnected and reconnected while the lid is open, it is necessary to activate the system of the electric boot lid. Activation means closing
the lid by hand. Thus, the end position of the lid is stored under fully closed in
secured lock.
Examples of operational malfunctions
Description of the malfuncPossible solutions
tion
The lid cannot be lifted out
of the lock.
The lid does not react to an
opening signal
Emergency unlocking of the lid » page 213
Removing a possible obstacle (e.g. snow), reopening the lid » page 57
Press handle A and pull the lid upwards
Adjusting/deleting the top lid position


auf Seite 57.
Adjusting
› Stop the lid in the desired position (electrically or manually).
› Press and hold the button B » fig. 41 on page 57 for longer than 3 seconds.
Storing the new position is confirmed with an audible signal.
Delete
› Carefully lift up the lid manually to the maximum opening position.
› Press and hold the button B » fig. 41 on page 57 for longer than 3 seconds.
An audible signal sounds and the height which was originally set is deleted
from the memory, while the basic position of the top lid position is again set.
The top lid position is adjusted, for example, in the following situations.
› When the space for opening the lid is limited (e.g. garage height).
› For a more convenient operation, such as by a person's height.
The lid remains in the top
position
Manual closing of the lid
Electric power windows

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Opening/closing the window from the driver seat
Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear doors
Force limit
Window convenience operation
Operational faults
60
61
61
61
62 
The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically, is always
lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is
opened manually.
The lid always opens to the height which was last stored.
Unlocking and opening
59
WARNING
Ensure that no persons are still left in the vehicle when locking the vehicle. In an emergency, the windows will no longer be able to be opened from
the inside.
■ The system is fitted with a force limiter » page 61. If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several
centimetres. However, the windows should be closed carefully – risk of injury.
■ It is recommended the electrically operated power windows in the rear
doors be deactivated (safety switch) S if there are children in the rear
seats» fig. 43 on page 60.
■
CAUTION
Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric
windows.
■ In the event that the windows are frozen, first of all eliminate the
ice » page 175, Windows and exterior mirrors and only then operate the electrical power windows. Otherwise, the window sealing and the electrical power
window mechanism could be damaged.
■ In the winter, ice accumulating on the surface of the window may cause
there to be more resistance when closing the window. The window will stop
and move back several centimetres.
■ It is necessary to deactivate the force limiter to close the window » page 61.
■ Make sure that the windows are closed whenever you leave the locked vehicle.
■
For the sake of the environment
At high speeds, you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily
high fuel consumption.
Notice
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows for approx. 10 minutes. After the driver's or front passenger's door has
been opened, the windows can only be operated using A » fig. 43 on
page 60 .
■ When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventilation system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are
opened, dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the
wind noise is more at certain speeds.
■ The window lift system is equipped with protection against overheating. Repeated opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to overheat. If this happens, it will not be possible to operate the window for a short
time. You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the overheating
protection has cooled down.
■
Opening/closing the window from the driver seat
Fig. 43
Buttons on the driver's door

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 60.
Buttons for the electrical power windows » fig. 43.
A Button for power window of the driver's door
B Button for power window of the front passenger door
C Button for power window of the rear right door
D Button for power window at the rear left door
S Safety pushbutton
Opening
› Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has
moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes the window to
stop immediately.
60
Using the system

The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the
button as far as the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window
to stop immediately.
Closing
› Pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the
window has moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes
the window to stop immediately.
The window can also be fully closed automatically by pulling the button up to
the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately.
Safety pushbutton
The buttons for power windows in the rear doors can be deactivated by pressing the safety switch S » fig. 43. The buttons for the electrical power windows in the rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton
S again.
If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated, the indicator light  in the
safety switch S lights up.
Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear
doors
Fig. 44
Button on the rear door
The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the
button as far as the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window
to stop immediately.
Closing
› Pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the
window has moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes
the window to stop immediately.
The window can also be fully closed automatically by pulling the button up to
the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately.
Force limit

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 60.
The electrical power window system is fitted with a force limiter. It reduces
the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres.
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 seconds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down
by several centimetres.
If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window being moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
on.
The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again
within the next 10 seconds - the window will now close with full force!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 60.
There is a button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors for that
window.
Opening
› Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has
moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes the window to
stop immediately.
Window convenience operation

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 60.
The comfort control of the window provides the ability to open all the windows at once or close.
Closing can take place in one of the following ways.
Unlocking and opening

61
Opening
› Press the symbol button  on the remote control key.
› Hold the key in the driver's lock in the unlock position.
› Press and hold the upper part of the central locking button in the driver's
door » page 52.
› Hold button A » fig. 43 on page 60 in der opening position.
Closing
› Press the symbol button  on the remote control key.
› Hold the key in the driver's lock in the lock position.
› Press and hold the lower part of the central locking button » page 52 in the
driver's door.
› Hold button A » fig. 43 on page 60 in der opening position.
› In the KESSY system, hold a finger on the sensor 1 » fig. 32 on page 50 .
The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the MAXI DOT display in the
menu item Window op. » page 44.
The prerequisite for ensuring that the convenience operating feature correctly
is the automatic opening/closing of all windows is operational.
Convenience opening or closing the window using the key in the driver's lock
is only possible within 45 seconds after locking the vehicle.
The movement of the window is immediately stopped by releasing the key or
the respective button.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation
Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof
Electric sliding/tilting roof with solar cells
62
63
63
The electric sliding/tilting roof (abbreviated in the following as 'sliding/tilting
roof') can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor temperature is higher than -20 °C.
The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after
switching the ignition off. However, as soon as the driver or front passenger's
door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof.
CAUTION
Always close the sliding/tilting roof before disconnecting the battery.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the
sliding/tilting roof does not operate correctly. In this case, turn the rotary
switch to the switch position A » fig. 45 on page 62 and push forward for
about 10 seconds.
■
■
Operation
Operational faults

Electric sliding/tilting roof
and
Fig. 45
Control dial for the sliding/tilting
roof
auf Seite 60.
The automatic power windows do not work if the vehicle battery has been disconnected and connected again while a window was open. The system must
be activated.
Activation sequence:
› Switch on the ignition.
› Pull the top edge of the button and close the window.
› Release the button.
› Pull the relevant button upwards again for approx. 3 seconds, and keep it
pressed down.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 62.
Comfort position
› Turn the switch to position
C » fig. 45.
When the sliding/tilting roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the
wind noise is reduced.
62
Using the system

Open partially
› Simply turn the knob to a point between A and
C.
Open fully
› Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned
position).
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully – risk of injury! The force limiter does
not operate with the convenience closing.
Electric sliding/tilting roof with solar cells
Tilting roof
› Turn the switch to position D .

Closing
› Turn the switch to position A .
If there is sufficient bright sunlight, the solar cells in the sliding/tilting roof deliver the electrical power for the fresh air blower. Further information » page 113, Climatronic (automatic air conditioning system).
Sun screen
The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open. With
sun roof is closed, the sunblind can be operated manually » .
Force limiter
The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. If an obstacle (e.g. ice) prevents closing, the sliding/tilting roof stops and opens completely. The sliding/
tilting roof can be closed completely without the force limiter by turning the
switch into position A » fig. 45 at the front for as long as it takes for the sliding/tilting roof to close completely » .
WARNING
When closing the sliding/tilting roof proceed with caution to avoid causing
crushing injuries – risk of injury!
CAUTION
During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the
opening mechanism.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 62.
The operation of the sliding/tilting roof with solar cells is the same as of a normal sliding/tilting roof.
Panoramic sliding/tilting roof (Superb Estate)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
64
64
65
Operation
Opening/closing the sun screen
Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof
The panoramic sliding/tilting roof (abbreviated in the following as 'sliding/tilting roof') can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the
outdoor temperature is higher than -20 °C.
The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after
switching the ignition off. However, as soon as the driver or front passenger's
door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof.
Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 62.
The sliding/tilting roof can be operated by locking/unlocking using the key or
using the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor 1 » fig. 32 on page 50.
› Press the symbol button  on the remote control key.
› In the KESSY system, hold a finger on the sensor 1 » fig. 32 on page 50 .
By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor 1 when using the
KESSY system, the closing process is immediately interrupted.
Unlocking and opening
63

CAUTION
Always close the sliding/tilting roof before disconnecting the battery.
If, for example, the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the sliding/tilting roof does not operate correctly. Next, move the rotary switch into position A » fig. 46 on page 64 , pull the recess firmly downwards and hold forwards firmly. The sliding/tilting roof opens and closes again
after around 10 seconds. Do not release the control dial until it has done so.
■ If, for example, the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the sun screen does not operate correctly. Then turn the switch to
position A » fig. 46 on page 64and press and hold the button G » fig. 47 on
page 64. The sun screen opens and closes again after around 10 seconds. Do
not release the control dial until it has done so.
■
■
Operation
Fig. 46
Control dial for the sliding/tilting
roof
Closing
› Turn the switch to position A .
› Press the switch on the recess
E down and pull forwards.
Force limiter
The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. The sliding/tilting roof
stops and moves back several centimetres when it cannot be closed because
there is something in the way (e.g. ice). The sliding/tilting roof can be fully
closed without a force limiter by pressing the switch on the recess E down
and then pushing it forward until the sliding/tilting roof is fully closed » .
WARNING
When closing the sliding/tilting roof proceed with caution to avoid causing
crushing injuries – risk of injury!
CAUTION
During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the
opening mechanism.
Opening/closing the sun screen
Fig. 47
Buttons for sun screen

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 64.
Comfort position
› Turn the switch to position
C » fig. 46.
When the sliding/tilting roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the
wind noise is reduced.
Open partially
› Turn the switch to a position in area D .
Open fully
› Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned
position).
Tilting roof
› Turn the switch to position A .
› Press the switch in the region E towards the roof.
64
Using the system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 64.
The sun screen can be closed or opened using the buttons » fig. 47.
Opening
› Briefly press the button F
› Press and hold the button
» fig. 47 to open fully.
F to open to the desired position.
The opening process stops when one releases the button.

Closing
› Briefly press the button G » fig. 47 to close fully.
› Press and hold the button G to close in the desired position.
The closing process stops when one releases the button.
WARNING
When closing the sliding/tilting roof proceed with caution to avoid causing
crushing injuries – risk of injury!
Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 64.
The sliding / tilting roof can be operated by locking or unlocking using the key
or using the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor 1 » fig. 32 on page 50.
Closing
› Press the symbol button  Press and hold the symbol button on the key or
hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position, or
for the KESSY system, keep your finger on the sensor 1 » fig. 32 on
page 50 » .
By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor 1 when using the
KESSY system, the closing process is immediately interrupted.
Tilting roof
› Press the symbol button  on the remote control key.
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully – risk of injury! The force limiter does
not operate with the convenience closing.
Lights and visibility
Lights

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
69
70
70
71
Parking and low beam lights
Daylight running lights (DAY LIGHT)
Turn signal and main beam
Automatic driving lamp control
Adaptive headlights (AFS)
Fog lights
Fog lights with the CORNER function
Rear fog light
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME
Hazard warning light system
Parking lights
Unless otherwise stated, the lights only work when the ignition is switched
on.
The position of some of the controls on right-hand drive models may differ
from that shown in » fig. 48 on page 66. The symbols which mark the positions of the controls are identical.
Keep the headlights lenses clean. The following guidelines must be observed » page 175, Headlight lenses.
WARNING
The activation of the lights should only be undertaken in accordance with
national legal requirements.
■ The driver is always responsible for the correct settings and use of the
lights.
■
Lights and visibility
65

WARNING (Continued)
The automatic driving lamp control  only operates as a support and
does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the light and, if
necessary, to switch on the light depending on the given light conditions.
The light sensor cannot, for example, detect rain or snow. Under these conditions we recommend switching on the low beam or fog lights!
■ Never drive with only the side lights on! The side lights are not bright
enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by other oncoming traffic. Therefore always switch on the low beam when it is
dark or if visibility is poor.
■
Notice
The headlights may mist up temporarily. When the driving lights are switched
on, the light outlet surfaces are free from mist after a short period, although
the headlight lenses may still be misted up in the peripheral areas. This mist
has no influence on the life of the lighting system.
Parking and low beam lights
Fig. 48
Light switches, knobs for headlight beam adjustment and
brightness of instrument illumination
Turning the knob B » fig. 48
 Headlight beam control
Headlight beam control

Turning the rotary switch from the setting in  means the headlight adjustment is gradually adjusted and thereby shortens the light cone.
The positions of the width of illumination correspond approximately to the following car load.




Instrument lighting 
Turning the rotary switch C when the lights are switched on adjusts the
brightness of the instrument lighting » fig. 48.
The instruments are also illuminated when the side light, low or high beam
light is switched on.
WARNING
Always adjust the headlight beam to satisfy the following conditions.
■ The vehicle does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehicles.
■ The beam range is sufficient for safe driving.
Notice
We recommend you adjust the headlight beam when the low beam is switched on.
■ The Bi-Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the
vehicle when the ignition is switched on and when driving. Vehicles that are
equipped with Bi-Xenon headlights do not have a manual headlight range adjustment control.
■ The light switch is in position  or  and the ignition is turned off, the low
beam is switched off automatically and the status light is lit. The side light
goes out after the ignition key is removed.
■ If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically.
■

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 65.
Light switch positions - turning the switch A » fig. 48

Switching off lights (except daytime running lights)
 Automatic switching lights on and off » page 68
 Switch on the parking light or parking lights on both sides » page 71
 Turn on the low beam
Light switch positions - pulling the switch A
 Switch on the front fog lamp » page 69
 Switching on the rear fog light » page 69
66
Using the system
Front seats occupied, boot empty
All seats occupied, boot empty
All seats occupied, boot loaded
Driver seat occupied, boot loaded
Daylight running lights (DAY LIGHT)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Turn signal and main beam
auf Seite 65.
Fig. 49
Operating lever: Turn signal and
main beam operation
The daytime running lights (the only function) provides the lighting of the front
vehicle range.
The daytime running lights are switched on automatically if the following
conditions are met:



The light switch is in the position  or  » fig. 48 on page 66.
The ignition is switched on.
The parking aid is activated.
Deactivating the function
› Switch off the ignition.
› Pull the turning signal and main beam lever (» fig. 49 on page 67) towards
the steering wheel, push down and hold in this position.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Hold the lever in this position for at least 3 seconds after switching on the
ignition.
Activating the function
› Switch off the ignition.
› Pull the turning signal and main beam lever towards the steering wheel,
push it up and hold it in this position.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Hold the lever in this position for at least 3 seconds after switching on the
ignition.
On vehicles with MAXI DOT display, the function can be enabled or disabled in
the menu item Dayl. dri. light » page 44.
WARNING
When the daytime running light is switched on, the side lights (neither at
the front or rear) and the number plate lights are not lit. Therefore always
switch on the low beam when it is dark or if visibility is poor.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 65.
Lever positions » fig. 49
A Switch on right turn  signal
B Switch on left turn  signal
C Switch on main beam (spring-tensioned position) 
D Switch on main beam or headlamp flasher (spring-loaded position) 
Main beam
The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on.
When the high beam or headlight flasher is on, the warning light  lights up in
the instrument cluster.
Turn signal light
When the left or right turn signal is on, the warning light  or  flashes in the
instrument cluster.
The flashing light is turned on even before the upper and lower pressure point.
This is advantageous in some manoeuvres. For example, when changing lanes
hold the control lever before each pressure point.
The turn signal light switches itself off automatically when driving around a
curve or after making a turn.
The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal
light fails.
“Convenience turn signal”
If you only wish to flash three times, briefly push the lever to the upper or low
er pressure point and release again.
Lights and visibility
67
The “Intelligent turn signal” can be activated or deactivated via the Maxi DOT
display in the Intelligent turn signal» page 44 menu item.
WARNING
Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will
not be dazzled.
Notice
The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off.
Automatic driving lamp control
Fig. 50
Light switch: AUTO position
CAUTION
Do not stick any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on the
windscreen, so as not to cancel the function of automatic driving light control
or to impair its effectiveness.
Adaptive headlights (AFS)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 65.
The AFS system makes sure the street remains lit up depending on the traffic
and weather situation.
The system automatically adjusts the cone of light in front of the vehicle to the
driving speed or the use of the wiper.
The AFS system works in tandem with automatic driving lamp control ,
please read the following » page 68.
The AFS system can work only if the following condition is met.

The light switch is in the position .
The AHL system operates in the following modes.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 65.
If the light switch is in position  » fig. 50, the parking lights, low beam and
number plate lights are switched on or off automatically.
The light is regulated based on data gathered by the light sensor attached between the windscreen and the interior mirror.
If the light switch is in position , the symbol  lights up next to the light
switch. If the light is switched on automatically, the symbol  next to the light
switch also lights up.
Automatic driving light control during rain
The daytime running lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met.
 The light switch is in position  » fig. 50.
 Automatic wiping with rain - position 1 or wiping - position 2 or 3 is
turned on » page 76, Windscreen wipers and washers .
 The windscreen wipers are turned on for longer than 15 s.
The light turns off for about 4 minutes after turning on the wipers.
68
Using the system
Out of town mode
The cone of light in front of the vehicle is similar to the low beam. The mode is
active if none of the following modes are active.
City mode
The light cone in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that this also illuminates
the adjacent side-walks, intersections, pedestrian crossings, etc. The mode is
active at speeds of 15-50 km / h.
Motorway mode
The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can respond in time to an obstruction or other hazard in time. The mode is activated
gradually from a speed of 90 km/h. It is most effective at speeds above
120 km/h.
Rain mode
The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can reduce the glare from oncoming vehicles in rain.
The mode is active at speeds of 15 – 70 km/h and if the windscreen wipers
continuously operate for a period of time longer than 2 minutes. The mode is
deactivated when the windscreen wipers are switched off for longer than 8
minutes.

Dynamic cornering lights
The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted to the steering angle so
that the road in the curve is illuminated. This function is active at speeds
greater than 10 km.h and in all AFS modes.
Tourist lights (Travel mode)
This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system
(driving on the left/right) without dazzling the oncoming vehicles.
When this mode is active, the above-mentioned modes and the side swivel of
the headlights is deactivated.
This mode can be enabled or disabled via the Maxi DOT display in the Travel
mode» page 45, Lights and Visibility menu option.
WARNING
If the AFS system is defective, the headlights are automatically lowered to
the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming
traffic. This reduces the cone of light in front of the vehicle. Drive carefully
and visit a specialist garage as soon as possible.

Switching on/off
The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse order.
The indicator light  lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights
are switched on » page 32.
Fog lights with the CORNER function

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 65.
The CORNER function lights the front fog lamp on each side of the vehicle to
illuminate the area around the vehicle when turning, parking, etc.
The CORNER function is switched on automatically if the following conditions
are met.



Fog lights
Fig. 51
Light switch
auf Seite 65.
› Turn the light switch to position  or  » fig. 51.
› Pull the light switch to position 1 .

Notice
When the “tourist light” mode is active, the warning light  flashes for 10 seconds each time the ignition is switched on.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst


The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply to
the right or left1).
The engine is running.
The vehicle is stopped or moves at a speed of no more than 40 km/h.
The low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position  and
the low beam is switched on.
The daytime running lights are not switched on.
The fog lights are not switched on.
Notice
The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear.
Rear fog light

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 65.
Switching on/off
› Turn the light switch to position  or  » fig. 51 on page 69.
› Pull the light switch to position 2 .
1)

If both switch-on conditions are conflicting, for example, if the front wheels are turned to the left and
the right turn signal light is switched on, the turn signal light has the higher priority.
Lights and visibility
69
The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse order.
The warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light
is switched on » page 32.
When the reverse gear is engaged, only the rear fog lamp lights up on the driver's side.
Only the rear fog light on the trailer lights up if the vehicle has a factory-fitted
towing device or a towing device from ŠKODA original accessories and it is
driven with a trailer.
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 65.
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME (hereafter referred to only as function)
switches on the lights for a short time after leaving the vehicle or when approaching the vehicle.
The daytime running lights are switched on automatically if the following
conditions are met.




The light turns off after 10 seconds or after a pre-set time or after the vehicle
is locked.
Activate/deactivate the function
The functions and settings of the illumination time can be activated/deactivated via the MAXI DOT display in the menu items Coming Home or Leaving
Home » page 44.
CAUTION
Do not stick any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on the
windscreen, so as not to cancel the function of automatic driving light control
or to impair its effectiveness.
■ If this function is activated constantly, the battery will be heavily discharged
particularly in short-haul traffic.
■
Hazard warning light system
The light switch is in position  » fig. 50 on page 68.
The visibility in the vehicle environment is reduced.
The ignition is switched off.
The parking aid is activated.
The function switches on the following light, depending on the equipment
fitted.
› Parking lights
› Low beam
› Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors
› Licence plate light
The light is controlled on the basis of information that is collected from the
holder mounted in the rear-view mirror sensor » page 68.
COMING HOME
The light turns on automatically when you open the driver's door on (within 60
seconds of turning off the ignition).
The light turns off 10 seconds after closing all the doors and the boot lid or after the pre-set time has expired.
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the light goes out after 60 seconds.
70
LEAVING HOME
The light turns on automatically after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote
control..
Using the system
Fig. 52
Button for hazard warning light
system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 65.
Switching on/off
› Press the button  » fig. 52.
All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard
warning light system is switched on. The warning light for the turn signals and
the warning light in the button also flash at the same time. The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off.
If one of the airbags is deployed, the hazard warning light system will switch
on automatically.

If the turn signal light is switched on when the hazard warning light and the
ignition are both switched on, then only the turn signal light on the corresponding vehicle side will flash.
Front interior light
WARNING
Switch on the hazard warning light system if, for example, the following occurs.
■ You encounter a traffic congestion.
■ The vehicle has broken down.
Parking lights

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 65.
Fig. 53 Operation of the front interior light: Version 1/version 2
Parking light  switching on
› Switch off the ignition.
› Place the control lever into position A or B as far as it can go » fig. 49 on
page 67 - the parking light on the right/left-hand side of the vehicle is
switched on.
Rocker switch positions » fig. 53
 Switching on
 Switching off
 Operation using the door contact switch (middle position)
If the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is
switched off, the parking light  is not automatically switched on.
For vehicles with interior monitoring, there is no icon for the center position
(operation with the door contact switch).
Switching on the side light on both sides 
› Turn the light switch A to position  » fig. 48 on page 66 and lock the vehicle.
Switch for reading lights
If operating the light with the door contact switch is enabled the light will
come on when one of the following events occurs:
› The vehicle is unlocked.
› One of the doors or the tailgate is opened.
› The ignition key is removed.
Interior lights

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front interior light
Rear interior light
Rear interior light
Front door warning light
Entry lighting
 Switching left reading lamp on/off
 Switching right reading lamp on/off
71
72
72
72
73
If operating the light with the door contact switch is enabled the light will go
off when one of the following events occurs:
› The vehicle is locked.
› The ignition is switched on.
› About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.
Lights and visibility
71

Notice
If the interior light remains switched on when the ignition is switched off or
if one of the doors is open, the light will automatically go out after around 10
minutes.
■ Two diffuse lights are integrated in the front interior lighting, that illuminate
the gearshift lever and the middle of the dash panel. These are switched on
automatically when the parking light is activated. Also, after switching on the
ignition when the parking lights are switched on, the door handle lighting
comes on.
■
Rear interior light
Applies to vehicles with a panoramic sliding roof.
Fig. 55
Interior lights at the rear
Rear interior light
Applies to vehicles without a panoramic sliding roof.
Fig. 54
Interior light and rear reading
lights
The light can be operated by moving the lens into one of the following positions » fig. 55.
 Switching on
 Operation using the door contact switch (middle position)1)

Switching off
Front door warning light
Switch for reading lights » fig. 54
 Switching left reading lamp on/off
 Switching right reading lamp on/off
Fig. 56
Warning light
The rear interior light is operated together with the front interior
light » page 71.
The warning light » fig. 56 turns on, when the front door is opened.
The warning light turns off, when the front door is closed.
In vehicles without a warning light only a reflector is installed at this point.
1)
In this position, apply the same rules to the rear interior light as for the front interior light » page 71.
72
Using the system

Notice
If the door is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish automatically after around 20 minutes.
Windscreen and rear window heater
Entry lighting
The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror and illuminates the entry area of the front door.
The light comes on after the vehicle has been unlocked or on opening the
front door. The lighting goes out about 30 seconds after the doors are closed
or if the ignition is switched on.
WARNING
If the entry light is on, do not touch its cover – risk of burns!
Fig. 57 Buttons for the rear and front window heating Climatronic / manual air conditioning
Notice
If the door is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish automatically after around 1 minutes.
Drinks can holder in centre console
 Switching the rear window heater on/off
 Switching the windscreen heater on/off
When the heater is switched on, a lamp lights up inside the button.
Visibility
The steering assist only operates when the engine is running.

After about 10 minutes, the heating switches off automatically.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Windscreen and rear window heater
Sun visors
Sun screen
Sun screen in the rear doors
73
74
74
74
For the sake of the environment
The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de-iced or free
from mist. The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on
fuel economy » page 148, Saving electrical energy.
Notice
If the on-board voltage drops, the rear window heater switches off automatically, in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control » page 193, Automatic load deactivation.
■ If the light is flashing inside the button the heater is off due to low battery.
■
Lights and visibility
73
Sun visors
Sun screen
Fig. 60
Unroll the sun screen
Fig. 58 Sunvisor: Fold down / pivot the door
The sun screen is located in the lower part of the boot cover.
Extending
› Pull the sun screen on the handle A » fig. 60 and hang it in the magnetic
brackets B .
Retracting
› Remove the sun screen from the magnetic brackets B and hold it on the
handle A so that it can slowly roll up into the housing on the boot cover
without being damaged.
Fig. 59 Sun visor: Auxiliary panel fold down / makeup mirror
Operation of the sun visor » fig. 58 , » fig. 59
1 Fold down the aperture
2 Swivel bracket for door
3 Fold down the auxiliary panel
A Make-up mirror, the cover can be pushed in the direction of the arrow
B Light - turns the cover from sliding automatically
Notice
Do not place any objects that react sensitively to influences of magnetic fields
(watches, electronics, etc.) in the immediate vicinity of the magnetic brackets.
They can be damaged by the magnetic field.
Sun screen in the rear doors
Fig. 61
Rear door: Sun screen
While sliding the cover A or when lifting the aperture, the light turns off B .
WARNING
The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens,
etc. are attached to them. Triggering of the head airbags may cause injury.
74
Using the system
Extending
› Pull out the sun screen with the handle A » fig. 61 and hang it in the bracket

on the top edge of the door.
Retracting
› Remove the sun screen from the handle A » fig. 61 and hold it in such a way
that it can roll up slowly without being damaged.
Windscreen wipers and washers

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Windscreen wipers and washers
Headlight cleaning system
76
77
The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is
switched on and the bonnet is closed.
If the intermittent wipe is switched on, the intervals are also controlled depending on speed.
When automatic wiping in rain is active, the wiper intervals are regulated
based on the intensity of the rain.
The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on
when reverse gear is selected.
Top up with windscreen wiper fluid » page 184.
WARNING
Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visibility and safe driving » page 215.
■ Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons. These can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
■ Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. Otherwise the window cleaner could
freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.
■ Automatic wiping in rain only operates as a support. The driver is not released from the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers
manually depending on the visibility conditions.
■
CAUTION
If the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are switched on,
the windscreen wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the ignition is turned back on. The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold temperatures between the time the ignition was turned off and when it was turned
back on again.
■ In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before the journey or before switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windscreen. If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen, this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor!
■ Carefully peel frozen wiper blades off the pane.
■ Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving.
■ If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage to
the windscreen.
■ Do not switch on the ignition if the front wiper arms are retracted! The wiper
blades would move back into their rest position and while doing so damage
the paintwork of the bonnet.
■ If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wiper will try to push away the
obstacle. The wiper stops automatically after 5 attempts to eliminate the obstacle, in order to avoid a damage to the wiper. Remove the the obstacle and
switch the wiper on again.
■
Notice
Each time the ignition switches off for the third time, the position of the
windscreen wipers changes. This counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rubbers.
■ The rear window wiper only operates if the boot lid is closed.
■ The wiper blades should be cleaned on a regular basis with a windscreen
cleaner to avoid any smears. The wiper blades should be cleaned with a
sponge or cloth if they are heavily soiled by insect residues, for example.
■ Keep the wiper blades clean. They may become soiled, e.g., with wax residues after washing in automatic car wash systems » page 173.
■ The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the engine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx. +10 °C.
■
Lights and visibility
75
Windscreen wipers and washers
Fig. 62
Operating lever: Windscreen
wipers and washer settings
At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after
the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen. This
function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window  (Superb Estate)
The wash system operates immediately, the windscreen wiper wipes somewhat later.
Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the
wiper to continue for another 2-3 wiper strokes (depending on the period of
spraying of the windscreen). The operating lever remains in position
6 » fig. 62.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 75.
Lever positions
0 
1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
A 
Wipers off
Periodic windscreen wiping/automatic wiping in rain
Slow windscreen wiping
Rapid windscreen wiping
Flick windscreen wiping, service position of the wiper
arms » page 215, (spring-loaded position)
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen (spring-tensioned position)
Wiping the rear window pane (the windscreen wiper wipes at regular intervals after a few seconds)
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window (spring-tensioned position)
Switches for setting the required break between the individual
wiper strokes ( 1 periodic windscreen wiping) or the wiper speed in
rain ( 1 automatic windscreen wiping in rain)
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen 
The wash system operates immediately, the windscreen wipers wipe somewhat later. The wash system and the windscreen wiper operate simultaneously at a speed of more than 120 km/h.
Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the
wiper to continue for another 3-4 wiper strokes (depending on the period of
spraying of the windscreen).
76
Using the system
Automatic rear window wiper (Superb Combi)
If the lever is in position 2 » fig. 62 or 3 the rear window is wiped every
30 or 10 seconds if the vehicle's speed exceeds 5 km/h.
If automatic windscreen wiping in rain is activated (the operating lever is in position 1 ), the function is only active if the windscreen wipers operate in continuous mode (no break between each wiping process).
Automatic rear window wiping can be activated/deactivated via the MAXI DOT
display in the menu item Rear wiper » page 44.
Winter setting of the windscreen wiper
If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from
the windscreen. For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wipers in winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily.
› Switch on the windscreen wipers.
› Switch off the ignition.
The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which they were when
switching off the ignition.
The service position can also be used as a winter position » page 215.
Notice
If the operating lever is in position 2 or 3 and the speed of the vehicle drops
below 4 km / h, the wiping speed is switched to a lower wiping level. The original setting is restored step by step when the speed of the vehicle exceeds
8 km/h.
Headlight cleaning system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 75.
After the ignition is turned on, headlamps are always cleaned at the first and
after every tenth spraying of the windscreen (position 5 » fig. 62 on page 76),
when the low beam or high beam is switched on.
You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the headlight
lenses at regular intervals, for example when refuelling. The following guidelines must be observed » page 175, Headlight lenses.
To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter, any
snow should be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be
cleared with a de-icing spray.
WARNING
The mirrors with automatic dimming contain an electrolyte liquid which can
escape if mirror glass is broken.
■ The leaking electrolytic fluid can irritate the skin, eyes and breath apparatus. Immediately seek out fresh air and leave the vehicle. If this is not possible, at least open the window.
■ If you swallow electrolytic fluid, seek medical assistance immediately.
■ If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immediately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water.
Then consult a doctor immediately.
Interior mirror
CAUTION
Never remove the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand – risk of
damage!
Rear mirror

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Interior mirror
Exterior mirrors
77
78
WARNING
■ Make sure that the mirror is not covered by ice, snow, mist or other objects.
■ Convex (curved outward) or aspheric exterior mirrors increase the field of
vision. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the mirror. These
mirrors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the following vehicles.
■ Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to
the following vehicles.
■ The illuminated display of an external navigation unit can lead to operational faults to the automatic dimming interior mirror – risk of accident.
Fig. 63 Interior mirror: manual dimming / auto-darkening / light sensor

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 77.
Mirrors with manual dimming » fig. 63
1 Basic position of the mirror
2 Mirror blackout
Mirror with automatic dimming » fig. 63
Warning light - lights when dimming is activated
Switch for the activation of the automatic mirror dimming
C Light sensor
D Light sensor on the back of the mirror
A
B
If the automatic dimming is enabled, the mirror dims automatically, depending
on the light incident on the sensors.
Lights and visibility
77

When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the
mirror always moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).
Do not attach external navigation devices to the windscreen or in the vicinity
of the automatic dimming interior mirror » page 77, in chapter Introduction.
Notice
■ The automatic dimming mirror will only function smoothly if the incident of
light on the sensors is not compromised (e.g. by the sunshade back).
■ If the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off, the exterior mirror
dimming is also switched off.
Exterior mirrors
Fig. 64
Knob for the mirrors
› Turn the knob for the mirror control to the position for the driver mirror adjustment.
› Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position.
Folding-in both of the exterior mirrors with the rotary knob
It is only possible to fold in both exterior mirrors when the ignition is switched
on and at a speed of up to 15 km/h.
The mirrors are folded out into the driving position after the rotary knob is
turned from the position  to a different one.
Folding-in both of the exterior mirrors using the remote control key
› Close all windows.
› Press the key  on the remote control key for about 2 seconds.
The exterior mirror is folded back into the driving position when the ignition is
switched on.
Mirror with automatic dimming
The exterior mirror blackout is controlled together with the automatic dimming
interior mirror » page 77 .
Fold in passenger's mirror
The passenger-side mirror can tilt down to improve the view to the curb when
reversing.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 77.
The knob can be moved into the following positions

Adjust the left mirror
 Adjust right mirror

Switch off mirror control
 Mirror heater
 Folding in the exterior mirrors
Adjust the position
The mirror can be adjusted to the desired position by moving the knob in the
direction of the arrow » fig. 64.
The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary
knob.
Synchronous adjustment of both mirrrors
› Activate the synchronous adjustment of the mirror above the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror adj. » page 44, Settings.
78
Using the system
The Downhill Drive Support is activated automatically if the following conditions are met.




The vehicle is equipped with the memory function for the driver's
seat » page 82.
The function is activated via the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror
adj. » page 44, Settings.
The knob for the mirror control is in the position for the passenger mirror
adjustment.
The reverse gear is engaged.
Memory function for mirrors
On vehicles fitted with a memory function for the driver seat, the relevant setting for the exterior mirrors can also be stored automatically when the seat
position is stored » page 82.
WARNING
Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces, if the exterior mirror heating is
switched on - hazard of burning.

CAUTION
Never fold, or fold back, the exterior mirrors with fold-in function  mechanically by hand - there is a risk of damaging the electric mirror actuator!
■ When the mirror is swung by external influences (due to impact during manoeuvring, for example), then first fold in the mirror by turning the knob and
wait for a loud folding noise.
■
Notice
■ The mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an
outside temperature of +35 ℃.
■ If the electrical exterior mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by pressing the edge of the mirror surface.
Seats and useful equipment
Adjusting the seats

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Manually adjusting the front seats
Electric front seat adjustment
Head restraints
Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat
Memory function of the remote control key
80
80
81
82
82
The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully
pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs.
The seat backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that
the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent
arms.
Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for the following.
› Reaching the controls safely and quickly.
› A relaxed and fatigue-free body position.
› Achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag
system.
WARNING
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – risk of accident!
■ Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
■ The electric front seat adjustment is still functional if the ignition is
switched off (even with the ignition key removed). Therefore, when leaving
the vehicle never leave people who are not completely independent, such
as children unattended in the vehicle - there is danger of injury!
■ Never carry more people than the number of seats in the vehicle.
■ Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat except objects designed for this purpose (e.g. child seats) – risk of accident!
■
Seats and useful equipment
79

Notice
After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of
the backrest angle.
■ For safety reasons, it is not possible to store the seat position in the electric
seat memory and remote control key memory if the inclination angle of the
seat backrest is more than 102° in relation to the seat cushion.
■ Each time you store the position of the electrically adjustable driver's seat
and exterior mirrors, the existing setting is deleted.
■
Electric front seat adjustment
Manually adjusting the front seats
Fig. 66 Adjusting controls / lumbar support
Fig. 65 Controls / setting

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 79.
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
A » fig. 65 in the direction of the arrow 1 and push the seat in
the required direction.
› Pull the lever
The lock must click into place after you release the lever.
Adjusting height of seat
› Again push/pull the lever B » fig. 65 in the direction of one of the arrows2.
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
› Relieve any pressure from the seat backrest (do not lean on it) and turn the
hand-wheel C » fig. 65 in the direction of the arrow 3.
Adjusting lumbar support
› Push the lever D » fig. 65in the direction of one of the arrows4.
Fig. 67 Setting: Seat pad / backrest

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 79.
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
B » fig. 66 in the direction of one of the arrows 3 » fig. 67.
› Push the switch
Set the height of the seat cushion
B » fig. 66 in the direction of one of the arrows 5 » fig. 67.
› Push the switch
Adjust the angle of the seat cushion
B » fig. 66 in the direction of one of the arrows 4 » fig. 67.
› Push the switch
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
› Push the switch C » fig. 66 in the direction of one of the arrows 6 » fig. 67.
Reducing or increasing the curvature of the lumbar support
A in the region of one of the arrows2 » fig. 66 .
› Push the switch
80
Using the system

Raising or lowering the curvature of the lumbar support
› Push the switch A in the region of one of the arrows1 » fig. 66 .
The adjusted driver's seat position can be set in the memory of the
seat » page 82 or the remote control key » page 82.
Notice
If the setting procedure is interrupted, you will need to press the button again.
› To move the head restraint downwards, press and hold the safety but-
ton » fig. 68 -  with one hand and press the head restraint downwards with
the other hand.
The front seats and head rests must be adjusted to match the body size at all
times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide the most
effective levels of protection to the passengers » page 7, Correct and safe
seated position.
Removing/installing
› Pull the head restraint up out of the seat backrest as far as the stop (for the
rear head restraints fold the seat backrest forward).
› Press the locking button in direction of the arrow » fig. 68 -  and pull the
head restraint out.
› To re-insert the head restraint, push it far enough down into the seat backrest until the locking button clicks into place.
Head restraints
Removing and installing rear middle head rest
Applies to vehicles using the TOP TETHER system.
› Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.
› Press the locking button in the direction of arrow 1 » fig. 69 simultaneously
Fig. 68 Head restraints: Setting / removing
Fig. 69
Rear centre head rests in vehicles with the TOP TETHER system

press the locking button into the opening 2 using a flat screwdriver with a
width of maximum 5 mm and pull out the head rest.
› To re-insert the head restraint, push it far enough down into the seat backrest until the locking button clicks into place.
WARNING
The head rests must be correctly adjusted to avoid risk of injury.
Never drive with the head restraints removed - risk of injury.
If the rear seats are occupied, the rear head rests must not be in the lower position.
■
■
■
Notice
The middle rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 79.
Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head rest is at the same level
as the upper part of your head.
Setting the height
› Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it upwards as
required » fig. 68 - .
Seats and useful equipment
81
Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat
Fig. 70
Memory buttons and SET button
Retrieving the saved setting
› Briefly press the desired memory button
B » fig. 70 with the ignition on.
or
› Press and hold the desired memory button
B with the ignition off or when
the ignition is on and travelling at a speed of more than 5 km / h.
Stopping the ongoing adjustment
› Press any button on the driver's seat or the button
key.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 79.
The memory function for the driver's seat provides the option to store the positions of the driver's seat and the external mirrors. Each of the three memory
buttons B » fig. 70 can be assigned a set position.
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
› Switch on the ignition.
› Adjust the seat to the desired position.
› Adjust both of the exterior mirrors » page 78.
› Press the button SET A » fig. 70.
› Within 10 seconds after pressing the SET button, press the desired memory
button B .
An acknowledgment sound confirms the storage.
Saving front passenger mirror settings when reversing
Using the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror adj. , the function of the
mirror on the passenger side when reversing must be enabled » page 44 .
› Switch on the ignition.
› Press the required memory button B » fig. 70.
› Turn dial for the exterior mirror control into position » page 78.
› Engage reverse gear.
› Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position » page 78.
› Disengage reverse gear.
The set position of the exterior mirror is stored.
1)
The vehicle must be locked and unlocked with the same key to save the seat and exterior mirror position
to the key.
82
Using the system

on the remote control
Notice
Each time new seat and exterior mirror settings for forward travel are saved,
the individual setting for the right exterior mirror for reverse travel must also
be saved again.
Memory function of the remote control key

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 79.
The automatic storage of the driver's seat and exterior mirror positions when
locking the vehicle can be turned on in the memory of the remote control key
(afterwards only as function of automatic storage).
Enable automatic storage
› Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key.
› Press and hold any memory button B » fig. 70 on page 82. After the seat
has assumed the position stored under this button, at the same time press
the button  on the remote control key within 10 seconds.
The successful activation of the automatic storage function for each key is
confirmed by an acoustic signal.
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
› Enable automatic storage.
When automatic storage is activated, the current positions of the driver's seat
and the external mirrors are saved in the memory of the remote control key
each time the vehicle is locked. When the vehicle is next unlocked using the
same key, the driver's seat and the external mirrors assume the positions stor
ed in the memory of this key1).
Saving front passenger mirror settings when reversing
Using the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror adj. , the function of the
mirror on the passenger side when reversing must be enabled » page 44.
Seat heaters
› Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Turn dial for the exterior mirror control into position » page 78.
› Engage reverse gear.
› Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position » page 78.
› Disengage reverse gear.
The adjusted position of the exterior mirror is stored in the remote control key
memory.
Fig. 71 Heating: Front seats/ rear seats
Disable the function of automatic storage
› Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key.
› Press and hold the SET button A » fig. 70 on page 82. At the same time,
press the button  on the remote control key within 10 seconds.
The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the two outer rear
seats can be heated electrically.
The successful deactivation of the automatic storage function for each key is
confirmed by an acoustic signal.
Stopping the ongoing adjustment
› Press any button on the driver's seat or the button
key.

on the remote control
Switch on rear seat heater
By pressing the button once, the heating is switched to the highest intensity level 3, which is indicated by all three of the indicator lights in the switch lighting up.
Introduction
With repeated pressing of the switch, the heating is turned down until it goes
off.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Seat heaters
Ventilated front seats
Convenience features of passenger seat
Armrest, front
Armrest rear
Seat backrests
Rear seat folded forward (Superb Combi)
Switching on the front seat heater
› Press the controller in the area of the symbols  and  » fig. 71 - .
› Press the symbol button  or  » fig. 71 - .
Seat features

The seat heating can only be switched on when the engine is running.
83
84
84
85
85
85
86
The seat heating level is indicated by the number of illuminated warning lights
in the respective control.
WARNING
If you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g. through
medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recommend not to use the seat heating. This can lead to burns on the back,
the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal. If the seat heating is
used, we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving
long distances, so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition.
Seats and useful equipment
83

CAUTION
Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
Do not turn on the seat heater if seats are not occupied.
Do not switch on the seat heating if the seats have objects attached to or
placed on them, for example a child seat, a bag, etc. A fault of the heating elements in the seat heating can occur.
■ If additional seat covers or protective covers are attached to the seats, do
not turn on the seat heater - there is a risk of damaging the seat covers and
seat heating.
■ Do not clean the seats using moisture » page 178, Seat covers.
■
■
■
Notice
If the on-board voltage drops, the seat heating is switched off automatically,
in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control » page 193.
■ If the heaters for the rear seats are set to the highest intensity - level 3, they
are automatically switched over to level 2 after 10 minutes (two indicator lights
are illuminated on the switch).
■
Ventilated front seats
Fig. 72
Rocker switch for the seat ventilation
Switching off
› Switch the rocker switch to the centre position .
WARNING
If you or a passenger have limited pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g.
caused by medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes),
we recommend that you consult your physician before using the ventilated
front seat.
CAUTION
Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
The fan is located underneath the front seat cushion. Do not place any objects in this area - it may damage the fan.
■ Do not clean the seats using moisture » page 178, Seat covers.
■
■
Notice
The ventilation should only be switched on when the engine is running. This
has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity.
■ We do not recommend using the front seat ventilation and heating at the
same time. Using the ventilation to cool the seat surface considerably reduces
the heating capacity, at the same time affecting the ability of the control unit
to detect the right seat surface temperature.
■
Convenience features of passenger seat
Fig. 73
Operating passenger seat from
the rear seat
Heat and condensation can be removed from the seat cushions and seat
backrests on the front seats.
The ventilation is operated using the rocker switch » fig. 72 in the front part of
the seat cushion, in front of the seat control elements for the electric front
seat adjustment.
Switching on
› Switch the rocker switch to position 1 - lower intensity and to position 2 higher intensity.
84
Using the system
The front passenger seat can also be operated from the rear seat.
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
A in the direction of one of the arrows 1 » fig. 73.
› Push the switch
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
› Push the switch B in the direction of one of the arrows 2 » fig. 73.
Armrest, front
Armrest rear
Fig. 74
Adjusting armrest
The armrest is adjustable for height and length.
Setting the height
› First of all fold the cover downwards and then lift it in the direction of the
arrow 1 » fig. 74 to one of the 4 fixed positions.
Move
› Move the cover into the desired position in the direction of the arrow
2 » fig. 74.
Fig. 75
Fold the armrest forwards
Folding forward
› Fold down the armrest in the direction of the arrow » fig. 75.
A cup holder may be located in the armrest » page 88.
Seat backrests
The armrest includes a storage compartment underneath » page 90.
Notice
Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the handbrake.
Fig. 76 Seat back: unlock / lock
The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backrests forward. The seat backrests can be folded forward individually on vehicles
with divided rear seats.
Folding forward
Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adapt the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests 1).
1)
If the front seats are too far back, we recommend removing the rear head restraints before the seat
backrests are folded forward, to achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible. Store the removed head restraints in such a way that they are not be damaged or soiled.
Seats and useful equipment
85

› Push the lever
A » fig. 76 and fold the seat backrest completely forwards.
Folding backward
› If you removed the head restraint, you need to reinsert it with the backrest
tilted slightly forwards » page 81.
› Hold the rear outer seat belt C » fig. 76 against the side trim panel.
› Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing
knob A clicks into place – check by pulling on the seat backrest » .
› Make sure that the red pin B is hidden.
WARNING
■ The seat belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after
folding back the seat backrests – they must be ready to use.
■ The seat backrests must be securely locked in position so that no objects
in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment on
sudden braking – risk of injury.
■ Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged. Only then can
the seat belt for the middle seat reliably fulfil its function.
CAUTION
Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backrests. Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the folded back seat backrests.
Rear seat folded forward (Superb Combi)
Fig. 77
Folding the seat cushion forwards
› Pull up the seat cushion in the direction of the arrow
wards in the direction of the arrow 2 .
86
Using the system
1 » fig. 77 and fold for-
Notice
To achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible, the rear head restraints can be removed before folding the seat backrests forwards. Store the
removed head restraints in such a way that they are not be damaged or soiled.
Practical equipment

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Car park ticket holder
Storage compartment on the driver's side
Storage compartments in the doors
Storage compartment in the front centre console
Cup holders
Cigarette lighter
Ashtray
12-Volt power outlet
Storage compartment under the armrest, front
Storage net in the front centre console
Glasses storage box
Storage compartment on the passenger side
Storage compartment under the passenger seat
Clothes hook
Storage pockets on the front seats
Storage compartment for umbrella
Storage compartment in rear centre console
Storage compartment in the rear armrest
Rear seat backrest with long-cargo channel
Removable ski bag
87
87
88
88
88
89
89
90
90
91
91
92
92
92
93
93
93
94
94
95 
WARNING
Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving (when accelerating or cornering) and may distract you
from concentrating on the traffic – there is the risk of an accident.
■ When driving, ensure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage compartments can get into the driver's footwell. You would no
longer be in a position to operate the clutch pedal or accelerator - danger
of causing an accident!
■ No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the
drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something.
■ Ash and cigarette or cigar stubs must only be discarded in ashtrays!
Storage compartment on the driver's side
■
Car park ticket holder
Fig. 79
Storage compartment on the
driver's side

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
Opening
› Raise the handle
Fig. 78
Windscreen: Parking ticket holder
A » fig. 79 and open out the compartment in the direction
of the arrow.
Closing
› Swivel the lid against the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
The note holder is designed e.g. for attaching car park tickets.
WARNING
The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order
not to restrict the driver's vision.
Seats and useful equipment
87
WARNING
The storage compartment must never be used as an ashtray or for the storage of combustible materials - fire hazard and risk of damage to the storage compartment!
Storage compartments in the doors
Notice
The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light which lights up
when the parking light is on.
Cup holders
Fig. 82
Front centre console: Cup holder
Fig. 80 Storage compartment: in the front door/in the rear door

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
WARNING
Use the storage compartment only for storing objects which do not project
so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not impaired.
Storage compartment in the front centre console
Fig. 81
Opening the storage compartment

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.

Open/close
› Press on the edge of the roof
A » fig. 81 in the direction of the arrow.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
88
Using the system
Fig. 83 Rear armrest: Remove cup holder/insert cup holder
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder.
Cup holder at the front
On vehicles that are fitted with a cover for cup holders, you can cover the cup
holder by pulling on the handle A » fig. 82 in the direction of the arrow.

Rear cup holder
› Press on the front end of the armrest in the direction of the arrow » fig. 83 , the cup holder comes out.
› To slide the cup holder in again, press the middle part of the cup holder » fig. 83-  and slide it into the armrest in the direction of the arrow.
WARNING
Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
they may spill – risk of scalding!
■ Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.
WARNING
Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Improper usage can case
burns.
■ The cigarette lighter also operates when the ignition is switched off or
the ignition key withdrawn. Therefore, when leaving the vehicle never
leave people who are not completely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These could operate the igniter and cause burns.
■
■
CAUTION
Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the
electrical components or seat upholstery.
■ Slide in the cup holder before raising the rear armrest.
■
Notice
The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12Volt socket for electrical
appliances » page 90, 12-Volt power outlet.
■ Further information » page 169, Services, modifications, and technical alterations.
■
Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Fig. 85 Centre console: Ashtray at the front/rear

Fig. 84 Centre console: Cigarette lighter, front/rear

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Using the system
auf Seite 87.
› Press the button of the cigarette lighter A or B » fig. 84.
› Wait until the button pops forward.
› Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use.
› Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
The ashtray can be used for discarding ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like »
.
Removing/inserting the front ash tray
› Open the ashtray » fig. 81 on page 88.
› Grasp the ashtray insert in the area A » fig. 85 and remove it in the direction
of the arrow 1 .
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
Removing/inserting the rear ashtray insert
› Open the ashtray » fig. 94 on page 93.
Seats and useful equipment

89
› Grasp the ashtray insert
B » fig. 85 in the area marked with the arrows and
remove it in the direction of the arrow 2 .
WARNING
Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries. Therefore, when leaving the
vehicle never leave people who are not completely independent, such as
children, unattended in the vehicle.
■ If the connected electric device becomes too hot, switch it off and disconnect it from the power supply immediately.
■
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Never place flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire!
Notice
The ashtrays are fitted with an interior light which lights up when the parking
light is on.
12-Volt power outlet
Fig. 86 Boot: Superb / Superb Combi socket

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
CAUTION
The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical accessories with a power uptake of up to 120 watt.
■ Never exceed the maximum power consumption, otherwise the vehicle's
electrical system can be damaged.
■ Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery
of the vehicle!
■ Only use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power sockets.
■ Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility
in accordance with the applicable directives.
■ Switch off the devices connected to the power sockets before you switch
the ignition on or off and before starting the engine, to avoid damage from
voltage fluctuations.
■ Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices!
■
Storage compartment under the armrest, front
auf Seite 87.
Fig. 87
Armrest: Stowage compartment
The 12-volt power outlet (hereinafter referred to only as a socket) is located in
the front center console A » fig. 84 on page 89, in the rear center console
B » fig. 84 on page 89 and in the luggage compartment » fig. 86.
Use
› Remove the cover from power socket or cigarette lighter » fig. 84 on
page 89 or open the cover for the power socket » fig. 86.
› Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.
The 12-volt power sockets and any connected appliances can also be operated
when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn » .

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
Opening
› Pull and open the cover of the armrest using the handle
the arrow » fig. 87.
90
Using the system
A in the direction of

Closing
› Open the lid to the stop, only then can it be folded downwards and against
the direction of the arrow » fig. 87.
Glasses storage box
Fig. 89
Opening the glasses storage box
The sockets marked  AUX-IN input and the MDI input are located in the
storage compartment.
Notice
The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light which lights up
when the parking light is on.
Storage net in the front centre console
Fig. 88
Front centre console: Storage
net

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
Opening
› Press button
A » fig. 89.
The box folds in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
› Swivel the lid of the glasses storage box against the direction of the arrow » fig. 89 until it audibly clicks into place.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
WARNING
Only store soft objects with a total weight of 0.5 kg in the storage net.
Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
CAUTION
Do not place any sharp objects into the net – risk of net damage.
WARNING
The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the
spectacles and otherwise must be kept closed!
■ The box must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle – risk of
impairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system!
■
CAUTION
Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - they may be
damaged.
Seats and useful equipment
91
Storage compartment on the passenger side
Notice
When the stowage compartment is opened, a light lights up.
Storage compartment under the passenger seat
Fig. 91
Front passenger seat: Opening
the storage compartment
Fig. 90 Tray open / operating air supply

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
A pen holder is provided in the stowage compartment.
Opening
› Press the button » fig. 90 - .
The flap folds down.
Closing
› Lift the lid upwards until it clicks into place.
Air supply
› Open the air supply by pulling the lever in the direction of the arrow » fig. 90
- .
› The air supply is closed by pressing the lever in the opposite direction to that
of the arrow.
Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows
cooled air to flow into the storage compartment.
Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or interior air to flow into the storage compartment.
We recommend closing the air supply if it is operated in heating mode or the
cooling system for the storage compartment is not being used.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
92
Using the system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
Opening
› Pull the handle to position
1 » fig. 91 in the direction of the arrow.
The compartment opens in the direction of the arrow 2 .
Closing
› Grip the compartment by the handle and close in the opposite direction to
that of the arrow 2 » fig. 91.
› Hold onto the handle until the door is closed.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
CAUTION
The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1.5 kg.
in weight.
Clothes hook

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
The clothes hooks are located on the middle pillar of the vehicle and on the
handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors.

WARNING
Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks. Never leave any heavy or
sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing.
■ Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise
this may reduce the effectiveness of head airbags.
■ Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision
to the rear.
Storage compartment for umbrella
■
Fig. 93
Left rear door: Stowage compartment for an umbrella
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg.
Storage pockets on the front seats

Fig. 92
Map pockets
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
The storage compartment for an umbrella is located in the rear left
door » fig. 93.
Notice
An umbrella can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Storage compartment in rear centre console

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Fig. 94
Opening the storage compartment
auf Seite 87.
Pockets for storing maps, magazines etc. are provided on the back of the front
seat backrests » fig. 92.
WARNING
Never put heavy items in the map pockets – risk of injury!
CAUTION
Never put large objects into the map pockets, e.g. bottles or objects with sharp
edges - risk of damaging the pockets and seat coverings.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
The storage compartment is equipped with a removable insert.
Open/close
› Pull the handle
A » fig. 94 on the upper section of the recess and open out
the compartment in the direction of the arrow.
Closing takes place in reverse order.

Seats and useful equipment
93
WARNING
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also
not be used for such purposes – risk of fire!
Storage compartment in the rear armrest
Fig. 95
Opening the storage compartment

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
After folding the rear armrest and cover up, an opening in the seat backrest
becomes visible through which the removable through-loading bag with skis
can be pushed. The armrest and cover can be folded forward from the passenger compartment or the boot.
Opening from the passenger compartment
› Fold down the rear armrest » fig. 75 on page 85.
› Pull the handle A pull up to the stop in the direction of the arrow and fold
the cover down » fig. 96.
Opening from the boot
› Push the unlock button B » fig. 96 in the direction of the arrow and fold the
cover including the armrest forwards.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
Opening
› Lift button
A on the front of the armrest and lift the storage compartment
cover in the direction of the arrow » fig. 95.
Closing
› Fold back the storage compartment lid in the opposite direction to that of
the arrow » fig. 95 until it clicks.
Rear seat backrest with long-cargo channel
Fig. 96 Rear seats: Cover handle/boot: Unlock button
94
Using the system
Closing
› Fold the cover and rear armrest upwards to the stop - the cover must click
into place.
Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing. This is apparent as the red field above the unlocking button B » fig. 96 is not visible from
the boot.
WARNING
The through-loading channel is only intended for transporting skis that are
placed in a properly secured, removable through-loading bag » page 95.
WARNING
After placing skis into the through-loading bag, you must secure the bag
with the securing strap B » fig. 97 .
■ The strap A must hold the skis tight.
■ Make sure that the strap A holds the skis in front of the binding (also refer to imprint on the removable through-loading bag).
■ The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 24
kg.
Removable ski bag
■
Fig. 97
Securing the through-loading
bag

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 87.
The removable through-loading bag (hereinafter referred to only as a throughloading bag) is used exclusively for transporting skis.
Loading
› Open the boot lid.
› Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards » page 94, Rear seat backrest with long-cargo channel.
› Place the empty, removable through-loading bag in such a way that the end
of the bag with the zip is in the boot.
› Push the skis into the removable through-loading bag from the boot » .
› Close the through-loading bag.
Securing
› Tighten the strap A on the free end around the skis in front of the bindings » fig. 97 .
› Fold the seat backrest a little forward.
› Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around
the upper part of the seat backrest.
› Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlocking button clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest.
› Insert the securing strap B into the lock C until it clicks into place.
On vehicles fitted with a luggage net partition, guide the securing strap B
around the housing when the net partition is rolled up. After fixing the luggage net partition in place, it is no longer possible to unroll the luggage net
partition.
Notice
The through-loading bag is intended to hold two pairs of skis.
Place the skis with the tips facing to the front and the sticks with the tips
facing to the rear into the removable through-loading bag.
■ If there are several pairs of skis in the removable through-loading bag, ensure that the bindings are positioned at the same height.
■ The through-loading bag must never be folded together or stowed when
moist.
■
■
Luggage compartment

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Class N1 vehicles
Fastening elements
Fixing nets
Folding hook
Floor covering
Luggage net
Luggage compartment cover
Roll-up boot cover (Superb Combi)
Automatic Retractable cargo cover (Superb Combi)
Side pockets in luggage compartment
Side compartment in boot with battery
Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi)
96
97
97
97
98
98
98
99
99
99
100
100
Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling
characteristics of your vehicle:
› Distribute loads as evenly as possible.

Seats and useful equipment
95
› Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.
› Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or using the
nets » page 97.
In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic
energy that they can cause severe injuries.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object.
Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an object
with a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corresponds to 20 times its
own weight. This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg “ ”.
Luggage compartment light
The light switches on/off when the luggage compartment lid is opened or
closed.
If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish
automatically after around 10 minutes.
Boot light for Superb Combi vehicles » page 101.
WARNING
■ Store the objects in the boot and attach them to the lashing eyes.
■ Loose objects can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in
case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other road users.
■ Loose objects could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – danger
of death!
■ Please note that transporting heavy objects alters the handling properties of the vehicle due to the displacement of the centre of gravity – risk of
accident! The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly.
■ If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with
unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur in the event of
braking manoeuvres or accidents. To prevent items of luggage from moving
around, always use suitable lashing straps which must be firmly attached
to the lashing eyes.
■ The transported items must be stowed in such a way that no objects are
able to slip forward on sudden driving or braking manoeuvres – risk of injury!
■ When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been enlarged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats » page 9.
96
Using the system
WARNING (Continued)
If the rear seat next to the folded forward seat is occupied, ensure maximum safety, e.g. by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that
the seat is prevented from folding back in case of a rear collision.
■ Do not drive with the luggage compartment lid fully opened or slightly
ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk
of poisoning!
■ Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of
the vehicle – risk of accident!
■ Do not transport people in the boot!
■
CAUTION
Make sure that transported objects with sharp edges do not damage the following:
■ heating elements in the rear window;
■ elements of the aerial integrated in the rear window;
■ Aerial filaments integrated in the rear side windows (Superb Combi).
Notice
Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load » page 194.
Class N1 vehicles

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 96.
On class N1 vehicles, which are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set
which complies with the standard EN 12195 (1 - 4) must be used for fastening
the load.
Proper functioning of the electrical installation is essential for safe vehicle operation. It is important to ensure that the electrical installation is not damaged
during the adjustment process or when the storage area is being loaded and
unloaded.

Fastening elements
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 96.
Examples for attaching the fixing nets » fig. 99.
A Vertical pocket
B Horizontal pocket
C Floor net
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the fixing nets. Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
Fig. 98 Lashing eyes and fastening elements: Superb / Superb Combi

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 96.
The boot provides the following fastening elements » fig. 98.
A Lashing eyes for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets.
B Fastening elements for fastening fixing nets.
■
■
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the fixing nets is 1.5 kg.
Do not place any sharp objects in the nets – risk of net damage.
Folding hook
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the lashing eyes is 3.5 kN (350 kg).
Fixing nets
Fig. 100 Folding hooks: Superb / Superb Combi

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 96.
Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., are provided on both sides of the boot.
Fig. 99 Fastening examples for nets
Folding forward
› Superb: Press on the lower portion of the hook A and fold down direction of
the arrow 1 » fig. 100.
› Superb Estate: Grip the hook B direction of the arrow and fold down in the
direction of arrow 2 » fig. 100.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7.5 kg.
Seats and useful equipment
97
WARNING
Only store soft objects with a total weight of 1.5 kg in the net. Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
Floor covering
CAUTION
Do not place any sharp objects into the net – risk of net damage.
Luggage compartment cover
Fig. 103
Removing/installing the luggage
compartment cover
Fig. 101 Fixing the floor covering: Superb / Superb Combi

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 96.
The raised floor covering of the luggage compartment can be fixed (e.g. when
handling the spare wheel):
› Superb: With the loop on a hook on the luggage compartment cover » fig. 101
– .
› Superb Estate: With the hook on the frame of the luggage compartment
lid » fig. 101 - .
Luggage net
Fig. 102
Luggage net

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 96.
The luggage net is located on the underside of the luggage compartment cover.
The net is designed for transporting lighter objects.
98
Using the system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 96.
Removing
› Hook the support straps 1 » fig. 103 onto the tailgate.
› Place the cover in the horizontal position.
› Pull the cover out of the holders 2 horizontally towards the rear.
The removed boot cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest.
Installing
› Push the boot cover into the brackets 2 » fig. 103.
› Hook the support straps 1 onto the tailgate.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the boot cover, the vehicle occupants could
be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something.
CAUTION
Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of objects placed in this area.

Notice
If the retaining strips 1 are attached to the tailgate, the boot cover will raise
when you open the tailgate.
Automatic Retractable cargo cover (Superb Combi)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 96.
The automatic rolling up of the foldable boot cover enables an easier entry into the boot.
Roll-up boot cover (Superb Combi)
› Open the boot lid.
The foldable boot cover rolls up automatically in the position 1 to » fig. 104
on page 99.
› Push the cover in the area of the handle in the direction of the arrow
3.
The cover retracts completely.
When the boot lid is opened quickly, the automatic rolling up of the foldable
boot cover is blocked for a delay time of approx. 2 seconds.
The function to automatically roll up the foldable boot cover can be activated/
deactivated via the MAXI DOT display in the menu:
Fig. 104 Roll-up cargo cover: pull out and roll up / take out

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
■
auf Seite 96.
Extending
› Pull the foldable boot cover as far as the stop into the secured position
2 » fig. 104.
Settings
■ Auto Rollo
Side pockets in luggage compartment
Retracting
› Press the cover in the handle area in the direction of the arrow 3 » fig. 104,
and the cover automatically rolls up into position 1 .
Press in the grip area again and the cover will roll up.
Removing/inserting
The fully rolled-up boot cover can be removed (e.g. for the transport of bulky
objects).
› Push on the side of the crossbar in the direction of the arrow
and remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 5 .
4 » fig. 104
Fig. 105 Superb boot: Open side compartment left / right

Insertion takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the foldable boot cover.
Seats and useful equipment
99
Fig. 106
Superb Combi boot: Open right
compartment

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 96.
On some vehicles the battery is located in the left compartment » page 189.
Open / close compartment (Superb)
› Unfasten the bolts e.g. with a coin or screwdriver in the direction of the arrow 1 » fig. 107.
Closing takes place in reverse order.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 96.
Open and close compartment / (Superb Estate)
› For example, insert a coin in the slot A and lift them in the arrow direction
2 » fig. 107.
Open / close compartment (Superb)
› Turn the bolts in direction of arrow » fig. 105.
The compartment opens in the direction of the arrow 3 .
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Notice
The side compartment where the battery is located is labelled in the Superb
Estate vehicles with the symbol  .
The CD changer and TV tuner are located in the right compartment » fig. 105 .
The first-aid box can also be stored in this compartment.
Open and close compartment / (Superb Estate)
› Pull the handle in the direction of the arrow » fig. 106.
› Close compartment (opposite to arrow direction)
3 until you hear it click.
Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi)
Fig. 108
Removing non-lockable side
compartment
Closing takes place in the reverse order.
The CD changer and TV Tuner are housed in this compartment.
The first-aid box and warning triangle can also be stored in this compartment.
Side compartment in boot with battery

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 96.
Increasing the size of the boot
› Remove the cover of the stowage compartment in the direction of the arrow » fig. 108.
CAUTION
When handling the side compartment, ensure that the cover and the cover
mountings are not damaged.
Fig. 107 Open compartment with battery: Superb / Superb Combi
100 Using the system
Removable light (Superb Combi)

Use light
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Use light
Changing rechargeable light batteries
101
101
A removable lamp is fitted on the left side of the boot. This lamp has two functions.
› Lighting the luggage compartment - part B » fig. 109 on page 101 illuminated (lamp in holder).
› Portable lamp - part C illuminated (lamp removed from the holder).
If the lamp is in the holder, it is automatically switched on when the tailgate is
opened and switched off again when the tailgate is closed.
The lamp is supplied by three rechargeable type AAA batteries. The rechargeable batteries are constantly charged when the engine is running. It takes approx. 3 hours to fully charge the rechargeable batteries.
The lamp is fitted with magnets. Therefore it is possible to attach the lamp, for
example on the vehicle body, after removing it.
CAUTION
The removable lamp is not watertight and must therefore be protected against
moisture.
Notice
■ If the lamp is not correctly inserted into the holder, it does not light up when
the boot lid is opened and the rechargeable batteries are not charged.
■ If the lamp is not switched off and it is correctly inserted in the holder, the
bulbs in the front part C » fig. 109 on page 101 of the lamp are automatically
switched off.
Fig. 109 Use light / remove light

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 101.
Use light
› If you press button A » fig. 109 once, the lamp lights up with 100 % light intensity.
› If you press button A again, the lamp lights up with 50 % light intensity.
› Press A button once again - the light goes out.
Remove the lamp from the holder
› Grasp the lamp in the areas of the arrows D » fig. 109 and swivel it in the
direction of the arrow E .
Reinserting the lamp the holder
› First of all place the deactivated lamp in the holder on the side facing the
boot lid and then press on the lamp from the other side until it is clicks into
place.
Changing rechargeable light batteries

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 101.
Proceed as follows if you wish to replace the faulty rechargeable batteries
yourself:
› Remove the lamp.
› Lever off the cover for the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed
object from the location of the lock-off clips F » fig. 109 on page 101.
› Remove the faulty rechargeable batteries from the lamp.
› Insert the new rechargeable batteries.
Seats and useful equipment

101
› Insert the cover for the rechargeable batteries and press it down until it
Dividing the luggage compartment
clicks into place.
CAUTION
We recommend having faulty rechargeable batteries replaced by a ŠKODA
service partner. If the lamp is not correctly opened, it can be damaged.
Fig. 110
Dividing the boot with variable
loading floor
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used rechargeable batteries in accordance with national legal provisions.
Notice
Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the rechargeable batteries.
■ The replacement rechargeable batteries must have the same specification as
the original rechargeable batteries. If other types of rechargeable batteries are
used, the power output can be reduced or it can lead to a malfunction of the
lamp.
■

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 102.
› Lift up the part with the mounting and secure it by sliding it into the grooves
marked with the arrows » fig. 110.
Remove variable loading floor
Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment (Estate)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Dividing the luggage compartment
Remove variable loading floor
102
102
The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.
Notice
The room under the variable loading floor can be used to stow objects.
102 Using the system
Fig. 111 Boot: Remove variable loading floor/remove carrier rails

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 102.
› Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the safety eyes
A » fig. 111 to the
left by around 90°.
› Fold up and remove the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
› Unlock the carrier rails B by turning the arbour-mounted fixing eyes C to

the right by approx. 90°.
WARNING
Ensure that the carrier rails and variable loading floor are correctly fastened
when installing the variable loading floor. If this is not the case, there is a
risk of injury for the occupants.
auf Seite 103.
The variable loading floor can be partially pulled out over the rear bumper.
› Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle and lift gently in the
direction of the arrow 1 » fig. 112.
2 until it engages in the opening C .
The variable loading floor which is pulled out in such a way is solely used as a
seat, for example for changing shoes.
Introduction
› To push in the rear section of the variable loading floor, grasp by the handle
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Partial extension of variable load floor
Divide boot
Fit and remove variable loading floor
Fixing set
Movable lashing eyes
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
› Extend the variable load floor over the bumper in the direction of the arrow
Extending variable loading floor with integrated aluminium rails
and faseting elements (Superb Combi)


and lift slightly in the direction of the arrow 1 .
103
103
104
104
105
The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.
› Slide the variable load floor forward up to the stop.
When pulling out the variable loading floor, the front edge (close to the rear
seats) is lifted at the same time. Thus, small objects can no longer fall into the
space between the boot floor and the variable loading floor.
CAUTION
Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged.
Divide boot
Notice
The space below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing objects, for
example the fastening elements, removed foldable boot cover, etc.
Fig. 113
Dividing the boot
Partial extension of variable load floor

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 103.
The boot can be divided with the variable loading floor.
› Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle and lift in the direction of the arrow 1 » fig. 112 on page 103.
› Insert the trailing edge in one of the openings
Fig. 112 Boot: partially pulling out the variable loading floor
A » fig. 113.
The variable loading floor is secured in the openings A against movement.
Seats and useful equipment
103

The variable loading floor can be pulled out a little more before dividing the
boot with the variable loading floor » page 103. This enlarges the space between the rear seats and the separation.
› Fold up the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow
CAUTION
Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged.
Installing
› Fold up the floor and place it on the carrier rails.
› Push the floor forwards until it engages in the openings B in the carrier
rails » fig. 115.
› Carefully press in the vicinity of the openings C on the floor until it clicks into place, if necessary press the safety buttons A .
Fit and remove variable loading floor
3 » fig. 114.
› Press the safety buttons
A » fig. 115 and remove the floor.
WARNING
Ensure the variable loading floor is attached correctly during installation. If
this is not the case, there is a risk of injury for the occupants.
Fixing set
Fig. 114 Boot: Fold up variable loading floor
Fig. 116 Telescopic pole and tensioning strap

Fig. 115 Boot: remove variable loading floor

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 103.
The variable loading floor can be removed and reinstalled, if necessary.
Removing
› Grasp the rear part of the floor by the handle, raise it slightly in the direction
of the arrow 1 » fig. 114 and pull it out over the bumper in the direction of
the arrow 2 until it engages in the opening C » fig. 115.
104 Using the system
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 103.
The fixing set can be used for dividing the boot or for securing the objects
which are being transported.
Telescopic pole
› Insert the holders for the telescopic pole into the left and right openings of
the carrier rails.
› Press the top part of the holder in the direction of the arrow 1 » fig. 116 and
simultaneously push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place.

Tensioning strap
› Insert the tensioning strap holders into the opening on the left or right carrier rail.
› Press the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 » fig. 116 and simultaneously
push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 4 .
› Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place.
› Place the object that is to be secured behind the tensioning strap.
› Press the button 5 on the top side of the holder and tighten the strap.
WARNING
The objects in the boot must be firmly secured with the fixing set so that
they cannot move freely and uncontrollably and to prevent damage to objects or injuries to occupants.
Notice
Do not use the fixing set to secure objects that might damage the fixing set.
The tensioning strap can also be fully reeled up by pressing the button
5 » fig. 116.
■
■
Movable lashing eyes
Fig. 117
Moveable lashing eyes

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
›

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Using the net partition behind the rear seats
Using the net partition behind the front seats
Removing and refitting the net partition housing
105
106
106
WARNING
Ensure that the cross rod is inserted into the mounts C » fig. 118 on
page 105 or » fig. 119 on page 106 in the front position!
■ The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position after folding
back the seat cushions and backrests - they must be ready to use.
■ The seat backrests must be securely locked in position so that no objects
in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment on
sudden braking – risk of injury.
■ Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged. Only then can
the seat belt for the middle seat reliably fulfil its function.
■
Using the net partition behind the rear seats
Fig. 118
Net partition behind the front
seats in the pulled-out state
auf Seite 103.
There are four moveable lashing eyes in the boot that can, for example, be
used to attach the fixing nets.
› Press the button
Net partition (Superb Combi)
1 » fig. 117 and push the lashing eye in the desired position
in the direction of the arrow 2 .
Fold up the clamp 3 » fig. 117 and, for example, attach the fixing net.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 105.
Extending
› Pull the net partition by the tab A » fig. 118 in the direction of the fasteners
C.
› Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts C and push forwards.
› In the same way, insert the cross rod into the mount C on the other side of
the vehicle.
Seats and useful equipment
105

Retracting
› First pull the cross rod back slightly on the one side and then on the other
side and remove it from the mounts C » fig. 118.
› Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into
the housing B without being damaged.
Removing and refitting the net partition housing
Fig. 120
Rear seats: Removing the net
partition housing
Notice
If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment, the roll-up luggage compartment cover can be removed » page 99.
Using the net partition behind the front seats
Fig. 119
Net partition behind the front
seats in the pulled-out state

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 105.
Extending
› Fold the rear seats forward » page 85.
› Pull the net partition by the tab A » fig. 119.
› First of all insert the cross rod into the mount C on one side and push it forward.
› In the same way, insert the cross rod into the mount C on the other side of
the vehicle.
Retracting
› First pull the cross rod back slightly on the one side and then on the other
side and remove it from the mounts C » fig. 119.
› Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into
the housing B without being damaged.
› Fold the rear seats back into their original positions » page 85.
106 Using the system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 105.
Removing
› Fold the rear seats forward » page 85.
› Open the rear right door.
› Push the housing A in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove it from the
mounts on the right seat backrests in the direction of the arrow 2 » fig. 120.
Installing
› Insert the recesses on the housing A » fig. 120 into the mounts on the rear
seat backrests.
› Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 as
far as the stop.
› Fold the rear seats back into their original positions » page 85.
Roof rack system

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Attachment points
Roof load
WARNING
The transported items on the roof rack must be securely attached – risk
of accident!
■ Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps
or tensioning straps.
107
107
■

WARNING (Continued)
Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system.
When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on
the roof rack system, the handling of the car may change as a result of the
displacement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must
therefore be adapted to the current circumstances.
■ Avoid abrupt and sudden driving/braking manoeuvres.
■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
■ The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and permissible total vehicle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstances – risk of accident!
■
■
CAUTION
Only roof racks from the ŠKODA Original Accessories range should be used.
When dealing with roof racks, the installation instructions supplied with the
roof luggage rack system must be observed.
■ On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof or a panoramic sliding roof,
ensure that the opened sliding/tilting roof or the panoramic sliding roof does
not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof.
■ Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened.
■ The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system
and the load that is secured to it. Compare the vehicle height with available
clearances, such as underpasses and garage doors.
■ Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated
car wash.
■ Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load.
■
■
For the sake of the environment
The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption.
Attachment points
Does not apply to the Superb Combi.
Fig. 121 Attachment points for roof bars

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 106.
Installation position of the attachment points for roof bars » fig. 121:
A Forward attachment point
B Rear attachment point
Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions.
CAUTION
Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the enclosed instructions.
Roof load

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 106.
The maximum permissible roof load (including roof rack system) of 100 kg and
the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded.
The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower
load carrying capacity is used. In this case, the roof rack system must only be
loaded up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions.
Seats and useful equipment
107
Air conditioning system
Heating, ventilation, cooling

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Air outlets
Using the air conditioning system economically
Operational problems
Notice
The used air escapes through vents in the rear region of the luggage compartment.
■ We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating
air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from
the interior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning system. This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and
expense (replacement of compressor).
■
108
109
110
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Air outlets
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in
the vehicle. The cooling system prevents the windows from misting up during
winter months.
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling
effect.
Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode for the air-conditioning system » page 112 or for Climatronic » page 115.
WARNING
For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the windows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about
how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to demist and defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode.
CAUTION
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free (e.g. of ice, snow or
leaves) to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly.
■ After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air
conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is not a
leak!
■
108 Using the system
Fig. 122 Air vents at the front

An overview of the available settings for adjusting the direction of the air
outlet
Setting the direction of the air Active air outlet vents
outlet




Fig. 123 Air vents at the rear

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 108.
Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the opened air outlet vents according
to the setting of control dial and the outside atmospheric conditions.
The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 2, 3 » fig. 122
and 5 » fig. 123 and the outlets can be opened and closed individually.
Set the air flow direction
› To adjust the height of the air flow, turn the horizontal vanes up or down
with the movable adjuster A » fig. 122 or » fig. 123.
› To change the lateral direction of the air flow, turn the vertical fins with the
movable adjuster A » fig. 122 or » fig. 123 to the left or right.
Setting the amount of airflow
› Turn the knob B » fig. 122 or » fig. 123 to position  to fully open the air outlet.
› Turn the knob B » fig. 122 or » fig. 123 to position 0 to close the air outlet.
1, 2
1, 2, 4, 6
2, 3, 5
4, 6
Notice
Do not cover the air outlet vents with objects of any kind.
Using the air conditioning system economically

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 108.
The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine
when in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption.
It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the
interior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order
to allow the heated air to escape.
The cooling system should not be on if the windows are open.
For the sake of the environment
Pollutant emissions are also lower when fuel is being saved » page 145, Economical driving and environmental sustainability.
The knob can be adjusted to any position in between.
Air conditioning system
109
Operational problems

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
Notice
We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a specialist garage once every year.
■ During operation of the air conditioner, under certain circumstances an increase in engine idle speed may occur in order to ensure sufficiently comfortable heating.
■
auf Seite 108.
If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than +5
°C, there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be.
› One of the fuses has blown. Check the fuse and replace if necessary » page 216.
› The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because
the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot » page 29.
Control elements
If you are not able to resolve the operational problem yourself, or if the cooler
output has reduced, switch off the cooling system and seek assistance from a
specialist garage.
Air conditioning system (manual air conditioning system)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Control elements
adjusting
Recirculated air mode
110
112
112
The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met.
 The cooling system is switched on » page 110.
 The engine is running.
 The outside temperature is above approx. +2 °C.
 The blower switch is switched on (positions 1-4).
Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow out of
the vents when the cooling system is switched on.
If the desired interior temperature can also be achieved without activating the
cooling system, fresh air mode should be selected.
The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to
provide cooling at a high load of the engine.
CAUTION
Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (especially
around the feet) and large differences in temperature, for example, when getting out of the vehicle, can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold.
110
Using the system
Fig. 124 The air conditioning system: Control elements

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 110.
Functions of the individual controls » fig. 124:
A Set the temperature (turn to the left to reduce the temperature: turn to
the right to increase temperature)
B Set the blower stage (stage 0: Blowers, level 4: the highest blower speed)
C Set the direction of the air outlet » page 108
 Switching the cooling system on/off
 Switching the rear window heater on/off » page 73
 Aux. heating on/off » page 116
 Switch recirculation on/off » page 112
 Control the seat heater on the front left seat » page 83
 Control the seat heater on the front right seat » page 83

Notice
The warning light in the symbol button  lights after activation, even if not all
of the conditions for the function of the cooling system are met » page 110. By
lighting up of the indicator light in the button, the operational readiness of the
cooling system is signalled.
Air conditioning system
111
adjusting

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 110.
Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning system for the respective operating modes:
Control dial settings » fig. 124 on page 110
Settings
Defrost/defog windscreen and
side windowsa)
The fastest heating
Comfortable heating
The fastest cooling
Comfortable cooling
Fresh air mode - ventilation
a)
A
Desired temperature
To the right up to
the stop
Desired temperature
To the left up to
the stop
Desired temperature
To the left up to
the stop
Button » fig. 124 on page 110
B
C
3 or 4






3
2 or 3
briefly 4, then
2 or 3
1, 2 or 3
Desired position
Air outlet vents 2 » fig. 122
on page 108


Automatically
switched on
Do not switch on
Open and align with the
side window
Switched off
Briefly switch on
Opening
Switched off
Do not switch on
Opening
Activated
Briefly switch on
Opening
Activated
Do not switch on
Open and align to the roof
Switched off
Do not switch on
Opening
We recommend that you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity levels. This can result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside.
We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 » fig. 122 on page 108 in
the opened position.
Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by repeatedly
pressing the symbol button .
Recirculated air mode

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 110.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in
a traffic jam.
Switching on/off
› Press the symbol button  .
The warning light in the button lights up.
› Press the symbol button  again.
The warning light in the button goes out.
112
Using the system
Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control C » fig. 124 on page 110 is turned to position .
WARNING
Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers, reduce attention
levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows
start to mist up.
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning system)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Control elements
automatic mode
Switching the cooling system on/off
Setting the temperature
Recirculation mode - Version 1
Recirculation mode - Version 2
Controlling blower
Defrosting windscreen
Notice
We recommend that you have Climatronic cleaned by a specialist garage
once every year.
■ During operation of the Climatronic, under certain circumstances an increase
in engine idle speed can ocxcur in order to ensure adequate thermal comfort.
■ On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio or radio navigation system,
the Climatronic information is also shown on their displays. This function can
be switched off, see » operating instructions for the radio or navigation system.
■
113
114
114
114
115
115
116
116
Control elements
The Climatronic in automatic mode ensures the best-possible setting of the
temperature of the outflowing air, the blower stage and air distribution.
The system also takes sunlight into account, which eliminates the need to alter the settings manually.
The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met.
 The cooling system is switched on » page 110.
 The engine is running.
 The outside temperature is above approx. +2 °C.
The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to
provide cooling at a high load of the engine.
Aeration of the vehicle when ignition is switched off
On models fitted with power sliding/tilting roof with sollar cells, the fresh air
blower is automatically switched over to “solar mode” if the sun ray's are sufficient after switching off the ignition. The solar cells on the sliding/tilting roof
deliver power for the fresh air blower. This supplies the interior of the car with
fresh air.
For an optimum ventilation, the air outlet vents 2 and 3 must be
opened » fig. 122 on page 108.
The ventilation functions only when the sliding/tilting roof is fully closed.
Fig. 125 Climatronic: Control elements
Functions of the individual controls » fig. 125:
A Adjust the temperature for the left side » page 114
B Adjust the blower speed  » page 116
C depending on equipment:
›  Aux. heating on/off » page 117
›  Switching the windscreen heater on/off » page 73
D Adjust the temperature for the right side » page 114
E Interior temperature sensor
F depending on equipment:
›  Recirculation mode with air quality sensor on/off » page 115, Recirculation mode - Version 1
›  Recirculation mode without air quality sensor on/off » page 115, Recirculation mode - Version 2
Air conditioning system
113

 Switch the intensive windscreen heater on/off
 Air flow to the windows
 Air flow to the upper body
 Air flow in the footwell
 Switching the rear window heater on/off » page 73
 Control the seat heater on the front left seat » page 83
 Switching automatic mode on » page 114
 Switching Climatronic system off
 Switching the cooling system on/off » page 114
 Switching the temperature setting in Dual mode on/off » page 114
 Operating the seat heater on the front right seat » page 83
Notice
Do not stick anything on or cover the interior temperature sensor E , otherwise it could have an unfavourable effect on the Climatronic.
automatic mode
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and
to demist the windows in the interior of the car.
Recommended setting for all periods of the year
› Set the required temperature between +18 °C and +26 °C: we recommend 22
°C.
› Press button  » fig. 125 on page 113 .
› Set the air outlet vents 2 and 3 » fig. 122 on page 108 so that the air flow is
directed slightly upwards.
After pressing, an indicator light in the top right or left corner of the button
 lights up, depending on which mode was last selected.
If the warning light in the top right corner of the button  lights up, the Climatronic operates in “HIGH”-mode.
The “HIGH” mode is the standard setting of the Climatronic.
When pressing  the button again, the Climatronic switches to “LOW”-mode
and the indicator light in the top left corner lights up. The Climatronic uses only in this mode the lower blower speed. However taking into account the noise
level, this is more comfortable, yet be aware that the effectiveness of the air
conditioning system is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occupied.
By pressing the button  again, it is changed to “HIGH”-mode.
114
Using the system
Automatic mode can be switched off by pressing one of the buttons for the air
distribution or by increasing/decreasing the blower speed.
Switching the cooling system on/off
› Press the button .
The indicator light in the button lights up.
› Press button . once more.
The indicator light in the button goes out.
After the cooling system is switched off, only the ventilation and heating function remains active whereby the minimum temperature that can be reached is
the outside temperature.
Setting the temperature
The interior temperature for the left and right side can be set separately or together.
For both sides
› Turn the control dial A » fig. 125 on page 113 to the left or right to increase
or decrease the temperature.
The indicator light in the button  lights up.
For the right side
› Turn the control dial D » fig. 125 on page 113 to the left or right to increase
or decrease the temperature.
The indicator light in the button  lights up.
If the warning light in the symbol button  is lit, the temperature for both
sides cannot be set with the control dial A . This function can be restored by
pressing the symbol button . The indicator light in the button goes out.
The interior temperature can be set between +18 °C and +26 ℃. The interior
temperature is regulated automatically within this range.
If a temperature lower than +18 °C is selected, a blue symbol lights up at the
start of the numerical scale.
If a temperature higher than +26 °C is selected, a red symbol lights up at the
start of the numerical scale.
At both end positions, Climatronic functions at maximum cooling/heating output and the temperature is not regulated.

WARNING
Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers, reduce attention
levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows
start to mist up.
CAUTION
Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (especially
around the feet) and large differences in temperature, for example, when getting out of the vehicle, can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold.
Recirculation mode - Version 1
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in
a traffic jam.
If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognised by the
air quality sensor, recirculated air mode will temporarily be switched off.
If the concentration of pollutants decreases to the normal level, the air distribution control is automatically switched off so that fresh air can be guided into
the vehicle interior.
Notice
If the windscreen mists up, press the symbol button . Press the button
 once the windscreen has demisted.
■ The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside temperature is higher than approx. 2 °C.
■
Recirculation mode - Version 2
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then
fed back into the interior.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in
a traffic jam.
When the automatic air distribution control is switched on, an air quality sensor measures the concentration of pollutants in the drawn in air.
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then
fed back into the interior.
Switching recirculated air mode on
The air recirculation mode is automatically activated after the ignition is
switched if it was on before the ignition was turned off. The indicator light in
the button lights up.
› Repeatedly press the button  until the indicator light on the left side of
the button is illuminated.
Switch on automatic air distribution control
› Repeatedly press the button  until the warning light on the right-hand
side of the button lights up.
Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily
If the air quality sensor does not switch on automatic recirculated air mode
when there is an unpleasant smell, you can switch it on manually.
› Press the symbol button .
The indicator light lights up in the button on the left side.
Switching recirculated air mode off
› Press the button or press the symbol button  again until the warning
lights in the button go out.
Switch off / on
› Press the symbol button  .
The warning light in the button goes out.
› Press the symbol button  again.
The warning light in the button lights up.
WARNING
Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers, reduce attention
levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows
start to mist up.
Air conditioning system
115

Notice
If the windscreen mists up, press the symbol button . Press the button
 once the windscreen has demisted.
Controlling blower
The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with
the interior temperature.
However, the blower stages can be manually adapted to suit your particular
needs.
› Repeatedly pressing the symbol button  on the left or right reduces or increases blower speed.
If the blower is switched off, the Climatronic system is switched off.
The set blower speed is displayed above the symbol button  when the respective number of indicator lights come on.
WARNING
“Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases.
■ Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary.
■ Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up.
■
Defrosting windscreen
Switching on
› Press the symbol button  » fig. 125 on page 113.
› Press the symbol button  » fig. 125 on page 113.
Switching off
› Press the symbol button  again or press the symbol button .
› Press the symbol button  again.
More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1 » fig. 122 on page 108. The temperature control is controlled automatically.
116
Using the system
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Switching on/off
Radio remote control
117
118
Conditions for the functioning of auxiliary heating (Aux. heating and ventilation), hereinafter referred to only as auxiliary heating (Aux. heating).
 The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient.
 The fuel supply is adequate (the warning icon  is not lit in the display of
the instrument cluster).
Auxiliary ventilation
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by
switching off the engine, whereby the interior temperature is effectively decreased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun).
Auxiliary heating (aux. heating)
The auxiliary heating (aux. heating) can be used when stationary, when the
engine is switched off to preheat the vehicle and while driving (e.g. during the
heating phase of the engine).
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) functions in connection with the airconditioning system or Climatronic.
The auxiliary heating (aux. heating) also warms up the engine. This is not valid
for vehicles with the 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine.
The auxiliary heating (parking heating) warms up the coolant by combusting
fuel from the vehicle tank. The coolant heats air flowing into the passenger
compartment (as long as the blower fan speed B » fig. 124 on page 110
or » fig. 125 on page 113 is not set to zero).

WARNING
The auxiliary heating (aux. heating) must never be operated in closed
rooms (e.g. garages) – risk of poisoning!
■ The auxiliary heating (aux. heating) must not be allowed to run during refuelling – risk of fire.
■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating (aux. heating) is located on the
underside of the vehicle. Therefore, if you wish to operate the auxiliary
heating (aux. heating), do not park the vehicle in such a way that the exhaust gases can come into contact with highly flammable materials (e.g. dry
grass) or easily inflammable substances (e.g. spilt fuel) – risk of fire.
Switching on/off
■
CAUTION
Running auxiliary heating (aux. heating) consumes fuel from the vehicle tank
and automatically controls the filling level. If only a low quantity of fuel is
present in the fuel tank, the auxiliary heating (aux. heating) switches off.
■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating (aux. heating), which is located on
the underside of the vehicle, must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must
not be blocked.
■ If the auxiliary heating (aux. heating) is running, the vehicle battery discharges. If the auxiliary heating and ventilation has been operated several times
over a longer period, the vehicle must be driven a few kilometres in order to
recharge the vehicle battery.
Fig. 126 Button for switching on/off the system directly on the operating
part of the air conditioning/Climatronic
■
Notice
■ The auxiliary heating (aux. heating) switches on the blower B » fig. 124 on
page 110 or » fig. 125 on page 113 only if it has achieved a coolant temperature
of approx. 50 °C.
■ At low outside temperatures, this can result in a formation of water vapour in
the area of the engine compartment. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
■ The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free (e.g. of ice, snow or
leaves) to ensure that the auxiliary heating (aux. heating) operates properly.
■ So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the auxiliary heating, you must maintain the comfort temperature normally selected
by you, leave the fan switched on and leave the air outlet vents in an open position. It is recommended to put the air flow in the position  or .

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 117.
The auxiliary heating (aux. heating) can be switched on/off as follows.
Manually switching on


using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning/Climatronic. The warning light in the button lights up » fig. 126;
by using the radio remote control » page 118.
Manually switching off
using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning/Climatronic. The warning light in the button goes out » fig. 126;
 by using the radio remote control » page 118.

After switching off the auxiliary heating, the coolant pump runs for a short period.
Automatic switching on/off
The following menu items can be selected from the Aux. heating menu item in
the information display » page 44 (depending on the vehicle equipment):
■ Day of the week - set the current day of the week;
■ Running time - Set the required running time in 5 minute increments. The
running time can be 10 to 60 minutes.
■ Mode - Set the desired heating/ventilation mode;
Air conditioning system
117

Starting time 1, Starting time 2, Starting time 3 - for each pre-set time, the
day and the time (hour and minute) can be set for switching on the auxiliary
heating and ventilation. An empty position can be found between Sunday
and Monday when selecting the day. If this empty position is selected, the
activation is performed without taking into account the day.
■ Activate - Activate pre-set mode;
■ Deactivate - Deactivate pre-set mode;
■ Factory setting - Restore factory setting;
■ Back - Return to main menu
■
Only one programmed pre-set time can be active.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 117.
Explanation of graphic » fig. 127
A
Aerial
B
Warning light

Switch on aux. heating

Switch off aux. heating
The transmitter and the battery are housed in the housing of the remote control. The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle.
After the auxiliary heating (aux. heating) automatically activates at the set
time, it is necessary to pre-set a time again.
When the battery is fully charged, the range of the remote control is a few
hundred metres. Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad
weather conditions and a weaker battery in the remote control can clearly reduce the range.
If the menu item Back is selected or no changes are made on the display for
longer than 10 seconds, the set values are stored, but the pre-set time is not
activated.
To switch the auxiliary heating (aux. heating) on or off, hold the remote control
vertical, with the aerial A pointing upwards. The antenna must not be covered
with the fingers or the palm of the hand during this process.
The system switches itself off at the end of the running time set under the
menu item Running time.
The auxiliary heating can only be switched on/off safely using the radio remote control, if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle
is at least 2 m.
The last programmed pre-set time remains active.
Notice
An indicator light on the button  » fig. 126 is illuminated when the system is
running.
After pressing the button, the warning light in the remote control gives the
user different kinds of feedback:
Display warning light B » fig. 127
Radio remote control
Fig. 127
Auxiliary heating (aux. heating):
Radio remote control
118
Using the system
Importance
The auxiliary heating was switched
Lights up green for around 2 seconds.
on.
The auxiliary heating (aux. heating) is
Lights up red for around 2 seconds.
switched off.
Slowly flashes green for around 2 sec- The ignition signal was not received.
onds.
The auxiliary heating (aux. heating) is
Quickly flashes green for around 2
blocked, e. g. because the tank is
seconds.
nearly empty or there is a fault in the
auxiliary heating (aux. heating).
The switch off signal was not reFlashes red for around 2 seconds.
ceived.
The battery is weak, however the
Lights up orange for around 2 secswitching on or off signal was reonds, then green or red.
ceived.

Display warning light B » fig. 127
Lights up orange for around 2 seconds, then flashes green or red.
Flashes orange for around 5 seconds.
Importance
The battery is weak, however the
switching on or off signal was not received.
The battery is discharged, however
the switching on or off signal was not
received.
Replace the battery » page 212.
CAUTION
The radio remote control comprises electronic components and must therefore
be protected against water, severe impacts and direct sunlight.
Communication and multimedia
General information

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
119
120
120
121
121
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems
Universal telephone preinstallation (hands free)
Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel
Symbols in the MAXI DOT display
Phone Phonebook
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems
ŠKODA permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio systems
with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission
power of up to 10 watts.
Please ask at a specialist workshop about installing and operating mobile
phones and two-way radio systems that have a transmission power of more
than 10 W.
Operating mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with the
functionality of the electronic systems in your vehicle.
The possible reasons for this are:
› No external aerial.
› External aerial incorrectly installed.
› transmission power greater than 10 watts.
WARNING
If a mobile phone or a two-way radio system is operated in a vehicle without an external aerial or an external aerial which has been installed incorrectly, this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field inside the
vehicle.
■ Two-way radio systems, mobile phones or mounts must not be installed
on airbag covers or within the immediate deployment range of the airbags.
■
Communication and multimedia
119

WARNING (Continued)
Never leave a mobile phone on a seat, on the dash panel or in any area
from where it becomes a projectile during a sudden braking manoeuvre, an
accident or a collision — risk of injury.
■ Before transport of the vehicle by air, the Bluetooth® function must be
switched off by a specialist company.
■
Universal telephone preinstallation (hands free)
The universal telephone preinstallation (“hands-free system”) includes a convenience mode for the mobile phone via voice control, the multifunction steering wheel, the radio or navigation system.
Notice
We recommend that the installation of mobile phones and two-way radio
systems in a vehicle be carried out by a specialist firm.
■ Not all mobile phones that enable Bluetooth® communication are compatible
with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II or GSM III. Ask a ŠKODA
Partner whether your phone is compatible with the universal telephone preparation GSM II or GSM III.
■ The range of the Bluetooth® connection to the hands-free system is restricted to the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obstacles between the devices and mutual interferences with other devices. If your
mobile phone is in a jacket pocket, for example, this can lead to difficulties
when establishing a connection with the hands-free-system or transferring
data.
■
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully
responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
■ Only use the system so that you are in full control of your vehicle in every
traffic situation - risk of accident!
■ The national regulations for using a mobile phone in a vehicle must be
observed.
■
Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel
To minimize driver distraction when operating the telephone, the basic telephone's functions can be set by simply operating the buttons located on the
steering wheel » fig. 128.
This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the universal telephone preinstallation at the factory.
The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current telephone.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel are illuminated.
Fig. 128 Multifunction steering wheel: Control buttons for the telephone
120 Using the system

Button /
wheel
» fig. 128
Action
1
Press briefly
Turn upwards
Turn downwards
2
Press briefly
2
Press and hold button
Turn up/down
Press briefly
Press and hold button
Quickly turn upwards
Quickly turn downwards
Press briefly
Press and hold button
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
Operation
Mute (MUTE) )
Increase the volume
Decrease the volume
Accept call, End call
Display of the telephone's basic menu → Telephone main menu → List of dialled numbers → Call selected contact
Reject the incoming call
Previous / next menu item
Confirm selected menu item
Continuously display first letter of the phone book
To the previous initial letter in the telephone book
To the next initial letter in the telephone book
Return to a previous level on menu
Exit telephone menu
Symbols in the MAXI DOT display
Symbol









a)
Importance
Charge status of the phone batterya)
Signal strengtha)
A phone is connected with the hands-free system
The hands-free system is visible to other devices
A phone is connected with the hands-free system
The hands-free system is visible fore other devices
A multimedia unit is connected to the hands-free system
A UMTS network is available
Internet connection via the hands-free system
Valid for
GSM II, GSM III
GSM II, GSM III
GSM II, GSM III when connected via the HFP profile
GSM II, GSM III when connected via the HFP profile
GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile
GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile
GSM II, GSM III
GSM III
GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile
This function is only supported by some mobile phones.
Phone Phonebook
After the telephone's first connection to the hands-free system, the phone
book from the phone and the SIM card loads into the hands-free memory.

A phone phonebook is part of the hands-free system. This phone phonebook
can be used depending on the type of mobile phone.
Communication and multimedia
121
Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the handsfree system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating
can take a few minutes. During this period, the available phone book is the one
stored at the previous update. Newly stored telephone numbers are only
shown after the updating has ended.
The update is interrupted if a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call,
voice control dialogue) occurs during the updating procedure. After the telephone event has ended, the updating starts anew.
GSM II
The internal phonebook provides 2 500 free memory locations. Each contact
can contain up to 4 numbers.
On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system, a maximum of 1 200
telephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance.
If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500, the phone book is not complete.
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II comprises the following functions.
› Phone Phonebook » page 121.
› Convenience operation of the telephone via the multifunction steering
wheel » page 120.
› Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display » page 120.
› Voice control of the telephone » page 129.
› Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units » page 131.
All communication between a mobile phone and your vehicle's hands-free system is established with the help of Bluetooth® technology.
Notice
The following guidelines must be observed » page 119, Mobile phones and
two-way radio systems.
Connecting the mobile phone to the hands-free system
GSM III
The internal phonebook provides 2 000 free memory locations. Each contact
can contain up to 5 numbers.
To connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, the two devices must
be paired. Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions
for your mobile phone.
On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system, a maximum of 1 000
telephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance.
The following steps must be carried out for the connection.
If the mobile phone's telephone book has more than 2,000 contacts, the following message will appear in the MAXI DOTdisplay:
› Switch on the ignition.
› Select the Phone - New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until
Phone book not fully loaded
the hands-free system has completed the search.
1)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Connecting the mobile phone to the hands-free system
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
1)
2)
122
123
Depending on the Bluetooth® version on the mobile phone, an automatically generated 6-digit PIN (SSP)
is either displayed, or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually.
Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth® connection
is completed by inputting a code. If the authorisation input is required, it must always be performed
when re-establishing the Bluetooth connection.
122
Using the system
phone.
› Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found.
› Confirm the PIN .
› If the hands-free system announces (as standard SKODA_BT) on the display
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II

› Activate Bluetooth® and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele-
of the mobile phone, enter the PIN1 ) within 30 seconds and wait, until the
connection is established2).
› To finish pairing in the MAXI DOT display, confirm the creation of the new
user profile.

If there is no free space available to create a new user profile, delete an existing user profile.
During the connecting procedure, no other mobile phone may be connected
with the hands-free system.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired with the hands-free system, whereby
only one mobile phone can communicate with the hands-free system.
The visibility of the hands-free system is automatically switched off 3 minutes
after the ignition is switched on and is also deactivated when the mobile
phone has connected to the hands-free system.
Restoring the visibility of the hands-free system
If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands-free
system within 3 minutes of switching on the ignition, the visibility of the
hands-free system can be reestablished for 3 minutes in the following ways.
› By turning the ignition off and on.
› By turning voice control off and on.
› In the MAXI DOT display under menu item Bluetooth - Visibility.
› Is the visibility of the mobile phone active?
› Has the mobile phone already been paired with the hands-free system?
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
The following menu items can be selected from the Phone menu.
■ Phone book
■ Dial number2)
■ Call list
■ Voice mailbox
■ Bluetooth2)
■ Settings3)
■ Back
Phone book
The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone
memory and the mobile phone SIM card.
Creating a connection with an already paired mobile phone
After switching on the ignition, the connection is automatically established for
the already paired mobile phone1). Check on your mobile phone if the automatic
connection has been established.
Dial number
Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item. The required digits must be selected one after the other using the adjustment wheel,
and then confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel. You can select digits
0-9, symbols , , # and the Cancel, Call and Delete functions.
Disconnecting the connection
› By withdrawing the ignition key.
› By disconnecting the hands-free system in the mobile phone.
› By disconnecting from the user in the MAXI DOT display under the menu item
Bluetooth - User.
Call list
The following menu items can be selected in the Call list menu item.
■ Missed calls - List of missed calls
■ Dialled Nos. - List of dialled numbers
■ Received calls - list of received calls
Solving connection problems
If the hands-free system reports No paired phone found, check the operating
status of the mobile phone.
› Is the mobile phone switched on?
› Is the PIN code entered?
› Is Bluetooth® active?
Voice mailbox
In the Voice mailbox menu item, you can set the number of the voice mailbox2)
and then dial the number.
1)
2)
3)
Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth® connection
is completed by inputting a code. If the authorisation input is required, it must always be performed
when re-establishing the Bluetooth connection.
On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the navigation system menu; refer to the » operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system.
This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system.
Communication and multimedia
123

Bluetooth
The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item.
■ User - Overview of the stored telephones
■ New user - Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range
■ Visibility - Switches on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devices
■ Media player - Playback via Bluetooth®
■ Active device - Connected device
■ Paired Devices - List of paired devices
■ Search - Device search
■ Phone name - option to change the name of the phone (default SKODA_BT)
Settings
The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item.
■ Telephone book - Phone book
■ Update1) - Update the phone book
■ List - Arrange the entries in the phone book
■ Surname - Arrange according to surname
■ First name - Arrange according to first name
■ Ring tone - Ring tone setting
Connecting the phone to the hands-free system
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
124
125
127
The following functions are included in the universal telephone preinstallation
GSM III:
› Phone Phonebook » page 121.
› Convenience operation via the multifunction steering wheel » page 120.
› Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display » page 125.
› Voice control of the telephone » page 129.
1)
On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the navigation system menu; refer to the » operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system.
124 Using the system
rSAP - Remote SIM access profile
After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile, the telephone deregisters from the GSM network, and communication
with the network is only enabled by the hands-free system via the vehicle's
external aerial. In the telephone only the interface for Bluetooth® remains active. In this case, you can only use the mobile phone to disconnect from the
hands-free system, deactivate the Bluetooth® connection or dial the emergency number 112 (only valid in some countries).
Notice
The following guidelines must be observed » page 119, Mobile phones and
two-way radio systems.
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl
Connecting the phone to the hands-free system
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
Internet connection via Bluetooth®
All communication between a telephone and the hands-free system of your
vehicle can only be established with the help of the following profiles of Bluetooth® technology.
HFP - Hands Free Profile
After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HFP profile, the telephone continues to use its GMS module and the internal antenna
to communicate with the GSM network.
Back
Return to the telephone's basic menu.

› Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units » page 131.
› Internet connection » page 127.
› Display of SMS messages » page 126.
To connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, it is necessary to interconnect the telephone and hands-free system. Detailed information on this
is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone. The following
steps must be carried out for the connection.
Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile
› Activate Bluetooth® and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele-
phone. For certain mobile phones it is necessary to switch on first the rSAP
function.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Select the Phone - New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until
the hands-free system has completed the search.

› Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found.
› Confirm the PIN .
› If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code, enter the PIN code for the SIM card
1)
in your phone. The telephone connects to the hands-free system (during the
first connection you can only enter the PIN code in the MAXI DOT display
when the vehicle is stationary, as this is the only situation when you can
choose whether the PIN code should be stored).
› To save a new user, follow the instructions in the Maxi DOT display.
› Reconfirm the rSAP command on your mobile phone to download the telephone book and the identification data from the SIM card into the hands-free
system.
Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HPP profile
› Activate Bluetooth® and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Select the Phone - New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until
the hands-free system has completed the search.
› Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found.
› Confirm the PIN1 ).
› Follow the instructions on the MAXI DOT display and the mobile phone to
store a new user or to download the telephone book and identification data
from the SIM card into the hands-free system.
The telephone primarily connects via the rSAP profile.
If the PIN code was stored, the telephone is automatically detected and connected with the hands-free system the next time the ignition is switched on.
Check your mobile phone to see whether this automatic connection has been
established.
Disconnecting the connection
› By removing the key from the ignition lock (the connection is disconnected
during a telephone call).
› By disconnecting the hands-free system in the mobile phone.
› Select the user by disconnecting the user in the Maxi DOT display in the
Bluetooth - User menu option - Disconnect.
1)
2)
On vehicles which are fitted with a radio or navigation system at the factory, it
is possible to terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the ignition lock by pressing the button on the touch screen of the radio2) or navigation system; refer to the » operating instructions for the radio or navigation
system.
Notice
In the memory of the hands-free system, up to three users can be stored,
whereby the hands-free system can only communicate actively with one user.
If a connection is established with a fourth mobile phone, one of the users
must be deleted.
■ When connecting to the hands-free system, follow the instructions on your
mobile phone.
■
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
If no phone is connected to the hands-free system, the message No paired
phone found appears along with the following menu items when the Mobile
phone menu is selected.
■ Help - This menu item appears when no paired phone is stored in the memory of the hands-free system.
■ Connect - This menu item appears when one or more paired phones are stored in the memory of the hands-free system.
■ New user - New phone
■ Media player - Media player
■ Active device - Connected device
■ Paired devices - List of paired devices
■ Search - Device search
■ Visibility - Visibility on/off
■ SOS - Emergency call
If a telephone is paired with the hands-free system, the following menu items
can be selected in the Mobile phone menu.
Phone book
The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone
memory and the mobile phone SIM card.
Depending on the Bluetooth® version on the mobile phone, an automatically generated 6-digit PIN (SSP)
will either be displayed, or a 16-digit code displayed in the MAXI DOTdisplay will need to be entered into
your mobile phone and confirmed within 30 seconds by following the instructions on your mobile phone
display.
Does not apply for Radio Swing.
Communication and multimedia
125

The following functions are available for each phone contact.
■
■
Display telephone number
Voice tag - Voice tag for the contact
■ Replay - Play a voice tag
■ Record - Record a voice contact
Dial number
Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item. The required digits must be selected one after the other using the adjustment wheel,
and then confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel. You can select digits
0-9, symbols +, , # and the Delete, Call and Back functions.
Call list
The following menu items can be selected in the Call list menu item.
■ Missed calls - List of missed calls
■ Received calls - list of received calls
■ Calls dialled - dialled calls
■ Delete lists - Delete call registers
Voice mailbox
In the Voice mailbox menu item, you can set or save the number of the voice
mailbox and then dial the number. The required digits must be selected one
after the other using the adjustment wheel, and then confirmed by pressing
the adjustment wheel. You can select digits 0-9, symbols +, , # and the Delete, Call, Save and Back functions.
SMS1)
A list of received text messages is displayed in the SMS menu item. After calling a message, the following functions appear.
■ Show - Display text message
■ Read - The system reads out the selected text message through the vehicle's speakers
■ Send time - Display message send time
■ Callback - Dial the phone number of the sender of the text message
■ Copy - Copy the received text message to the SIM card
■ Delete - Delete the message
1)
Only applies when connecting the telephone to the hands-free system via the rSAP profile.
126 Using the system
Bluetooth
The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item.
■ User - Overview of the stored telephones
■ Connect - Connection with the telephone
■ Disconnect - Disconnection of telephone
■ Rename - Rename the telephone
■ Delete - Delete the telephone
■ New user - Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range
■ Visibility - Switches on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devices
■ Media player - Media player
■ Active device - Connected device
■ Paired devices - List of paired devices
■ Connect - Connection with the device
■ Rename - Rename the device
■ Delete - Delete the device
■ Authorisation - Authorise the device
■ Search - Search for available media players
■ Visibility - Switch on the visibility of the hands-free system for media players in the vicinity
■ Modem - overview of the active and paired devices for the connection to the
internet
■ Active device - Connected device
■ Paired devices - List of paired devices
■ Phone name - option to change the name of the phone (default SKODA_BT)
WLAN
Wi-Fi menu item » page 128, Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display.
Settings
The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item.
■ Telephone book - Phone book
■ Update - Read in the phone book
■ Select memory - Select memory with phone contacts
■ SIM & phone - Download the contacts of the SIM card and the phone
■ SIM card - Download the contacts from the SIM card
■ Mobile phone - Initial setting to also import contacts from the SIM card; it
is necessary to switch to the SIM & phone menu item

List - Arrange the entries in the phone book
■ Surname - Arrange according to surname
■ First name - Arrange according to first name
■ Own number - Optionally display your own telephone number on the display
of the device of the person you are calling (this function is network-dependent)
■ Network depnd. - Network-dependent own number display
■ Yes - Allow display of your own number
■ No - Prohibit display of your own number
■ Signal settings - Signal settings
■ Ring tone - Ring tone setting
■ Volume - Signal volume settings
■ Turn vol. up - Increase volume
■ Turn vol. down - Decrease volume
■ Phone settings - Phone settings
■ Select operator - Select operator
■ Automatic - Automatic operator selection
■ Manual - Manual operator selection
■ Network mode - Network mode
■ UMTS - UMTS
■ GSM - GSM
■ Automatic - automatic
■ SIM mode - Applies to telephones with the rSAP profile that simultaneously
support the operation of two SIM cards - there is an option to choose which
SIM card to connect to the hands-free system
■ SIM mode 1 - SIM 1 is connected to the hands-free system
■ SIM mode 2 - SIM 2 is connected to the hands-free system
■ Phone mode - Toggle between rSAP and HFP mode
■ Premium - rSAP mode
■ Handsfree - HFP mode
■ Off time - Set the off time in increments of 5 min
■ Access point - Set the Internet access point
■ APN - Change the access point name
■ User name - User Name
■ Password - Password
■ Switch off ph. - Switch off the hands-free system (the mobile phone remains
paired)
■
Back
Return to the main menu in the MAXI DOT display.
Internet connection via Bluetooth®
A notebook can, for example, be connected to the Internet via the hands-free
system.
The control unit of the hands-free system supports the GPRS, EDGE and
UMTS/3G technologies.
An Internet can only be established via a telephone which is connected via the
rSAP profile.
The procedure for connecting to the Internet can vary depending on the type
and version of the operating system as well as the type of the device to be
connected. Successfully connecting to the internet requires appropriate
knowledge of the operating system for connecting the device .
Process of connection
› Connect the mobile phone with the hands-free system.
› Set the access point in the Mobile phone - Settings - Access point menu (depending on the operator, usually “Internet”).
› Switch on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devices in the Mobile phone - Bluetooth - Visibility menu.
› Use the device that is to be connected to search for available Bluetooth® devices.
› Select the hands-free system (as standard “SKODA_BT”) from the list of
found devices.
› Enter the password on the device being connected and follow any instructions given on this device or in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
› Enter the desired Internet address in the Internet browser. The operating
system requests the entry of the telephone number for the internet access
(depending on the operator, usually “*99#”).
WLAN

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Switching Wi-Fi network on/off
Connecting an external device to the WLAN network
Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display
128
128
128
Wi-Fi is a wireless network for connecting to the Internet.
Communication and multimedia

127
Using a mobile phone connected with the universal telephone preparation
GSM III via the rSAP profile, it is possible to establish a Wi-Fi network in the vehicle and to enable passengers with compatible devices to connect to this network.
Switching Wi-Fi network on/off
Switching on
› Connect the mobile phone with the universal telephone preparation GSM III
via the rSAP profile » page 124.
› Select the Wi-Fi menu item in the Mobile phone menu.
The display shows the message Switch on WLAN?
› On the device to be connected, search for available Wi-Fi networks (Wi-Fi) see operating instructions for the device to be connected.
› Select the appropriate Wi-Fi network connection in the menu of the networks found (e.g. Wi-Fi SK_WLAN 1234).
If menu item WPA2 is set in the Mobile phone - Wi-Fi - Settings - Encryption
menu, then the password displayed when the Wi-Fi is switched on must be entered in the device to be connected. The password can be found in the Mobile
phone - Wi-Fi - Password - Show menu.
If menu item Open is set in the Mobile phone - Wi-Fi - Settings - Encryption
menu, the connection is made automatically.
If no access point1) is assigned automatically, then this must be entered manually as per the instructions from the mobile network operator, e.g. “Internet”.
Connecting using WPS (service for easy connection)
› Switch on the Wi-Fi network » page 128, Switching Wi-Fi network on/off.
› Open the Mobile phone - Wi-Fi - WPS config. menu in the instrument cluster.
› In the device to be connected, select the connection using WPS function see operating instructions for the device to be connected.
If the Wi-Fi network is switched on, the display will show the following message, for example: WLAN SK_WLAN 1234 switched on.
If the Pushbutton menu item is selected in the instrument cluster, the Wi-Fi
connection is made automatically.
The display then shows a password for the Wi-Fi network connection. The
password can subsequently be found in the Mobile phone - Wi-Fi - Password Show menu.
If the WPS PIN menu item is selected in the instrument cluster, then a PIN
must be entered in the device to be connected and the instrument cluster.
› Select the Yes menu item.
If no data connection via WLAN is available, the display will show the message
Data connection not available. This can be caused by a weak GSM signal, for
example. Try to establish the connection again at a location with stronger signal reception.
Switching off
› Select the Wi-Fi - Off menu item in the Mobile phone menu.
The display shows the message Switch off WLAN ?
› Select the OK menu item.
The display shows the message WLAN switched off.
Connecting an external device to the WLAN network
Connecting using the Wi-Fi network search
› Switch on the Wi-Fi network » page 128, Switching Wi-Fi network on/off.
1)
The name of the access point is defined by the mobile operator.
128 Using the system
Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display
When a Wi-Fi network is switched on, the following menu items are displayed
when the Wi-Fi menu item is selected.
■ Off - Switch off the WLAN network (depending on the context)
■ Device list - Display a list of external devices
■ Active device - Display a list of active devices
■ Block - Block device connections
■ Known devices - Display a list of known devices
■ Rename - Rename the device
■ Block - Block device connections
■ Device blocked - Display a list of blocked devices
■ Unblock - Remove the connection block

Delete lists - Delete device lists
Known devices - Delete the list of known devices
Device blocked - Delete the list of blocked devices
Both lists - Delete both device lists
■ Password - Use of password to log on to the WLAN network
■ Show - Display a password to log on to the WLAN network
■ Generate - Generate a new password to log on to the WLAN network
■ WLAN name - Use of WLAN network name
■ Show - Display the WLAN network name
■ Rename - Rename the WLAN network
■ WPS config. - Wi-Fi network connection using WPS
■ Pushbutton - Automatic connection
■ WPS PIN - PIN entry for the connection
■ Data counter - Display information about the volume of data transferred
■ Action Current conn. - Display the volume of data transferred for the current connection
■ Total - Display the total volume of data transferred
■ Reset - Reset the information about the volume of data transferred
■ Settings - WLAN network settings
■ Access point - Access point settings
■ Settings - Access point management
■ APN - Change the access point name
■ User name - User Name
■ Password - Password
■ Reset - Reset access point factory settings
■ Prioritisation - Set the connection priority
■ Calls - Set the connection priority for calls
■ Data - Set the connection priority for data transfer
■ Encryption- Set the encryption
■ WPA2 - Enable WPA 2 encryption
■ Open - No encryption
■ Visibility - Set the WLAN network visibility
■ Visible - WLAN network is visible to other devices
■ Invisible - WLAN network is not visible to other devices
■ Data roaming - Set the data roaming
■ No roaming - Data roaming is not allowed
■ Allow - Data roaming is allowed
■ Always ask - Question setting for data roaming
■
■
■
■
WLAN channel - Select WLAN network channels (preferably set to channel
11)
■ Channel 1 ... Channel 11 - Display the WLAN network channels
■ Reset - Reset Wi-Fi network factory settings
■
Voice control

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
129
130
131
Dialogue
Voice commands - GSM II
Voice commands - GSM III
Dialogue
Fig. 129 Multifunction steering wheel
The voice control system (hereinafter referred to as the system) makes it possible to use voice commands for some functions of the hands-free system.
The period of time during which the system is ready to receive voice commands and to carry them out is called a dialogue. The system gives audible
feedback and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions.
Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors.
› Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses.
› Avoid a bad pronunciation.
› Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, to reduce or stop disturbing exterior noise.
› You are recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the sound of

your voice is not drowned out by the increased ambient noise.
Communication and multimedia
129
› During the dialogue, limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. passengers talk-
ing at the same time.
› Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement.
The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and directed to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front
passenger can operate the equipment.
Entering a phone number
The telephone number can be entered as a continuous series of individually
spoken digits (the whole number at once) or in the form of digital blocks (separated by short pauses). After each order of digits (separation through brief
voice pause) all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system.
The digits 0 - 9, symbols +, , # are permitted. The system detects no continuous digit combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken digits (two, three).
Activating voice control - GSM II
By briefly pressing the button 1 » fig. 129 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Deactivating voice control - GSM II
If the system is currently playing a message, you will need to end the message
currently being played by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multi-function
steering wheel.
If the system expects a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself:
› with the CANCEL voice command;
› by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel.
Activating voice control - GSM III
The dialogue can be started at any time by pressing the button 1 » fig. 129 on
the multifunction steering wheel1).
Deactivating voice control - GSM III
If the system is currently playing a message, the message that is currently being played must be terminated by pressing the button 1 » fig. 129 on the multi-function steering wheel.
If the system expects a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself:
› with the CANCEL voice command;
› by briefly pressing the button 1 » fig. 129 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Notice
The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted.
The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multi-function
steering wheel with telephone control.
■ On vehicles that are factory-fitted with the Columbus navigation system, it is
only possible to operate the voice control for the telephone via this device » Operating instructions for the Columbus navigation system, chapter Voice control for the navigation system.
■
■
Voice commands - GSM II
Basic voice commands
Voice command
HELP
CALL XYZ
PHONE BOOK
CALL HISTORY
DIAL NUMBER
REDIAL
MUSICa)
FURTHER OPTIONS
1)
Not valid for vehicles with the Columbus navigation system.
130 Using the system
Action
After this command, the system repeats all possible commands.
This command calls up the contact from the phone
book.
After this command, for example, the phone book
can be repeated back to you, a voice entry for the
contact can be updated or deleted, etc.
Lists of dialled numbers, missed calls, etc.
After this command, a telephone number can be
entered in order to establish a connection with the
requested party.
After this command the system calls the last dialled number.
Play music from the mobile phone or another
paired device.
After this command the system offers additional
context-dependent commands.

Voice command
SETTINGS
CANCEL
a)
Action
Selection for setting Bluetooth®, dialogue etc.
The dialogue is ended.
On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the navigation system menu; refer to the » operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system.
If a voice command is not detected, the system answers with “Sorry?”, and a
new entry can be made. After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid. After
the 3rd error, the answer “Cancelled” is given and the dialogue is ended.
Storing voice recording for a contact
If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you
can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book Voice tag - Record menu item.
Your own voice tag can also be saved using the voice control in the Further
options menu.
Voice commands - GSM III
Basic voice commands
Voice command
HELP
CALL NAME
DIAL NUMBER
REDIAL
READ ADDRESSBOOK
READ MESSAGES
SHORT DIALOGUE
LONG DIALOGUE
CANCEL
Action
After this command, the system repeats all possible commands.
After this command, a name can be entered to establish a connection with the requested party.
After this command, a telephone number can be
entered in order to establish a connection with the
requested party.
The last selected telephone number is selected.
The system reads out contacts from the telephone
book.
The system reads the messages which were received while the telephone was connected to the
control unit.
The help is significantly reduced (good operating
knowledge provided).
The help is not reduced (suitable for beginners).
The dialogue is ended.
If the system does not recognise the command, it repeats the first part of the
help thus enabling a new entry to be completed. After the 2nd error the system repeats the second part of the aid. After the 3rd error, the answer “Cancelled” is given and the dialogue is ended.
Storing voice recording for a contact
If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you
can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book Voice tag - Record menu item.
Your own voice tag can also be saved using the voice control in the Further
options menu.
Multimedia

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Music playback via Bluetooth®
Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering
wheel
AUX- and MDI-inputs
CD change
DVD-preinstallation
131
132
133
133
134
Music playback via Bluetooth®
The universal telephone preinstallation makes it possible to play back music
via Bluetooth® from devices such as MP3 players, mobile phones or notebooks.
To ensure that music can be played via Bluetooth®, you must first pair the device with the hands-free system in the Phone - Bluetooth - Media player
menu.
The music playback process is performed on the connected device.
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ensures that the music played
back via the hands-free system can be controlled with the remote control » page 130, Voice commands - GSM II.
Notice
The device being connected must support the Bluetooth® A2DP profile; refer
to the operating instructions for the relevant device being connected.
Communication and multimedia
131
Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel
The multifunction steering wheel comprises buttons for setting the basic functions for the factory-fitted radio and navigation system » fig. 130.
The radio and navigation system can of course still be operated on the devices.
A description is included in the relevant operating instructions.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel are illuminated.
The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio, audio, video or navigation system.
The following functions can be completed by pressing or turning the buttons.
Fig. 130 Multifunction steering wheel: control buttons
Button /
wheel
» fig. 13
0
Action
1
Press
2
Press
2
2
Turn upwards
Turn downwards
3
Press briefly
3
Press and hold
button
4
Press briefly
4
Press and hold
button
132
Using the system
Radio
TV
Audio sources
DVD video
Navigation
Change audio source
Interrupt current
navigation announcement
Switch tone off/on (MUTE )
Skip to next channel
No function
Switch to previous channel
No function
Increase the volume
Decrease the volume
Skip to next chanSkip to next track
nel
Stop traffic announcement
Skip to next chapter
Fast forward
Switch to previous Switch to start of
channel
tracka)
Stop traffic announcement
Switch to previous
chapter
Fast rewind
No function
No function
No function
No function

Button /
wheel
» fig. 13
0
Action
Radio
TV
Audio sources
DVD video
5
Turn upwards
Switch to previous channel and display
List of stored/accessible channels
Skip to next channel
Skip to next track
Skip to next chapter
5
Turn downwards
Switch to the next channel and display
List of stored/accessible channels
Switch to previous
channel
Switch to start of
tracka)
6
Press briefly
a)
Navigation
Show the option
to stop navigation
or display the list
Switch to previous of recent destinachapter
tions
Call up the main menu
To go to the previous track, press the adjustment wheel twice or rotate it by two positions.
The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located in the right side
compartment of the boot.
AUX- and MDI-inputs
The AUX andMDI inputs are used to connect external audio sources (e.g. iPod
or mp3 player) and to play back music from these devices via the factory-fitted
radio or navigation system.
The AUX input is located below the front armrest and is marked with the
symvbol 1) .
The MDI input is located in the storage compartment below the front armrest.
For a description of use, refer to the operating instructions for the relevant radio or navigation system.
CD change
Fig. 131
The CD changer
Inserting the CD
› Touch the button C » fig. 131 and guide the CD (compact disc) into the CDcase B . The CD is automatically loaded onto the lowest free position in the
CD changer. The indicator light in the corresponding button D stops flashing.
Filling the CD changer with CDs
› Press and hold the button C » fig. 131 for longer than 2 seconds and guide
the CDs one after the other (maximum 6 CDs) into the CD case B . The indicator lights in the buttons D stop flashing.
Inserting a CD at a specific position
› Press the button C » fig. 131. The indicator lights in the buttons D illuminate the memory spaces that are already assigned and flash in the case of
free memory spaces.
› Touch the desired button D and guide the CD into the CD-case B .
Ejecting a CD
› Press the button A » fig. 131 to eject a CD. For assigned memory spaces, the
indicator lights now illuminate in the buttons D .
› Press the corresponding button D . The CD is ejected.
1)
For vehicles with the navigation system Amundsen + the AUX AUX input located on the front panel of
the navigation device » manual of the navigation system Amundsen+.
Communication and multimedia
133

Ejecting all CDs
› Press and hold the button A » fig. 131 for more than 2 seconds. All CDs in the
CD-changer are ejected consecutively.
Notice
Insert a CD, with the labelled side facing up, into the CD slot B » fig. 131 until
it is automatically drawn in. The play function will start automatically.
■ After loading a CD into the CD changer, wait until the indicator light of the
corresponding button D is illuminated. Then the CD case B is free to load the
next CD.
■ If a position is selected, on which a CD is already located, this CD is ejected.
Remove the ejected CD and load the desired CD.
■
DVD-preinstallation
Fig. 132 Seat backrest - left front seat/right front seat
Explanation of graphic
A Openings for attachment of DVD player holder
B Audio/video input
C Connection input, DVD player
Only one DVD pre-installation is factory-installed in the seat backrest of the
front seat.
The DVD player holder and DVD player can be purchased from ŠKODA original
accessories. For a description of the use, refer to the operating instructions for
these devices and equipment.
134 Using the system
WARNING
If there are passengers on both of the rear seats, the DVD player holder
must not be used on its own (without the DVD player) - risk of injury!
■ The inclination of the holder can be adjusted to three preset positions. Be
careful not to injure fingers between the holder and the backrest when
changes to the position of the DVD player holder are made.
■ The DVD player holder must not be used when the rear seat backrest or
the rear seat is folded forward or has been removed completely.
■
Notice
Follow the instructions given in the operating instructions of the DVD player
holder/DVD player.
WARNING
Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust gases from the engine contain substances such as odourless and colourless carbon monoxide (a poisonous gas) – risk to life!
■ Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death.
■ Do not leave any items (e.g. cloths or tools) in the engine compartment.
There is a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage.
■ Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a
cover) – risk of fire!
Driving
■
Starting-off and Driving
Starting and stopping the engine using the key

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Electronic immobilizer
Ignition Switch
Starting the engine
Stopping the engine
136
136
136
137
Starting and stopping the engine on vehicles with the KESSY system » page 137.
The engine can only be started using a correctly coded original key.
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
starting the cold engine. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
WARNING
When driving without the engine running, the ignition key must always
be in the position 2 » fig. 133 on page 136 (ignition switched on). This position is confirmed by the appearance of certain indicator lamps in the instrument cluster.
■ If the key is not in position 2, it could unexpectedly lock the steering danger of accident!
■ Only pull the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has
come to a complete stop (by applying the handbrake). Otherwise, the steering could be blocked – risk of accident!
■ Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthorized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the
ignition or start the engine - there is the danger of injury and accidents occurring!
■ Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is, for
example, accident, damage or theft risk!
■ Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of accident!
■
CAUTION
The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the
vehicle is at a standstill. The starter or engine may be damaged if the starter is
activated when the engine is running 3 » fig. 133 on page 136.
■ Do not tow start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the
catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jumpstart aid » page 207, Jump-starting.
■
CAUTION
Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads before the
engine has reached its operating temperature – risk of damaging the engine!
■ Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to
run at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off.
■
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are
lower.
Notice
After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may intermittently continue to
operate for approx. 10 minutes.
Starting-off and Driving
135
Electronic immobilizer

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 135.
An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deactivated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock.
The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is
withdrawn from the lock.
The engine will not start if a non-authorized ignition key is used.
The following message is shown in the information cluster display.


and
auf Seite 135.
Petrol engines » fig. 133
1 Ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be locked
2 Ignition switched on
3 Starting engine
Diesel engines » fig. 133
1
2
3
Fuel supply interrupted, ignition switched off, engine switched off, the
steering can be locked.
Heating glow plugs on, ignition switched on
Starting engine
To lock the steering, with the ignition key withdrawn, turn the steering wheel
until the steering locking pin engages audibly.
136 Driving
Starting the engine

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 135.
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
Fig. 133
Positions of the vehicle key in
the ignition lock
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Notice
We recommend locking the steering wheel whenever leaving the vehicle. This
acts as a deterrent against the attempted theft of your car.
Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system. The glow
plug warning light  illuminates after the ignition has been switched on. Start
the engine after the warning light  has gone out.
Immobilizer active.
IMMOBILISER
Ignition Switch

If the steering is locked and it is impossible or difficult to turn the key into position 2 » fig. 133, move the steering wheel back and forth to unlock the
steering.
Procedure for starting the engine
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position
P or N.
› Switch on the ignition 2 » fig. 133 on page 136.
› Depress and hold the clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual gearbox) or brake
pedal (vehicles with an automatic gearbox) until the engine starts.
› Turn the key into position 3 to the stop and release immediately after the
engine has been started – do not apply the accelerator.
After letting go, the vehicle key will return to position 2 .
If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position 1 . Repeat the start-up process after approx. half a minute.
Vehicles with manual transmission
The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed.
The following message is shown in the information cluster display.


Depress clutch to start.
CLUTCH

Vehicles with automatic transmission1)
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Exit System, hereinafter referred to only as
system) allows the switching on or switching off of the ignition and starting or
stopping of the engine without the active use of the key.
The engine will not start if the brake pedal is not depressed.
The following message is shown in the information cluster display.
A key must be in the vehicle to unlock the steering, switch on the ignition and
start the vehicle. When travelling the key must be in the vehicle.
Apply the brake to start.
BRAKE


CAUTION
■ If the engine does not start up after a second attempt, one of the following
fuses may be defective.
■ Petrol engine - fuse for the electric fuel pump.
■ Diesel engine - fuse for the control unit for glow plugs or glow plug relay
and fuel pump.
■ Check the fuse and replace if necessary » page 216, or seek assistance from
a specialist garage.
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
starting the cold engine. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
WARNING
Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthorized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the
ignition or start the engine - there is the danger of injury and accidents occurring!
■ Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is an
accident, the risk of theft and the like.!
■ Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of accident!
■
Stopping the engine

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 135.
WARNING
Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust gases from the engine contain substances such as odourless and colourless carbon monoxide (a poisonous gas) – risk to life!
■ Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death.
Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key into position 1 » fig. 133 on
page 136.
■
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed
if the selector lever is in position P.
Starting and stopping the engine - KESSY

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Steering lock / unlock
Switching ignition on/off
Starting the engine
Switching off the engine
Emergency start-up of the engine
Emergency ignition shutoff system
1)
CAUTION
The system can recognize the valid key, even if it has been forgotten, for example, in the front of the vehicle roof D » fig. 32 on page 50 - There is danger
of loss or damage to the key! It is therefore not always necessary to know
where the key is.
■ The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the
vehicle is at a standstill. The starter or engine may be damaged if the starter is
activated when the engine is running.
■ Do not tow start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the
catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jumpstart aid » page 207, Jump-starting.
■
138
138
139
139
139
140
Applies to vehicles using the START-STOPP system.
Starting-off and Driving
137

CAUTION
Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads before the
engine has reached its operating temperature – risk of damaging the engine!
■ Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to
run at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off.
■
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are
lower.
Notice
The system is protected against inadvertently switching off the engine while
driving, this means that the engine can only be switched off in an emergency » page 140.
■ After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may intermittently continue
to operate for approx. 10 minutes.
■ Under certain circumstances (e.g. after switching off the ignition and opening
the driver's door), the steering is enabled only when the ignition is switched on
or the engine is started.
■
› Switch off the engine or the ignition by pressing the starter button » fig. 134.
› Open the driver door.
The steering is locked automatically.
If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off afterwards, the
steering is only locked after the vehicle is locked.
Unlocking
› Open the driver's door and get into the vehicle.
› Close the driver's door.
The steering is unlocked within 2 seconds.
If the system does not unlock the steering at the first time (for example when
the front wheels are in contact with an obstacle), then two more unlocking attempts are performed automatically.
If the steering is still not unlocked, then the following message is displayed on
the display of the instrument cluster.


Move the steering wheel!
MOVE STEERING WHEEL
Slightly move the steering wheel and the system will make up to 3 more attempts to unlock after 2 seconds. At the same time, the indicator light  flashes.
If the steering is still not unlocked, to try to eliminate the possible cause and
then repeat the unlocking attempt.
Steering lock / unlock
Fig. 134
Starter button
Switching ignition on/off

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 137.
› Press the starter button » fig. 134 on page 138 briefly.
The ignition is switched on or off.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 137.
The steering lock (steering lock) deters attempted theft of your vehicle.
Locking
› Stop the vehicle.
138 Driving
On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox, the clutch pedal must not be depressed after switching off the ignition, otherwise the system would try to
start.
On vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, the clutch pedal must not be
depressed after switching off the ignition, otherwise the system would try to
start.

If the driver's door is opened while the igition is on, an audible signal sounds
and the following message appears in the instrument cluster display.
Ignition on!
IGNITION ON


When leaving the vehicle always switch off the ignition.
Notice
The ignition is switched on when indicated by the lighting up of certain indicator lamps in the instrument cluster.
Switching off the engine

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
› Stop the vehicle.
› Press the starter button » fig. 134 on page 138 briefly.
The engine and the ignition are switched off simultaneously.
The ignition can be switched off up to a speed of 2 km/h.
Emergency start-up of the engine
Starting the engine

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 137.
Fig. 135
Emergency start-up of engine
auf Seite 137.
Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system. The glow
plug warning light  illuminates after the ignition has been switched on. Start
the engine after the warning light  has gone out.
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
Procedure for starting the engine
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position
P or N.
› Depress and hold the clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual gearbox) or brake
pedal (vehicles with an automatic gearbox) until the engine starts.
› Press and hold 1)the starter button » fig. 134 on page 138 until the engine
starts.
CAUTION
■ If the engine does not start up after a second attempt, one of the following
fuses may be defective.
■ Petrol engine - fuse for the electric fuel pump.
■ Diesel engine - fuse for the control unit for glow plugs or glow plug relay
and fuel pump.
■ Check the fuse and replace if necessary » page 216, or seek assistance from
a specialist garage.
1)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 137.
If the authorisation check for the key fails, the following message appears in
the instrument cluster display.
 Key not found.
 NO KEY
The emergency start-up must be completed.
› Press the starter button directly with the key » fig. 135.
or
› Press the starter button and then hold the key to the starter button.
Notice
During an emergency start-up of the engine, the key bit must face the starter
button » fig. 135.
On vehicles with the START-STOP system, it is sufficient to press the starter button briefly. The motor
will then automatically start.
Starting-off and Driving
139
Emergency ignition shutoff system

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
Information on braking

auf Seite 137.
The ignition can be turned off in an emergency even when travelling at a
speed of more than 2 km / hr.
twice within 1 second.
Brakes
Before travelling a long distance with a steep gradient, reduce speed and shift
into the next lowest gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will be
used, reducing the load on the brakes. Any additional braking should be completed intermittently, not continuously.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
140
141
WARNING
Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switched off – risk of accident!
■ The clutch pedal must be actuated when braking on a vehicle with manual transmission, when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs. Otherwise,
the function of the brake booster may be impaired – risk of accident!
■ When leaving the vehicle never leave persons who might, for example, release the handbrake and remove the gear, unattended in the vehicle. The
vehicle could then start to move – risk of accident!
■
WARNING
In the case of damage to the standard fitted front spoiler or if retrofitting
another front spoiler, hub caps etc.» page 169, Services, modifications,
and technical alterations, make sure that the air supply to the front brakes
is not affected. The front brakes may overheat, which can have a negative
impact on the functioning of the braking system – risk of accident!
CAUTION
Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads » page 145.
Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not
necessary. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer
braking distance and excessive wear.
■
■
140 Driving
auf Seite 140.
After the speed was reduced below around 10 km/h or the vehicle was stopped, the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system
switches on. The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically after accelerating or driving off again.
After emergency stop of the ignition, the steering is unlocked.
Information on braking
Handbrake
and
If the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system considers the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic, the brake light
flashes automatically.
› Press the starter button » fig. 134 on page 138 for longer than 1 second or

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Wear-and-tear
The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driving style.
The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns
and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted.
Under these severe conditions, the thickness of the brake pads must also be
checked by a specialist garage between service intervals.
Wet roads or road salt
The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake
pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter.
The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times.
Corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has
been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking
system. The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times.
Faults in the brake surface
If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that
the brake pedal can be depressed further, the brake system may be faulty.
Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriately, as you will not know the exact extent of the damage.

Low brake fluid level
An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system.
The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically » page 33,  Brake system.
Brake booster
The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The
brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
Handbrake
Fig. 136
Handbrake
WARNING
Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake which
is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating. This can
have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system – risk of accident!
CAUTION
After the vehicle has come to a standstill, always tighten the handbrake first
and then engage first gear (vehicles with manual gearbox) or move the selector lever to the P position (vehicles with automatic transmission).
Manual gear changing and pedals

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Manual gear changing
Pedals

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 140.
Apply
› Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards.
Release
› Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the lock
141
142
Manual gear changing
Fig. 137
Gearshift pattern of 5 gear or
6 gear manual gearbox
button » fig. 136.
› Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button.
The handbrake indicator light  lights up when the handbrake is applied, provided the ignition is on.
A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the
handbrake applied.
The following instruction is shown in the MAXI DOT display.

Release parking brake!
The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more
than around 5 km/h for more than 3 seconds.
Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear
on the clutch.
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 40.
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary. Depress the clutch
pedal and hold it fully depressed. Wait a moment before reverse gear is engaged to avoid any shift noises.
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the
ignition is on.
Starting-off and Driving
141

WARNING
Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident!
CAUTION
If the selector lever is moved to mode N while driving, the accelerator pedal
must be released and you will need to wait until the engine has reached its
idling speed before moving the selector lever to a forward driving mode again.
■ At temperatures below -10 °C, the engine can only be started in the selector
lever position P.
■ When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator
pedal – this may lead to gear damage.
■
CAUTION
If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gearshift
lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mechanism to wear excessively.
Pedals
The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances!
In the driver's footwell, only a footmat, which is attached to the two corresponding attachment points, may be used.
Notice
After the ignition is switched off, the ignition key can only be withdrawn if the
selector lever is in the position P.
Modes and use of selector lever
Only use factory-supplied footmats or footmats from the range of ŠKODAOriginal Accessories, which are fitted to two attachment points.
WARNING
No objects may be placed in the driver's footwell – risk due to obstruction
or limitation of pedal operation.
Automatic transmission

Introduction
Fig. 138 Selector lever / display
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Modes and use of selector lever
Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic)
Starting-off and driving
Malfunction
142
143
144
144
WARNING
Do not depress the accelerator if changing the forward driving mode –
risk of accident!
■ Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving – risk of accident!
■ When the vehicle is stationery and the engine is running, the vehicle must
be held in mode D, S or R with the brake pedal. Even when the engine is
idling, the power transmission is never completely interrupted – the vehicle
creeps.
Fig. 139
Shiftlock button
■
142 Driving

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 142.
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected

gear are indicated in the display » fig. 138.
The following modes can be selected with the selector lever » fig. 138.
Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic)
P – Parking mode
The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this mode.
The parking mode must only be selected when the vehicle is stationary.
R - Reverse gear
Reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idling speed.
Before moving into mode R from mode P or N, depress the brake pedal while
simultaneously pressing the lock button » fig. 139.
N - Neutral
The power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted in this mode.
D - Mode for forwards travel (normal programme)
In mode D, the forward gears are automatically changed according to the engine load, accelerator pedal actuation and driving speed.
S - Mode for forwards travel (sports programme)
In mode S, the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at higher
engine speeds than in mode D.
Fig. 140 Selector lever / multi-function steering wheel

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 142.
Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lever or multifunction steering wheel. This mode can be selected both while stopping and while driving.
The currently selected gear is indicated in the display » fig. 138 on page 142.
Before changing to mode S from mode D, press the locking button » fig. 139.
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 40.
Releasing selector lever from mode P or N (selector lever lock)
The selector lever is locked in modes P and N to prevent the forwards travel
mode from being selected accidentally and setting the vehicle in motion. The
warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster » page 39.
Switching to manual shifting
› Push the gear selector from position D towards the right, or left in a righthand drive vehicle.
The selector lever is released by depressing the brake pedal while simultaneously pressing the lock button » fig. 139.
The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving via position N (e.g. from R
to D). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck, e.g. in a bank
of snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in position N for
more than approx. 2 seconds without the brake pedal being depressed.
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds
up to 5 km/h.
Notice
If you want to move the selector lever from mode P to mode D or vice versa,
move the selector lever quickly. This prevents modes R or N from being accidentally selected.
Shifting up gears
› Push the selector lever forwards + » fig. 140.
› Pull the right-hand paddle + » fig. 140 briefly towards the steering wheel.
Shifting down gears
› Push the selector lever backwards - » fig. 140 .
› Pull the left-hand paddle - » fig. 140 briefly towards the steering wheel.
Temporarily switch to manual gear changing in mode D or S
› Pull one of the - / + paddles » fig. 140 briefly towards the steering wheel .
If one of the rocker switches - / + is not pulled for more than 1 minute, manual
gear changing is deactivated. The temporary switch to manual gear changing
can also be deactivated by pulling the right-hand rocker switch + towards the
steering wheel for more than 1 second.
Starting-off and Driving
143

When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear
just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached.
If a lower gear is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no
risk of the engine overrevving.
Notice
It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual
shifting of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and
hence the wear of the brakes » page 140.
Starting-off and driving

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 142.
Starting off
› Start the engine.
› Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal.
› Press and hold the lock button in arrow direction » fig. 139 on page 142.
› Move the selector lever into the desired position » page 142 and then release
the lock button.
› Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
Stop
› Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
› Keep holding the brake pedal until driving is resumed.
The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a
short time, such as at a cross roads.
Parking
› Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› Press and hold the lock button in arrow direction » fig. 139 on page 142.
› Move the selector lever into the position P and then release the locking button.
Launch control1)
The Launch control function allows the vehicle to reach maximum acceleration
when starting off in mode S or Tiptronic.
› Activate the ASR » page 151, Brake assist systems.
1)
This function is only valid for some engines.
144 Driving
› START STOP deactivate » page 161.
› Fully depress and hold the brake pedal with your left foot.
› Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot.
› Release the brake pedal.
The vehicle starts off with maximum acceleration.
Reactivate the ASR and START-STOP as soon as the desired speed is reached.
Kickdown
The kickdown function allows you to achieve the maximum acceleration of
your vehicle while driving.
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the kickdown function is activated in any forward driving mode.
The gearbox shifts down one or more gears depending on the vehicle speed
and engine speed, and the vehicle accelerates.
The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has
reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range.
WARNING
Rapid acceleration, particularly on slippery roads, can lead to loss of control
of the vehicle – risk of accident!
Malfunction

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 142.
Emergency programme
The transmission switches to the emergency programme, if there is a fault in
system of the automatic gearbox.
Indications of an activated emergency programme include the following:
› Only certain gears are selected.
› The reverse gear R cannot be used.
› Shifting gears in Tiptronic mode is not possible.
Gearbox overheating
The gearbox may, for example, become too hot due to frequent repeated
starting or stop-and-go traffic. Overheating is indicated by the warning
light » page 31,  Clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG are too hot.

Defective selector lever lock
If the selector lever lock is defective or its power supply is interrupted (e.g. discharged vehicle battery, faulty fuse), the selector lever can no longer be moved
out of position P in the normal manner, and the vehicle can no longer be driven. The selector lever must be unlocked specially » page 213.
Notice
If the gearbox has switched to the emergency programme, visit a specialist garage.
Running in

On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox, at the very latest shift up into the
next gear when the red area is reached. Observe the recommended
gear » page 40, Gear recommendation. Very high engine speeds when accelerating (accelerator) are automatically restricted » .
In vehicles with manual transmission, do not drive at unnecessarily low engine
speeds. Shift down a gear when the engine is no longer running smoothly. Observe the recommended gear » page 40, Gear recommendation.
CAUTION
The engine is not protected from excessive engine revs caused by shifting
down at the wrong time. This can result in a sudden increase in revs beyond
the permissible maximum rpm, thereby causing engine damage.
■ Never rev up a cold engine when the vehicle is stationary or when driving in
individual gears.
■
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
New engine
New tyres
New brake pads
Never drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds even after the running-in period.
145
145
145
New engine
The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres.
Up to 1 000 kilometres
› Do not drive faster than 3/4 of the maximum speed of the gear in use, i.e. 3/4
of the maximum permissible engine speed.
› No full throttle.
› Avoid high engine speeds.
› Do not tow a trailer.
From 1 000 up to 1 500 kilometres
Gradually increase the power output of the engine up to the full speed of the
gear engaged, i.e. up to the maximum permissible engine speed.
The red scale of the rev counter indicates the range in which the system begins to limit the engine speed.
During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than
later until all of the moving parts have harmonized. The driving style which you
adopt during the first approx.1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of running in your car.
For the sake of the environment
Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds. Shifting up sooner helps
save fuel, reduces engine noise and protects the environment.
New tyres
New tyres must firstly be “run in”, as they do not offer optimal grip at first.
Therefore, drive especially carefully for the first 500 km or so.
New brake pads
New brake pads do not initially provide optimal braking performance. They first
need to be “run in”. Therefore, drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or
so.
Economical driving and environmental sustainability

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
146
146
147 
Looking ahead
Economical gear changing
Avoiding full throttle
Starting-off and Driving
145
Reducing idling
Avoiding short distances
Checking tyre inflation pressure
Avoiding unnecessary ballast
Regular maintenance
Saving electrical energy
Environmental compatibility
147
147
147
147
148
148
148
If possible, let your vehicle coast to a stop, or use the engine brake, if you can
see that the next set of traffic lights is on red, for example.
Economical gear changing
Fig. 141
Principle sketch: Fuel consumption in litres/100 km depending
on the selected gear
The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the
vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works. ŠKODA places a
particular emphasis on minimising negative effects on the environment.
It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to
make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness.
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and the wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depend essentially on the following three factors:
› your personal driving style
› operating conditions
› technical requirements
The fuel economy by can be improved by 10 -15 % by always looking ahead and
driving in an economical way.
Fuel consumption is also be influenced by external factors which are beyond
the driver's control. Consumption increases during the winter or under difficult
conditions, on poor roads, etc.
Fuel consumption can vary considerably from the manufacturer's data, as a result of outside temperatures, the weather and driving style.
The optimal engine speed should be obtained when accelerating, in order to
avoid a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle.
CAUTION
All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at
its normal operating temperature.
Looking ahead

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 146.
A vehicle's highest fuel consumption occurs when accelerating, therefore unnecessary accelerating and braking should be avoided. If looking ahead when
driving, less braking and consequently less accelerating are required.
146 Driving

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 146.
Shifting up early saves on fuel.
Manual gearbox
› Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear.
› Shift up into the next gear at approx. 2000 rpm.
An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early. Observe
the recommended gear » page 40, Gear recommendation.
Sensible gear selection can have an effect on fuel consumption » fig. 141.
Automatic gearbox
› Slowly apply the accelerator pedal. However, do not depress ias far as the
kickdown position » page 144.
› An economic driving programme is automatically selected if the accelerator
pedal is only depressed slowly.
Avoiding short distances
Avoiding full throttle
Fig. 143
Principle sketch: Fuel consumption in l/100 km at different temperatures
Fig. 142
Principle sketch: Fuel consumption in litres/100 km. and speed
in km/h.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 146.
Driving more slowly saves fuel.
Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consumption but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of
your vehicle.
The maximum speed of your vehicle should, as far possible, never be used.
Fuel consumption, pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportionally at high speeds.
The » fig. 142 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to speed. Fuel consumption
will be halved if you drive at only three-quarters of the possible top speed of
your vehicle.
Reducing idling

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst

Idling also costs fuel.
In vehicles not equipped with the START-STOP system, turn off the engine
when in a traffic jam, at a level crossing or traffic lights with longer wait times.
Even after just 30 - 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you start the engine up again.
If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating temperature. Wear-and-tear and pollutant emissions, though, are particularly high in the warming-up phase. Therefore, start driving as soon as the engine has started, In this case high engine speeds should be avoided.
auf Seite 146.
Short distances result in an above-average high fuel consumption. We therefore recommend avoiding distances of less than 4 km if the engine is cold.
A cold engine consumes the most fuel immediately after the start. Fuel consumption drops to 10 litres/100 km after just 1 kilometre. The consumption stabilises once the engine and catalytic converter have reached their operating
temperature.
An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature. The
image » fig. 143 shows the different levels of fuel consumption after driving a
certain distance at a temperature of +20 °C and at a temperature of -10 °C.
Checking tyre inflation pressure

auf Seite 146.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 146.
Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel.
Always ensure the tyre inflation pressure is correct. If the inflation pressure is
too low, the tyres will have to overcome a higher rolling resistance. This will
not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will worsen.
Always check the tyre inflation pressure when the tyres are cold.
Avoiding unnecessary ballast

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 146.
Transporting ballast costs fuel.

Starting-off and Driving
147
Each kilogramme of weight increases the fuel consumption. Therefore, we recommend to carry no unnecessary weight.
It is particularly in town traffic, when one is accelerating quite often, that the
vehicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption. A rule
of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel consumption of about 1 litre/100 kilometres.
At a speed of 100-120 km/h, a vehicle fitted with a roof rack cross member
without a load will use about 10 % more fuel than normal due to the increased
aerodynamic drag.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 146.
A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel.
By having your vehicle regularly maintained by a specialist garage, you create
the conditions needed for economical driving. The maintenance state of your
vehicle has a positive effect on traffic safety and value retention
A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 % higher
than normal.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, e.g. when filling up. Oil consumption is
dependent to a considerable extent on the load and speed of the engine. Oil
consumption could be as high as 0.5 litres/1 000 km depending on your style
of driving.
It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first, and
reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time. The oil consumption of a new vehicle can therefore only be correctly assessed after driving
about 5 000 km.
For the sake of the environment
Additional improvements to the fuel economy can be made by using synthetic high-lubricity oils.
■ Regularly check the ground under the vehicle. Have your vehicle inspected by
a specialist garage if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the
ground.
■
Notice
We recommend that your vehicle be serviced on a regular basis by a ŠKODA
service partner.
148 Driving
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 146.
When the engine is running, the alternator generates and supplies electrical
power. If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on,
more fuel is needed to operate the alternator. We therefore recommend
switching off electrical components if these are no longer required.
Environmental compatibility

Regular maintenance

Saving electrical energy

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 146.
Environmental protection has played a major role in the design, material selection and production of your new ŠKODA. Particular emphasis has been placed
on the following points.
Design measures
› Joints designed to be easily detached.
› Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system.
› Improved purity of different classes of materials.
› Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation
260.
› Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO2.
› Minimum fuel leakage during accidents.
› Reduced noise.
Choice of materials
› Extensive use of recyclable material.
› Air conditioning filled with CFC-free refrigerant.
› No cadmium.
› No asbestos.
› Reduction in the “vaporisation” of plastics.
Manufacture
› Solvent-free cavity protection.
› Solvent-free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production
plant to the customer.
› The use of solvent-free adhesives.
› No CFCs used in the production process.
› Without use of mercury.
› Use of water-soluble paints.

Trade-in and recycling of old cars
ŠKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to
protecting the environment and the preserving resources. All new ŠKODA vehicles can be utilized up to 95 % and always 1) be returned.
Driving through water on streets
Fig. 144
Driving through water
In a lot of countries sufficient trade-in networks have been created, where you
can trade-in your vehicle. After you trade-in your vehicle, you will receive a
confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regulations.
Notice
You can find more detailed information about the trade-in and recycling of old
cars from a specialist garage.
Avoiding damage to your vehicle

› Determine the depth of the water before driving through.
Introduction
The water level must not reach above the bar on the lower beam » fig. 144.
› Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
General information
Driving through water on streets
General information
The following instructions must be observed if vehicle damage is to be avoided
when driving through water (e.g. flooded roads).
149
149
At a higher speed, a water wave can form in front of the vehicle, which can
cause water to penetrate into the engine's air induction system or other parts
of the vehicle.
› Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off.
WARNING
Driving through water, mud, sludge etc. can impair the braking power and
increase the braking distance – risk of accident!
■ Avoid abrupt and sudden braking immediately after water crossings.
■ After driving through bodies of water, the brakes must be cleaned and
dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking. Only apply the brakes for
the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions
permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy.
Pay attention to low-slung parts of the vehicle, such as the spoiler and exhaust, particularly in the following situations.
› When driving on poorly maintained roads and paths.
› When driving over kerbs.
› When driving on steep ramps etc.
■
Particular attention must be paid with vehicles with sport suspension and
when the vehicle is fully laden.
CAUTION
When driving through water, some parts of the vehicle such as the engine,
gearbox, chassis or electrics can be severely damaged.
■ Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible water level for your vehicle.
■
1)
Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements.
Starting-off and Driving
149

Potholes, mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or
impossible to drive through the body of water.
■ Do not drive through salt water. The salt can lead to corrosion. Any vehicle
parts that have come into contact with salt water must be rinsed immediately
with fresh water.
■
Notice
After driving through water, we recommend having the vehicle checked by a
specialist garage.
Driving abroad

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Unleaded petrol
Headlights
150
150
In certain countries, it may be possible that the ŠKODA Partner network is limited or has not been established. This is the reason why procuring certain spare
parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garages may only be able
to make limited repairs.
Unleaded petrol
A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded
petrol » page 180, Unleaded petrol. Information regarding the locations of filling stations that offer unleaded petrol is, for example, provided by the automobile associations.
Headlights
The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically. It illuminates the side
of the road on which the vehicle is being driven to a greater extent.
When driving in countries in which the traffic drives on the other side of the
road than in your home country, the asymmetrical low beam may dazzle oncoming drivers. In order to avoid this, the headlights must be adjusted at a
specialist garage.
Headlights with Xenon lights can be adjusted in the menu of the MAXI DOT
display » page 69.
150 Driving
Notice
You can find out more information on adjusting the headlights at a specialist
garage.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Assist systems
Brake assist systems

Fig. 145
ESC system: TCS button
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Antilock Braking System (ABS)
Traction Control System (TCS)
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR)
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
Hill Hold Control (HHC)
151
152
152
152
152
152
153
WARNING
A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to
shut down. The brake assist systems would then fail to function – risk of
accident!
■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions. The increased safety provided by the brake assist
systems must not tempt you to take safety risks – risk of accident!
■ In the event of an ABS fault, visit a specialist garage immediately. Adjust
your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS, as you will not
know the exact extent of the damage or the extent to which this is limiting
the braking efficiency.
■
CAUTION
All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufacturer to ensure the brake assist systems operate correctly.
■ Changes to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, brakes, chassis) can influence the
functionality of the brake assist systems » page 169, Services, modifications,
and technical alterations.
■ If a fault occurs in the ABS system, the ESC, ASR and EDL will also not work.
An ABS fault is indicated by the warning light  » page 36.
■

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 151.
The ESC system helps improve control of the vehicle in situations where it is
being operated at its dynamic limits, such as a sudden change to the direction
of travel. Depending on the conditions of the road surface, the risk of skidding
is reduced, thereby improving the vehicle's driving stability .
The ESC system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched
on.
The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the
steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with
the actual behaviour of the vehicle. In the event of deviations, such as the car
beginning to skid, the ESC system will automatically brake the appropriate
wheel.
During an intervention of the system, the indicator light  flashes in the instrument cluster.
The following systems are integrated into the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC).
› Antilock Brake System (ABS) » page 152.
› Traction control (ASR) » page 152.
› Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) » page 152.
› Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) » page 152.
› Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) » page 152.
› Hill Hold Control (HHC) » page 153.
› Trailer stabilisation (TSA) » page 168.
The ESC system cannot be deactivated. The  » fig. 145 symbol button can only

be used to deactivate the ASR.
Assist systems
151
The warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster when the ASR is deactivated.
Antilock Braking System (ABS)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 151.
The TCS should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactivated
only in the following situations, for example.
› When driving with snow chains.
› When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface.
› When “rocking a car free” when it has become stuck.
The ASR can be deactivated via the symbol button  » fig. 146.
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thus helping the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle.
The warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster when the ASR is deactivated.
The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of
the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises.
Ensure the TCS is activated again afterwards.
When the ABS system is active, do not brake periodically or reduce the pressure on the brake pedal.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Fig. 146
TCS button
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 151.
If one of the wheels starts to spin, the EDL system brakes the spinning wheel
and transfers the driving force to the other wheels. This ensures the stability
of the vehicle and a quick journey.
The EDL switches off automatically in order to avoid excessive heat generation
in the disc brake of the wheel being braked. The vehicle can continue to be
driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL. The
EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down.
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR)


Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 151.
If the wheels are slipping, the TCS adapts the engine speed to the conditions
of the road surface. The TCS makes it much easier to start off, accelerate and
climb steep hills even if the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.
The TCS function is activated automatically each time the ignition is switched
on.
If your vehicle is fitted with the ESC system, the ASR is integrated into the ESC
system » page 151.
During an intervention of the system, the TCS indicator light  flashes in the
instrument cluster.
152
Driving
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 151.
In critical situations, the DSR provides the driver with a steering recommendation in order to stabilise the vehicle. The DSR is activated, for example, on the
right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 151.
The HBA increases the braking effect and helps to reduce the braking distance.
The HBA is activated by very quick operation of the brake pedal. In order to
achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be applied firmly until the vehicle has come to a standstill.

The HBA function is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released.
WARNING (Continued)
Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the system signals. Thus, these objects or people
who wear such clothing are not recognised by the System sensors.
■ External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the system. Under adverse conditions, this may cause objects or people to not be recognised by the system.
■
The ABS is activated faster and more effectively with the intervention of the
HBA.
Hill Hold Control (HHC)

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 151.
When driving on slopes, HHC allows you to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal without having to use the handbrake.
The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake
pedal for approx. 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released.
The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator pedal. If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds, it starts to roll back.
The HHC is active on slops of >5 % if the driver door is closed. HHC is only ever
active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off. When driving downhill, it
is inactive.
Parking aid

Introduction
154
154
WARNING
The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention
and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when reversing the
vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres. Pay particular attention to small
children and animals as they may not be recognised by the system sensors.
■ Before reversing, you should make sure that there are no small obstacles,
such as rocks, thin posts, trailer drawbars etc. in front or behind your vehicle. Such obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors.
■
Notice
The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher
than for rear obstacle recognition.
■ If not all fields around the vehicle are shown after the system is activated,
the vehicle will need to be moved a few metres forwards or in reverse.
■ The sound of the park-assist can be adjusted via the MAXI DOT display in the
Wizards menu option » page 44.
■ If the system is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is
in position P (the vehicle cannot move), the warning tone is interrupted and no
obstacles are displayed.
■
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Function
Activation/deactivation
CAUTION
If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system
and there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The
fault is also indicated by the symbol  flashing in the button » fig. 147 on
page 154 . Seek help from a specialist garage.
■ The sensors must be kept clean (free of ice, etc.) to enable the system to operate properly.
■ The system function may be limited under adverse weather conditions
(heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high temperatures etc.).
■ Additionally installed modules such as bicycle carriers can impair the function
of the parking aid.
■
Assist systems
153
The length of the vehicle can be increased with an installed detachable towing
device. The danger area thus begins at a distance of around 35 cm on vehicles
equipped with a factory-fitted towing device.
Function
Towing a trailer
On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted towing device, only system areas A
and B » fig. 147 are active when towing a trailer.
Activation/deactivation

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 153.
The parking aid (hereafter referred to solely as system) only works when the
ignition is switched on.
The system supports the driver via audible signals, via the display on the radio
or via the factory-installed navigation system when parking and manoeuvring » Radio user guide, Navigation system user guide.
The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
bumper and an obstacle. The ultrasound sensors are located on the front/rear
bumper.
Image description - approximate range of the sensors
Range » fig. 147
A
B
C
D
E
a)
a)
Range of sensors
120 cm
60 cm
160 cm
60 cm
60 cm
Applies only for vehicles with 12 sensors.
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is
reduced. A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm - danger
area. From this moment on do not continue driving!
154 Driving
and
auf Seite 153.
The system is automatically activated by selecting reverse gear or pressing
the symbol button  » fig. 147 on page 154 . The symbol  lights up in the
button; activation is confirmed by a brief acoustic signal.
Fig. 147 Range of sensors / system button

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
The system is deactivated by moving out of reverse gear or by pressing the 
symbol button, or is deactivated automatically at a speed of over 10 km/h (the
 symbol in the button goes out).
On vehicles which only have rear sensors, the system can only be deactivated
by moving out of reverse gear.
Park assist

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Functioning
Finding a parking space
Parking
Manoeuvring out of a parking space parallel to the carriage way
Automatic emergency braking
Information messages
155
155
156
157
157
157
Park Assist (in the following referred to as the system) helps drivers park in
suitable parallel and perpendicular parking places and also to manoeuvre out
of parallel parking spaces.
The system takes over the steering movements when parking or driving out of
the parking space, with the driver operating the pedals as well as the gear lever.

The state in which the steering wheel is operated by the system, is referred to
as the parking operation.
The parking aid is part of the park assist system, therefore the information
and safety guidelines » page 153, Parking aid must also be read and observed.
WARNING
■ The system only serves to support and does not relieve the driver of the
responsibility for the vehicle operation.
■ During the parking process, the system automatically performs rapid
steering movements. While it is doing so, do not place your hands between
the steering wheel – risk of injury!
■ When parking or leaving a parking space on loose or slippery surfaces
(gravel, snow, ice, etc.), you may stray from the calculated road because of
the surface conditions. We therefore recommend not using the system in
such situations.
■ External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors. Under adverse conditions, this may cause objects or people to not be recognised by the system.
CAUTION
If other vehicles are parked behind or on the kerb, the system can guide your
vehicle beyond the kerb or onto it. Ensure that the wheels or the wheel rims of
your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary intervene in time.
■ Under certain circumstances, the surfaces or structures of certain objects
such as wire mesh fences or powder snow cannot be detected by the system.
■ The system function may be limited under adverse weather conditions
(heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high temperatures etc.).
Notice
We recommend performing parking at a safe speed of about 5 km / h.
Functioning

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 155.
Basic system operations
› The measurement and evaluation of the size of parking spaces when driving.
› The determination of the correct position of the vehicle for parking.
› The calculation of the line on which the vehicle drives backwards into the
parking space or forwards from the parking space.
› The automatic turning of the front wheels when parking.
Information and system messages are displayed in the instrument cluster
(hereafter only in the display) .
When the system is activated, the warning light lights up  » fig. 148 on
page 155 - .
The traction control system (TCS) must always be switched on when parking.
Finding a parking space
■
CAUTION
The evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure depends on
the circumference of the wheels on the vehicle.
■ The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size
approved by the manufacturer.
■ Dispense with use of the system if snow chains or a temporary spare wheel
are mounted on the vehicle.
■ If wheels other than those approved by the manufacturer are mounted, the
resulting position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly. This
can be avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage.
Fig. 148 System button / display

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 155.
Finding a parallel parking space
› Drive past the parking space at up to 40 km/h and a distance of 0.5 – 1.5 m.
› Press the symbol buttononce  » fig. 148 .
The display shows the following » fig. 148 - .

Assist systems
155
Finding a perpendicular parking space
› Drive past the parking space at up to 20 km/h and a distance of 0.5 – 1.5 m.
› Press the symbol buttontwice  » fig. 148 .
C
D
Indication for selecting the forward gear.
Indication for selecting the reverse gear.
The display shows the following » fig. 148 - .
If the system has recognised a suitable parking space, this parking space is
shown in the display » fig. 149 - .
The search area for the parking space on the driver's side is automatically indicated on the display.
› Continue driving forwards until the display appears » fig. 149 - .
› Stop and make sure that the vehicle does not move forward until the start of
Activate the turn signal on the driver's side if you wish to park on this side of
the road. In the display the search area for the parking space is indicated on
the driver's side.
› Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
› As soon as the following message is shown in the display: Steering int. ac-
If suitable parking space is found, its parameters are stored until another suitable parking space has been found or until a distance of 10 m had been driven
after finding the parking space.
To change the parking mode when searching for a parking space, press the 
symbol button again.
Notice
If the symbol  (km / h) is shown in the display , the vehicle speed should be
reduced below 40 km / hr (parallel parking) or below 20 km / hr (transverse
parking).
Parking
the parking procedure.
tive. Check area around veh.!, let go of the steering wheel. The steering will
be taken over by the system.
› Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully.
If necessary, the parking procedure can be continued with further steps.
› If the display of the arrow flashes forward » fig. 149 -  , then engage the
first gear or move the selector lever into position D.
The display shows the  icon (brake pedal).
› Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically rotates into the required position, the symbol  goes out.
› Carefully drive forwards.
› If the backwards arrow is flashing in the display » fig. 149 - , select reverse
gear again or move the selector lever into position R .
The display shows the  icon (brake pedal).
› Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically rotates into the required position, the symbol  goes out.
› Carefully move backwards.
These steps can be repeated several times one after the other.
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and
the following message appears in the display:
 Park Assist stopped. Please take over steering!
Fig. 149 Display

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 155.
Display
A Parking place recognised with the information to drive on.
B Parking place recognised with the information to engage the reverse gear.
156 Driving
Automatic brake assist in speeding
If during the parking manoeuvre, a velocity of 7 km / h is exceeded for the first
time, then the speed will be automatically reduced by the system to 7 km / h.
This ensures discontinuation of the parking is avoided.

Automatic termination
The system cancels the parking procedure if one of the following cases occurs:
› A speed of 7 km / h is exceeded for the second time.
› The time limit of 6 minutes is exceeded.
› The symbol key is pressed.
› The ASR system is turned off.
› Driver intervention in the automatic steering operation occurs (wheel stop).
› There is a system fault before (system temporarily unavailable).
› Automatic emergency braking is applied.
If any of the above events occurs, the following warning message is displayed » page 157.
Manoeuvring out of a parking space parallel to the carriage way

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 155.
Manoeuvring out
› Press the symbol buttononce  » fig. 148 on page 155 .
› Activate the turn signal for side of the vehicle where the parking space is out
of which you wish to manoeuvre.
› Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
› As soon as the following message is shown in the display: Steering int. active. Check area around veh.!, let go of the steering wheel. The steering will
be taken over by the system.
› Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully.
› Follow the system instructions shown in the display.
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and
the following message appears in the information display:
 Please take over steering and drive on.
Automatic termination
The system terminates the manoeuvring procedure if one of the following cases arises.
› The symbol key is pressed.
› The ASR system is turned off.
› Driver intervention in the automatic steering operation occurs (wheel stop).
› There is a system fault before (system temporarily unavailable).
› Automatic emergency braking is applied.
If any of the above events occurs, the following warning message is displayed » page 157.
Automatic emergency braking

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 155.
If the system detects a risk of impact during the parking, automatic emergency
braking is applied to reduce the consequences of any collision.
Parking is terminated by the emergency braking.
CAUTION
If parking is aborted, e.g. due to the second speed exceeding 7 km / h, then the
automatic emergency braking is not triggered by the system!
Information messages

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst

Park Assist: Speed too high.
and
auf Seite 155.
If a speed of 50 km / h is exceeded while searching for a parking space, the
system with the key symbol is  must be reactivated.

Speed too high. Please take over steering!
The parking is terminated due to the speed of 7 km / hr being exceeded.

Driver steering intervention: Please take over steering!
The parking procedure is terminated due to a driver steering intervention.

Park Assist stopped. ASR deactivated.
The parking procedure cannot be carried out because the TCS system is deactivated. Activate the TCS.

ASR deactivated. Please take over steering!
The parking procedure was ended because TCS was deactivated during the
parking procedure.

Trailer: Park Assist stopped.
The parking procedure cannot be carried out because a trailer is hitched.

Time limit exceeded. Please take over steering!
The parking procedure was ended because the time limit of 6 minutes was
passed.

Park Assist currently not available.

Assist systems
157
The system cannot be activated because a fault exists on the vehicle. Seek
help from a specialist garage.

WARNING
For safety reasons, the cruise control system must not be used in dense
traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces (such as icy roads, slippery roads,
loose gravel) – risk of accident!
■ The saved speed may only be resumed if it is not too high for the current
traffic conditions.
■ Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the system being switched on unintentionally.
■
Park Assist stopped. System currently not available.
The parking procedure was ended because a fault exists on the vehicle. Seek
help from a specialist garage.

Park Assist faulty. Workshop!
The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exists in the system.
Seek help from a specialist garage.

ASR intervention. Please take over steering!
The parking procedure is terminated by a TCS intervention.

PARK ASSIST Turn on turn signal and select reverse gear
The prerequisites for manoeuvring out of a parking space using the system
have been met. Switch on the turn signals and shift into reverse.

Automatic driving out of parking space not possible. Space too small.
The manoeuvring procedure using the system is not possible. The parking gap
is too small.

CAUTION
The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when
driving in areas with steeper gradients. The weight of the vehicle increases the
speed at which it travels. In such cases, select a lower gear or brake the vehicle using the footbrake.
■ The cruise control system cannot be activated when first gear or reverse
gear is selected (vehicles with manual transmission).
■ The cruise control system cannot be activated when the selector lever is in
positions P, N or R (vehicles with automatic transmission).
■ The cruise control system may automatically switch off when some brake assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervene, when the maximum permissible engine
speed is exceeded, etc.
■
Park Assist: Brake interv. Speed too high.
The speed was too high during parking and was automatically reduced.
Activating/deactivating
Cruise Control System

Fig. 150
Operating lever: Cruise control
system controls
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Activating/deactivating
Storing and maintaining speed
Changing the stored speed
Switching off temporarily
158
159
159
159
The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed, more than 25 km/h,
without you having to actuate the accelerator pedal.
This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output
and braking power of the engine.
The warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster when the cruise control system is switched on.
158 Driving

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 158.
Activating
› Move switch A » fig. 150 into the ON position.
Deactivating
› Move switch A » fig. 150 into the OFF position.
Storing and maintaining speed

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Switching off temporarily
and
auf Seite 158.
› Activate the cruise control system » page 158.
› Drive at the desired speed.
› Push the rocker button B into the SET/- » fig. 150 on page 158 position.
After you have released the rocker button B from the SET/- position, the
speed you have just stored is kept constant without having to depress the accelerator.
Changing the stored speed

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 158.
Increasing the speed with the rocker button B
› Push the rocker button B into the RES/+ » fig. 150 on page 158 position.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 158.
The cruise control system can be temporarily deactivated by pushing the
switch A » fig. 150 on page 158into the spring-mounted CANCEL position or
by depressing the brake or clutch pedal.
The set speed remains stored in the memory.
Briefly push the rocker button B into the RES/+ position in order to resume
the stored speed after the clutch or brake pedal is released.
START-STOP

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
160
160
160
161
161
161
Decreasing the speed using the rocker button B
The stored speed can be reduced by pushing the rocker switch B into the
SET/- » fig. 150 on page 158 position.
Operating conditions of the system
Operation in vehicles with manual transmission
Operation in vehicles with automatic transmission
System-related automatic startup
Manually activating/deactivating the system
Information messages
If the rocker button is pressed and held in the SET/- position, the speed will
decrease continuously. Release the rocker button once the desired speed is
reached. The set speed is then stored in the memory.
The START-STOP system (hereinafter referred to only as system) reduces fuel
consumption and polluting emissions and CO 2 emissions by e.g. when stopped
at traffic lights, the engine is turned off and started again when moving off.
If the rocker button is held in the RES/+ position, the speed will increase continuously. Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached. The
set speed is then stored in the memory.
If the rocker button is released at a speed of less than approx. 25 km/h, the
speed is not stored and the memory is erased. Once the speed of the vehicle
has increased to more than approx. 25 km/h, the speed must then be stored
again by pushing the rocker button B into the SET/- position.
WARNING
Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off.
The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is running.
■
■
Increasing the speed with the accelerator
› Depress the accelerator pedal.
Releasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set
speed.
Decreasing the speed with the brake pedal
The speed can also be reduced by depressing the brake pedal, which temporarily deactivates the system » page 159.
Assist systems
159
Operating conditions of the system
Fig. 151
Maxi DOT display: Engine is automatically switched off / automatic engine cut off is not possible

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Notice
If the vehicle remains outdoors for a long time in minus temperatures or in
direct sunlight, it can take several hours until the internal temperature of the
vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the
START STOP system.
■ If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than 30 seconds or the driver's
door is opened during automatically stopped mode, the engine must be started manually with the key.
■ After manual engine start, automatic engine shutdown can take place only in
a vehicle with manual transmission when a minimum distance required for the
system function has been covered.
■
auf Seite 159.
For the system-dependent automatic engine shutdown, the following conditions must be met.
 The driver's door is closed.
 The driver has fastened the seat belt.
 The bonnet is closed.
 The driving speed was higher than 4 km.h after the last stop.
 No trailer is coupled.
Some additional conditions for the system function cannot be influenced or
recognized by the driver. Therefore, the system can react differently in situations which are identical from the driver's point of view.
If after stopping the car, the segment display shows the message UNABLE TO
START STOP or the MAXI DOT display shows a check mark » fig. 151 , then
the conditions for automatic engine shutdown have not been met.
Having the engine running, is, for example, essential for the following reasons.
› The motor temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet
been reached.
› The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low.
› Current consumption is too high.
› High climatic performance (high fan speed, big difference between the desired and actual indoor temperature).
Operation in vehicles with manual transmission

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 159.
If the operating conditions have been complied with, automatic engine shutdown / automatic engine start takes place as described.
Automatic engine shut down
› Stop the vehicle.
› Put the gear stick into Neutral.
› Release the clutch pedal.
Automatic engine shutdown then takes place and the segment display shows
the message START STOP ACTIVE or a check mark appears in the MAXI DOT
display » fig. 151 on page 160 .
Automatic engine start
› Depress the clutch pedal.
The automatic start procedure takes place again.
Operation in vehicles with automatic transmission

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 159.
If the operating conditions have been complied with, automatic engine shutdown / automatic engine start takes place as described.
Automatic engine shut down
› Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal.
160 Driving

Automatic engine shutdown then takes place and the segment display shows
the message START STOP ACTIVE or a check mark appears in the MAXI DOT
display » fig. 151 on page 160 .
Manually activating/deactivating the system
Fig. 152
Button for the START-STOP system
Automatic engine start
› Release the brake pedal.
The automatic start procedure takes place again.
Further information on automatic transmission
Engine shut down takes place when the selector lever is in positions P, D, S
and N and in Tiptronic mode.
When the selector lever is in position P, the engine remains shut down even
after you release the brake pedal. Start the engine by pressing the gas pedal
or by moving the selector lever into a different mode and releasing the brake
pedal.
If the selector lever position R is engaged when the engine has been switched
off automatically, then the automatic start-up process is launched.
If the gear selector is moved from position R to the position D, S or N , the vehicle must first be driven at a speed of more than 10 km / h for the automatic
engine shutdown to be triggered again.
No automatic engine shutdown occurs when the system detects a vehicle
movement due to a large steering angle.
No automatic engine shutdown takes place when the vehicle is moving at low
speed (e.g. during a traffic jam or when tuning) and remains stationary after
pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shutdown takes place if you
press the brake pedal down with more force.
System-related automatic startup

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 159.
When the engine has been switched off automatically, the system can still
start before the desired continuation of the journey. The possible reasons for
this are as follows.
› The vehicle begins to roll, e.g. on a slope.
› The brake pedal has been actuated several times.
› Current consumption is too high.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 159.
Disable / Enable
› Press the symbol button  » fig. 152.
When start-stop mode is deactivated, the indicator light in the button lights
up.
Notice
If the system is automatically deactivated when the engine has been switched
off automatically, then the automatic startup process is triggered.
Information messages

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 159.
The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display.
 Start the engine manually!
 START MANUALLY
If one of the conditions for automatic engine start has not been satisfied or
the driver's seat belt has been disconnected. The engine must be started manually.
On vehicles with the KESSY system, the ignition is turned off by first pressing
the starter button, but the start process only begins when the button is pressed twice.


Error: start-stop system
ERROR START-STOP
A system error is present. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Assist systems
161
If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the
system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.
Fatigue detection (break recommendation)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
162
162
Function
Information messages
WARNING
■ For the driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if
you feel tired.
■ The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.
■ Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.
■ There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.
Notice
In some situations, the system may evaluate the driving incorrectly and thus
mistakenly recommend a break (e.g. sporty driving, adverse weather conditions or poor road conditions).
■ The fatigue detection system is designed primarily for motorway driving.
■
Function

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 162.
The fatigue detection system advises the driver on the basis of information
about the steering behaviour, to take a break from driving. The system recommends a break at speeds of 65-200 km/h.
After the ignition has been switched on, the system evaluates the steering behaviour for 15 minutes. This baseline analysis is constantly compared with the
current steering behaviour.
If the system detects deviations from normal steering behaviour due to possible fatigue of the driver, it recommends to take a break from driving.
The system deletes the stored baseline analysis if one of the following conditions is met.
› The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.
› The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed and the driver's door opened.
› The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.
162 Driving
Activation/deactivation
The system can be activated/deactivated via the MAXI DOT display in the Wizards menu option » page 44.
Information messages

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 162.
The symbol will appear in the MAXI DOT-display for  a few seconds, along
with the following message.
 Fatigue detected. Take a break!
An audible signal is also emitted.
Description
Towing a trailer
Towing device

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Description
Adjusting the ready position
Fitting the ball head
Check proper fitting
Removing the ball head
Use and care
163
164
164
165
165
166
If your vehicle has already been factory-fitted with a towing device or is fitted
with a towing device from ŠKODA Original Accessories, then it meets all of the
technical requirements and national legal regulations for towing a trailer.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power socket for the electrical connection
between the vehicle and trailer. If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7-pin
connector, you can use a suitable adapter from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
The maximum trailer drawbar load is 80 kg.
WARNING
■ Check that the tow bar is seated correctly and is secured in the mounting
recess before the start of every journey.
■ Do not use the tow bar if it is not correctly inserted and secured in the
mounting recess.
■ Do not use the towing device if it is damaged or if there are parts missing.
■ Do not modify or adapt the towing device in any way.
■ Never release the tow bar while the trailer is still coupled.
Fig. 153 Carrier for the towing device/tow bar

and
auf Seite 163.
The tow bar can be removed and is kept in the spare wheel compartment or in
a compartment for the spare wheel in the boot » page 201, Vehicle tool kit.
Explanation of graphic » fig. 153
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CAUTION
Take care when handling the tow bar so as to avoid damaging the paintwork
on the bumper.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
13-pin power socket
Safety eyelet
Mounting recess
Cap
Dust cap
Tow ball
Operating lever
Lock cap
Release pin
Key
Locking ball
Notice
If you lose the key, please get in touch with a specialist garage.
Towing a trailer
163
Adjusting the ready position
Fitting the ball head
Fig. 154 Setting the ready position/ready position

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 163.
Always adjust the ball head in the ready position before fitting.
› Turn the key 1 so that its red marking is visible » fig. 154.
› Grip the tow bar below the protective cap 2 .
› Press the release pin 3 in the direction of the arrow to the stop, and simultaneously push the lever 4 downwards in the direction of the arrow to the
stop.
The lever remains locked in this position.
CAUTION
In the ready position, the key cannot be removed nor turned to a different position.
Fig. 155 Insert the ball head/lock the lock, and put the lock cover on

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 163.
› Pull cap 4 » fig. 153 on page 163 downwards.
› Put the tow bar in the ready position » page 164.
› Grip the tow bar from underneath » fig. 155 and insert into the mounting recess until you hear it click into place »
.
The lever 1 automatically turns upwards and the release pin 2 pops out (its
red and green parts are visible) » .
If the lever 1 does not turn automatically, or if the release pin 2 does not
pop out, remove the tow bar from the mounting recess by turning the lever
downwards as far as it can go. Clean the tapered surfaces on the tow bar and
the mounting recess.
› Lock the lock on the operating lever by turning the key
3 by 180° to the
right (see green marking 3 is visible) and remove the key in the direction of
the arrow.
› Insert the cap 4 onto the lock in the direction of the arrow » .
› Check that the tow bar is securely attached » page 165.
WARNING
Keep your hands outside the lever's range of motion when attaching the
tow bar – risk of finger injuries!
■ Never attempt to pull the operating lever upwards forcibly to turn the
key. Doing so would mean the ball head is not attached correctly.
■
164 Driving

CAUTION
After removing the key, always replace the cap on the lock of the operating
lever – risk of dirt getting into the lock.
■ Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times. Such
dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely.
■ After removing the ball head, always place the cap on the mounting recess.
■
Removing the ball head
Check proper fitting
Fig. 156
Check that the tow bar is attached properly
Fig. 157 Unlock the operating lever of the ball head/removing the ball
head

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 163.
› Remove the cap

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 163.
Check that the tow bar is fitted properly before each use.
Check the following points.





Lever 1 is up as far as it goes » fig. 156.
The release pin 2 is completely exposed (both its red and green parts are
visible).
The key is removed.
The cap 3 is on the lock of the operating lever.
The tow bar does not come out of the mounting recess even after heavy
“shaking”.
WARNING
Do not use the towing device unless the tow bar has been properly locked!
1 » fig. 157 from the lock on the tow bar in the direction of
the arrow.
› Unlock the lock on the operating lever by turning the key 2 180° to the left
so that the red marking becomes visible.
› Grasp the ball head from underneath.
› Press the release pin 3 in the direction of the arrow to the stop, and simultaneously push the lever 4 downwards in the direction of the arrow to the
stop.
The ball head is released in this position and falls freely into the hand. If it
does not fall freely into the hand, use your other hand to push it upwards.
At the same time, the tow bar latches into the ready position and is therefore
ready to be re-inserted into the mounting recess » .
› Place the cap
4 » fig. 153 on page 163 onto the mounting recess.
WARNING
Never allow the tow bar to remain unsecured in the boot. This could cause
boot damage on sudden braking, and could put the safety of the occupants
at risk.
Towing a trailer
165

CAUTION
If the lever is held firm and not pushed downwards as far as it can go, it will
go back up after the ball head is removed and will not latch into the ready position. The tow bar will then need to be brought into this position before the
next time it is fitted.
■ Stow the ball head in the ready position with the key inserted in the box.
When doing so, make the side opposite to the inserted key face downwards –
there is a risk of damaging the key.
■ Do not use excessive force when handling the operating lever (e.g. do not
step on it).
■
Notice
■ We recommend putting the protective cover onto the ball head before removing the tow bar.
■ Clean any dirt from the tow bar before stowing it away in the box with the
vehicle tool kit.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 163.
Close the mounting recess with the cover to prevent any dirt from getting in.
Always check the tow bar before hitching a trailer. Apply suitable grease
where necessary.
Use the protective cover when stowing away the tow bar, in order to stop the
boot from getting dirty.
In the event of dirt, clean the surfaces of the mounting recess and treat with a
suitable preservative.
CAUTION
Apply grease to the upper part of the mounting recess. Make sure you do not
remove any grease.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
166 Driving
Loading a trailer

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 166.
The vehicle/trailer combination must be balanced, whereby the maximum permissible drawbar load must be utilised. If the drawbar load is too low, it jeopardises the performance of the vehicle/trailer combination.
Distribution of the load
Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as
close to the axle as possible. Secure the items from slipping.
Tyre pressure
Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a “full load” » page 194,
Service life of tyres.
Trailer load
The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstances » page 224, Technical data.
The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1 000 metres above
mean sea level.
The engine output falls as altitude increases, as does the vehicle's climbing
power. Therefore, for every additional 1000 m in height (or part), the maximum
permissible towed weight must be reduced by 10%.
The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing device is merely a test value for the towing device. The vehicle-specific values
are detailed in the vehicle documents.
Introduction
Loading a trailer
Driving with a trailer
WARNING
Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.
The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer.
Trailer

168
168
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the
trailer is laden. Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving
with this combination.
Use and care

Trailer stabilisation (TSA)
Anti-theft alarm system
166
167

WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the
maximum permissible total or towed weight of the vehicle and the trailer –
risk of accident and serious injury.
■ Slipping loads can significantly impair the stability and safety of the vehicle/trailer combination – risk of accident and serious injury.
■
Driving with a trailer
Fig. 158
Swivel out the 13-pin power
socket
Headlights
The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer is being towed and the headlights may dazzle other road users.
Adjust the headlights using the headlight beam control » page 66, Parking and
low beam lights.
Driving speed
For safety reasons, do not drive faster than 80 km/h when towing a trailer.
Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the
trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by accelerating.
Brakes
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply
the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting
from the trailer wheels locking.
On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as
a brake.
Before the journey
Engine overheating
If the needle for the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right-hand
area or the red area of the scale, the speed must be reduced immediately.
A and swing out in the direction of arrow » fig. 158.
› Lift off protective cap 5 » fig. 153 on page 163.
Stop and switch off the engine if the indicator light  in the instrument cluster
lights up. Wait a few minutes and check the level of coolant » page 188,
Checking the coolant level.
After the journey
› Grip the 13-pin socket at point A and swing in the opposite direction to the
arrow » fig. 158.
› Place the protective cover 5 » fig. 153 on page 163 onto the tow bar.
The following guidelines must be observed » page 34,  Coolant.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 166.
› Grip the 13-pin socket at point
Safety eyelet
The purpose of the safety eyelet B » fig. 158 is to attach the breakaway cable
of the trailer.
When attaching the breakaway cable to the safety eyelet, it must sag freely
against the vehicle in all trailer positions (sharp bends, in reverse etc.).
Exterior mirrors
You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see
the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. The national
legal requirements must be observed.
The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating.
WARNING
Never use the safety eyelet for towing!
Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic
situation.
■ Improper or incorrectly connected electric cables can energise the trailer
and cause functional faults to the vehicle's entire electrical system as well
as accidents and severe injuries.
■ Work on the electrical system must only be carried out by specialist garages.
■ Never directly connect the trailer's electrical system with the electrical
connections for the tail lights or other current sources.
■
■
Towing a trailer
167

Notice
After coupling the trailer and connecting the power socket, check that the
rear lights on the trailer are working correctly.
■ If there is an error in the trailer lighting, check the fuses in the fuse box in
the dash panel » page 216.
■ Contact between the breakaway cable and the safety eyelet can result in
mechanical wear on the surface protection of the eyelet. Such wear does not
impair the functioning of the safety eyelet and does not constitute a fault. It is
excluded from the warranty coverage.
■ If you tow a trailer frequently, you should also have your vehicle inspected
between service intervals.
■ The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be applied when coupling and uncoupling the trailer.
■
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 166.
The trailer stabilisation is an extension of the stabilisation control that works
in conjunction with the counter-steering assistance to reduce the amount the
trailer "sways".
After turning on the ignition, the ESC indicator light  in the instrument cluster lights up for about 2 seconds longer than the ABS indicator light.
Function requirements for trailer stabilisation.





The coupling device was factory-fitted or purchased from the ŠKODA Original Accessories.
The ESC is active. (Warning lights  or  do not illuminate in the instrument cluster).
The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer
socket.
The speed is higher than approx. 60 km/h.
The trailer has a rigid drawbar.
WARNING
The increased safety offered by the trailer stabilisation must not tempt you
to take greater risks than otherwise.
168 Driving
Notice
The trailer stabilisation works for both braked and unbraked trailers.
Anti-theft alarm system

Trailer stabilisation (TSA)

CAUTION
The trailer stabilisation need not be able to correctly detect all of driving situations.
■ Light trailers that sway are not always detected and therefore stabilised accordingly by the trailer stabilisation.
■ Release the pressure on the accelerator pedal if the system is being regulated.
■ Avoid abrupt and sudden driving/braking manoeuvres.
■
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 166.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is activated when the electrical connection to the trailer is interrupted.
Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer is coupled or uncoupled » page 54.
Conditions for including a trailer in the anti-theft alarm system.




The vehicle is factory-fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and towing
device.
The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer
socket.
The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is functional.
The vehicle is locked with the vehicle key and the anti-theft alarm system
is activated.
Notice
For technical reasons, trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the
anti-theft alarm system.
General Maintenance
Car care
Services, modifications, and technical alterations

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Tests required by law
ŠKODA Service Partners
ŠKODA Original Parts
ŠKODA Original Accessories
Spoiler
Airbags
169
170
170
170
171
171
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. must be observed when
carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle.
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and
helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition. After carrying out modifications, repairs or technical alterations, the vehicle will comply with German
road transport regulations (StVZO)
Always consult a ŠKODA Partner » page 170 before buying accessories or
parts, or before carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations
to your vehicle.
WARNING
If work on your vehicle is not carried out properly, this can lead to operational faults - risk of accident and serious injuries.
■ We recommend only having these modifications and technical alterations
carried out by a specialist garage.
■
WARNING (Continued)
Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to
operational faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected
systems because of the networking of the electronic components. The operational safety of the vehicle may be at significant risk and can lead to increased wear of parts.
■ The ŠKODA Partner accepts no liability for products that have not been
approved by ŠKODA AUTO a.s. even though these may be products with an
operational approval or that have been approved by a government testing
institute.
■
WARNING
We advise you only to use ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle. Reliability, safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these.
■ ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts can be purchased
from ŠKODA Partners, who will also perform the professional assembly of
the purchased parts.
■
For the sake of the environment
Technical documents regarding alterations carried out on the vehicle must be
kept by the vehicle user in order to be handed over to the recyclers at a later
date. This ensures that the vehicle is recycled in an environmentally sound
manner.
Notice
Any damage caused by technical alterations made without the approval of the
manufacturer is excluded from the warranty » Service schedule.
Tests required by law

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 169.
Many countries have legislation which require that the reliability and roadworthiness and/or exhaust gas composition of a vehicle must be tested at specific
intervals. These tests can be carried out by workshops or checking stations
that have been legally authorized for this purpose.
Car care
169

The ŠKODA service partners have been informed about the necessary legal
tests and will prepare the vehicle for the tests in a service operation at the
customer's discretion, or will ensure that these tests are carried out. The specialist garages can carry out the specified tests directly at the customer's discretion, if they are designated for such a procedure. This saves you time and
money.
Even if you want to take your vehicle to an officially approved test centre for
prior checking in preparation of a legally required test, we recommend that you
consult the service consultant of your ŠKODA service partner beforehand.
The service consultant will tell you which areas, according to his appraisal, you
should focus on in order that your vehicle may pass the technical test without
any problems. In this way, you can avoid additional expenses resulting from a
possible subsequent test.
ŠKODA Service Partners

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 169.
ŠKODA Service Partners feature modern, specially developed tools and equipment. Here, trained specialists have access to a comprehensive range of
ŠKODA Original Parts and ŠKODA Original Accessories for carrying out modifications, repairs and technical alterations.
All ŠKODA service partners operate according to the most recent guidelines
and instructions from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. All service and repair work is therefore
carried out on time and at the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a
good technical condition.
ŠKODA Service Partners are therefore properly prepared to service your vehicle
and to provide quality work. We therefore advise you to have all modifications,
repairs and technical alterations to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service
Partner.
ŠKODA Original Parts

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 169.
We recommend the use of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle, since these
parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO a.s. They correspond exactly to the ŠKODA
AUTO a.s. regulations in regard to design, dimensional accuracy and material,
and are identical to the components used in the batch production.
170 General Maintenance
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. is able to warrant the safety, suitability, and long life of
these products. Therefore, we recommend that you only use ŠKODA Genuine
Parts.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. supplies the market with a complete range of ŠKODA Genuine Parts not only while the model is still in production but for at least 15 years
after the end of series production; the market is supplied with wear-and-tear
parts and for at least 10 years with equipment parts.
ŠKODA service partners are liable for any ŠKODA original part defects for a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with the materials defect liability, provided that nothing else was agreed in the purchase agreement. You should keep
the approved warranty certificate and the bill for these components for this
period of time, so that the commencement of the term may be verified.
Body repairs
ŠKODA vehicles are designed so that if the body suffers damage, it is only necessary to replace those parts which are in fact damaged.
Before you decide to have damaged body parts replaced, however, you should
first of all contact your specialist garage to determine whether or not such
parts can also be repaired. Repairs to body parts are usually cheaper.
ŠKODA Original Accessories

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 169.
If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle, you should remember the following:
We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. has selected such accessories to ensure that they are reliable, safe and suitable for your particular vehicle. Although we constantly monitor the market, we are not able to assess or warrant the parts even though in
some instances such parts may have a type approval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory.
All accessory products go through a fastidious process in the area of technical
development (technical tests) and quality inspection (customer tests), and only
if all tests are positive does the product become a ŠKODA Genuine Accessory.
Our ŠKODA Genuine Accessories service also provides expert advice, and professional fitting at the customer's discretion.

ŠKODA service partners are liable for any ŠKODA Genuine Part defects for a
period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with the materials
defect liability, provided that nothing else was agreed in the purchase contract
or in any other agreements. You should keep the approved warranty certificate
and the bill for these components for this period of time, so that commencement of the term may be verified.
In addition, ŠKODA Service Partners also stock a range of suitable car care
products as well as those parts which are subject to natural wear-and-tear,
such as tyres, batteries, bulbs and wiper blades.
Notice
The accessories authorized by the company ŠKODA AUTO a.s. will be offered
by the ŠKODA partners in all countries where the company ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
has a sales and service network. This will usually be in the form of a printed
catalogue of Original ŠKODA Accessories, in the form of separate printed brochures or in the form of offers for ŠKODA Genuine Accessories on the ŠKODA
partner web pages.
Spoiler

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 169.
If your new vehicle is fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination
with the spoiler on the luggage compartment lid, the following instructions
must be adhered to.
› For safety reasons, the vehicle must only be fitted with a spoiler on the front
bumper in combination with the associated spoiler on the luggage compartment lid.
› This kind of spoiler cannot be left on the front bumper either on its own, in
combination with another spoiler not on the luggage compartment lid or in
combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the luggage compartment lid.
› We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Service Partner for any repairs
to or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers.
Airbags

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 169.
The system components of the airbag system can be situated in the front
bumper, doors, front seats, roof lining or body.
WARNING
Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
■ Modifications, repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out
unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults, and can also seriously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system – risk of accident and
fatal injury!
■ The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed.
Airbag modules cannot be repaired.
WARNING
Information on the use of the airbag system
■ It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this
might result in the airbag being deployed.
■ Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed
from old cars or have been recycled.
■ Never install damaged airbag parts in the vehicle. The airbags may then
not be deployed properly or even at all in the event of an accident.
■ No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system.
WARNING
A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-approved wheels and tire combinations, can alter the functioning of the airbag system - risk of accident and fatal injury!
■ Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork.
■
WARNING
If work on your vehicle's spoilers is not carried out properly, this can lead to
operational faults - risk of accident and serious injuries.
Car care
171

WARNING
The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Resulting damage
can have a negative impact on the function of the airbag system. Any work
on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist garage. The following guidelines must therefore be observed.
■ Never drive with inner door panels removed.
■ Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the
resulting openings have not been properly sealed.
■ Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed, unless
the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed.
■ Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional
loudspeakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner
door panels.
It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end
of the winter.
WARNING
When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the braking
system can affect the braking efficiency – risk of accident!
■ Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is switched off – risk of accident!
■
CAUTION
Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight – risk of paint damage.
For the sake of the environment
Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose.
Washing by hand

Washing your car

172
173
173
The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences
is frequent washing.
How often the vehicle should be washed depends on factors such as:
› Frequency of use.
› Parking situation (garage, under trees etc.).
› Season.
› Weather conditions.
› Environmental influences.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, tree sap, road and industrial dust,
tar, soot particles, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to
the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive effect
can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect.
General Maintenance
auf Seite 172.
Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a washing glove or a washing brush.
Work from the top to the bottom - starting with the roof.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
172
and
Soak the dirt with plenty of water and rinse as well as possible.
Introduction
Washing by hand
Automatic car wash systems
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt.
Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for such
areas.
Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois
leather.
CAUTION
When washing the car by hand, protect your hands and arms from sharpedged metal parts (e.g. when cleaning the underfloor, the inside of the wheel
housings or the wheel trims, etc.) - there is a risk of cuts!
■ Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle's paintwork.
■

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 172.
The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle
in an automatic car wash system (e.g. closing the windows and the sliding/tilting roof etc.).
If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts, such as a spoiler,
roof rack system, two-way radio aerial etc., it is best to consult the operator of
the car wash system beforehand.
After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the lips of the wipers should be
cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then degreased.
WARNING
Fold in the exterior mirrors to prevent damage before washing the vehicle
in an automatic car wash system. Never manually fold in electric exterior
mirrors - always use the electric controls.
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 172.
When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for
use of the equipment must be observed. This applies in particular to the pressure used and to the spraying distance.
Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material.
WARNING
Never use circular spray nozzles or dirt cutters!
CAUTION
If washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high-pressure cleaner,
ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or the
door/panel joints – risk of freezing!
■ To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high-pressure
cleaners or steam jets, the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short periods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed.
■
The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 °C – risk
of damaging the vehicle.
■ See also Washing cars with decorative films using a high-pressure cleaner » page 175 .
■
Automatic car wash systems
Taking care of your vehicle exterior

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
174
174
174
174
175
175
175
175
176
176
176
Taking care of your vehicle's paintwork
Plastic parts
Rubber seals
Chrome parts
Decorative films
Windows and exterior mirrors
Headlight lenses
Door lock cylinders
Cavity protection
Wheels
Underbody protection
Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle.
It may also be one of the requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims
relating to corrosion damage and paint defects on the bodywork.
We recommend using vehicle care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These are available from ŠKODA Partners. The usage instructions on the package must be observed.
WARNING
Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
to the instructions.
■ Always keep the automobile care products safe from people who are not
completely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning!
■ Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when cleaning the underfloor, the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims –
risk of cuts!
■
Car care
173

CAUTION
Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning
products – risk of damaging the paintwork surface.
■ Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned.
■
For the sake of the environment
Used vehicle care product cans represent hazardous waste that is harmful to
the environment. These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal
regulations.
Notice
Due to the special tools and knowledge required, and to avoid any potential
problems with the cleaning and care of your vehicle's exterior, we recommend
that the cleaning and care of your vehicle be carried out by a ŠKODA Service
Partner.
Taking care of your vehicle's paintwork

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 173.
Minor paint damage such as scratches, scuffs or stone chips should be treated
immediately if possible, using touch-up pens or sprays.
Preserving the vehicle paintwork
A thorough wax treatment provides the vehicle's paintwork with highly effective protection against harmful environmental influences.
The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the latest,
when no more drops form on the clean paintwork.
A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean bodywork after it has dried thoroughly.
CAUTION
Never apply wax to the windows.
Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or
hard waxes.
■ Do not polish the paintwork in a dusty environment - risk of paint scratches.
■ Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides.
■ If possible, do not apply any paint care products to parts of the bodywork
that come into contact with door seals or window guides.
■
■
Plastic parts

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 173.
Clean plastic parts with a damp cloth.
If this method does not completely clean the plastic parts, use cleaning products specially designed for this purpose.
CAUTION
Do not use paint care products on plastic parts.
Rubber seals

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 173.
All door seals and window guides are factory-treated with a colourless matt
varnish layer to prevent the freezing of painted body parts and to protect
against driving noise.
Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any products whatsoever.
Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat
the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax.
CAUTION
Applying additional treatments to the seals can corrode the protective coating,
and driving noise may occur.
Polishing
Polishing is necessary if the vehicle's paintwork has become unattractive and
if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives.

If the polish does not contain any preserving elements, the paint must be treated with a preservative afterwards.
First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a
soft, dry cloth.
Chrome parts
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 173.
If this method does not completely clean chrome parts, use a specific chrome
care product.
174 General Maintenance

CAUTION
Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment - risk of surface
scratches.
Decorative films

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 173.
Wash the films with a mild soap solution and clean, warm water. Never use
harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents, as this could damage the films.
The following instructions must be followed when washing the vehicle with a
high-pressure cleaner:
› The minimum distance between the nozzle and the vehicle body should be
50 cm.
› Keep jet perpendicular to the film surface.
› The maximum water temperature is 50 °C.
› The maximum water pressure is 80 bar.
CAUTION
In the winter months, do not use an ice scraper to remove ice and snow from
the areas with films. Do not use any other objects to remove frozen layers of
snow or ice – risk of film damage.
Windows and exterior mirrors

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 173.
Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mirrors.
CAUTION
The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direction to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass.
■ Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel, sand or
salt must not be removed from the windows and mirrors – there is a risk of
damage to the surface of the windows and mirrors.
■ Do not remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water – risk of
cracks forming in the glass.
■ When removing snow or ice from windows and mirror lenses ensure that the
paintwork of the vehicle is not to damage.
■ Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp-edged objects or corrosive and acidic cleaning agents – there is a risk of damaging the heating elements or window aerial.
■
Headlight lenses

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 173.
Clean plastic front headlight lenses using clean, warm water and soap.
CAUTION
Never wipe headlights with a dry cloth.
Do not use any sharp objects to clean the plastic lenses, as this may damage
the protective paintwork and consequently cause cracks to form on the headlight lenses.
■ Do not use any harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents to clean the
headlights, as this could damage the headlight lenses.
■
■
Door lock cylinders
Regularly clean windows from the inside with clean water.

Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this
purpose.
Specific products must be used for de-icing door lock cylinders.
When drying the windows after washing the vehicle, do not use window leathers that have been used to polish the bodywork. Residues of preservatives in
the window leather can make the window dirty and reduce visibility.
CAUTION
When washing your vehicle, ensure as little water as possible gets into the
locking cylinders.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 173.
Car care
175
Cavity protection

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Underbody protection
and
auf Seite 173.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 173.
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected
for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.
The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechanical influences.
This wax protection does not need to be inspected or re-applied.
It is not possible to guarantee that the protective coating will not suffer any
damage as the vehicle is driven.
If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these
must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petroleum cleaner.
WARNING
Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to remove wax – risk of fire!
Wheels

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
WARNING
Never use additional underbody protection or anti-corrosion agents for exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filters or heat shields.
When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances may
ignite - risk of fire!
auf Seite 173.
Wheel rims
Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular
basis.
Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion, otherwise the rim material will be
corroded.
Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediately.
Light alloy wheels
After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product
for light alloy wheels. Products which cause abrasion must not be used to
treat the wheel rims.
CAUTION
Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance. This
may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the
steering wheel which, in certain circumstances, can cause premature wear of
the steering. This means it is necessary to remove the dirt.
176 General Maintenance
We recommend having the protective coating underneath the vehicle and the
chassis checked — preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of
winter.
Taking care of the interior

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Natural leather
Artificial leather, cloths and Alcantara®
Seat covers
Seat belts
177
178
178
178
Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle.
We recommend using vehicle care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These are available from ŠKODA Partners. The usage instructions on the package must be observed.
WARNING
Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
to the instructions.
■ Always keep the automobile care products safe from people who are not
completely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning!
■

CAUTION
Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible
stains on the material (leather), panels and textiles.
■ Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick, shoe
polish, etc., from the material (leather), panels and textiles as quickly as possible.
■ Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the temperature
inside the vehicle is high.
■ Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dash panel – there is a risk of
damage to the dash panel.
■ Do not stick any stickers on the inside of the rear windows, the rear side windows and in the vicinity of the heating elements on the windscreen or near the
window aerial. These may get damaged.
■ Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush – risk of damage to the surface
of the panelling.
■ Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned.
■ Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product.
■
For the sake of the environment
Used vehicle care product cans represent hazardous waste that is harmful to
the environment. These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal
regulations.
Notice
Due to the special tools and knowledge required, and to avoid any potential
problems with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle, we recommend that cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle be carried out by a
ŠKODA service partner.
Natural leather

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 176.
Leather is a natural material with specific properties, and requires regular
cleaning and maintenance.
The leather should be cleaned on a regular basis depending on the amount of
wear-and-tear.
Dust and dirt in the pores and folds act as abrasive materials. This leads to severe corrosion and the premature brittleness of the leather surface.
We recommend that you remove dust regularly and at short intervals using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Clean soiled leather surfaces with a water-dampened cotton or woollen cloth
and then dry with a clean, dry cloth » .
Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth soaked in a mild soap solution (2 tablespoons of neutral soap to 1 litre of water).
To remove stains, use a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose.
Treat the leather regularly and at suitable intervals using a suitable leather
care product.
CAUTION
Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and that
no water gets into the seams. Otherwise, the leather could become brittle or
cracked.
■ Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the
leather from bleaching. If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods,
protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it.
■ Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets, sharpedged belts, jewellery and pendants may leave permanent scratches or signs
of rubbing on the surface. Such damage cannot be subsequently recognised as
a justified complaint.
■ The use of a mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the leather surface
of the steering wheel.
■ Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect on a regular basis and each time after cleaning. The cream nourishes the leather, allows it to
breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture. It also creates surface
protection.
■ Some clothing materials, e.g. dark denim, do not have sufficient colour fastness. This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers,
even when used correctly. This applies particularly to light-coloured seat covers. This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover, but rather to poor colour
fastness of the clothing textiles.
■
Notice
When using the vehicle, minor visible changes may occur to the leather parts
of the covers (e.g. wrinkles or creases) as a result of the stress applied to the
covers.
Car care
177
Artificial leather, cloths and Alcantara®

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
Seat covers
auf Seite 176.
Artificial leather
Clean artificial leather with a damp cloth.
If this method does not completely clean the artificial leather, use a mild soap
solution or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose.
Fabric
Clean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors, boot cover, etc. using specific cleaning agents, e.g., dry foam.
Use a soft sponge, brush, or commercially available microfibre cloth.
Use a cloth and special detergent to clean the roof trim.
Remove any lumps on the cover fabric and any fabric residue using a brush.
Remove stubborn hair using a “cleaning glove”.
Alcantara®
Dust and fine dirt particles in pores, creases and seams may chafe and damage
the surface.
If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy periods, protect the Alcantara® seat covers from the direct rays of the sun to prevent fading.
Minor changes in colour caused by use are normal.
CAUTION
Do not use any leather cleaners on Alcantara® seat covers.
For Alcantara® seat covers do not use any solvents, floor wax, shoe cream,
stain remover, or similar agents.
■ Avoid leaving the vehicle in bright sunlight for long periods of time in order
to stop the fabric from bleaching. If the vehicle is parked outside for long periods of time, cover the fabric to protect it from direct sunlight.
■ Some clothing materials, e.g. dark denim, do not have sufficient colour fastness. This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers,
even when used correctly. This applies particularly to light-coloured seat covers. This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover, but rather to poor colour
fastness of the clothing textiles.
■
■
178 General Maintenance

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 176.
Electrically heated seats
Do not clean the covers by moistening, as this can damage the seat heating
system.
Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to clean the covers.
Seats without seat heating
Thoroughly vacuum the seat covers with a vacuum cleaner before cleaning.
Clean the seat covers with a damp cloth or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose.
Indented points arising on the fabrics by everyday use, can be removed by
brushing against the direction of hair with a damp brush.
Always clean all parts of the covers, so that there are no visible edges. Then
allow the seat to dry completely.
CAUTION
Regularly remove dust from the seat covers using a vacuum cleaner.
Electrically heated seats must not be dried after cleaning by switching on the
heater.
■ Do not sit on wet seats - risk of seat deformation.
■ Always clean the seats “from seam to seam”.
■
■
Seat belts

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 176.
The belt webbing must always be kept clean.
Wash dirty seat belts with mild soapy water.
Remove coarse dirt with a soft brush.
Dirty belt webbing may impair the correct functioning of the inertia reel.
WARNING
The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning.
Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could
destroy the fabric.
■
■

WARNING (Continued)
The seat belts must not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive
liquids (e.g. acids).
■ Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If any damage
to the belt webbing, seat belt connections, inertia reel or lock is detected,
the seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage.
■ The seat belts must be fully dried before being rolled up.
■
Inspecting and replenishing
Fuel

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
180
180
181
Refuelling
Unleaded petrol
Diesel fuel
The correct grades of fuel for your vehicle are stated on a sticker affixed to the
inside of the fuel filler flap » fig. 159 on page 180 - .
WARNING
The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare canister in the vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your
vehicle for safety reasons. in the event of an accident, these canisters can
become damaged and fuel may escape – risk of fire!
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of
fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in considerable damage to parts of
the engine and the exhaust system.
■ Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
risk of paint damage!
■ If the vehicle was not purchased in the country where it was intended to be
operated, you should check whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is
offered in the country where the vehicle will be operated. You should also perhaps check whether the manufacturer has recommended a different fuel for
operation of the vehicle in the corresponding country. Is this not the case, then
you must check whether it is permitted by the manufacturer to operate the vehicle with another fuel type.
■
Inspecting and replenishing
179
Notice
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres, containing a reserve of approx.
10.5 litres.
Refuelling
Unleaded petrol

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 179.
Your vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol in compliance with the
EN 2281) standard.
All petrol engines can be operated using petrol that contains at most 10% bioethanol (E10).
Fig. 159 Open tank lid / tank cap

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 179.
Before refuelling, switch off the auxiliary heating system (auxiliary heating and
ventilation) » page 117.
› Unlock the vehicle.
› Press on the fuel filler flap in the direction of the arrow » fig. 159 - .
› Unscrew the filler cap by turning it in a counter-clockwise direction and place
the cap onto the top of the fuel filler flap » fig. 159 - .
› Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler tube as far as it will go.
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
time » .
› Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler tube and put it back in the
pump.
› Insert the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and screw it in a clockwise direction until it clicks into place.
› Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.
Check that the fuel filler flap is closed properly.
CAUTION
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
time, provided the nozzle has been operated properly. Do not continue filling
the fuel tank otherwise the expansion volume is filled up.
1)
In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 91 or 95 or DIN 51626-2 or E5
for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98.
180 General Maintenance
Required fuel - unleaded petrol 95/91 or 92 or 93 RON
Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON. Unleaded petrol with the
octane ratings 91, 92 or 93 RON can also be used, but may result in a slight
loss in performance.
Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol min. 95 RON
Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON or higher.
In case of necessity, you can refuel with petrol with the octane ratings 91, 92
or 93 RON, if petrol with the octane rating 95 RON is not available » .
Prescribed fuel - unleaded fuel 98/95 RON
Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 98 RON or higher. Unleaded petrol
95 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance.
In case of necessity, you can refuel with petrol with the octane ratings 91, 92
or 93 RON, if unleaded fuel with octane rating 98 RON or 95 RON is not available » .
Fuel additives
Unleaded petrol in accordance with the EN 228 standard1) meets all the conditions for a smooth-running engine. We therefore recommend that no fuel additives are used. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine
or the exhaust system.

CAUTION
Even filling the tank with leaded petrol that does not meet the standards
once can lead to serious damage to parts of the exhaust system!
■ If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned
standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is used by mistake, do not start the engine or
switch on the ignition! Extensive damage to engine parts can occur! We recommend that you have the fuel system cleaned by a specialist garage.
■
CAUTION
If, in an emergency, the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower octane number than the one prescribed, the journey must only be continued at
medium engine speeds and a low engine load. Driving at high engine revs or a
high engine load can severely damage the engine! Refuel using petrol of the
prescribed octane number as soon as possible.
■ Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the
one prescribed is used.
■ Even in the event of an emergency, petrol of a lower octane number than 91
RON must not be used, otherwise the engine can be severely damaged!
■
CAUTION
In no case may fuel additives with metal components be used, especially not
with manganese and iron content. LRP(lead replacement petrol) fuels with
metallic components may not be used. There is a risk of causing considerable
damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system!
■ Fuels with metallic content may not be used. There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system!
■
Notice
■ Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the
engine can be used without limitations.
■ On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95/91, 92 or 93 RON, the use of
petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a noticeable power increase or a lower fuel consumption.
■ On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and reduce fuel consumption.
1)
2)
Diesel fuel

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 179.
Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that meets the EN 5901)
standard.
All diesel engines can be operated using diesel fuel with at most 7% biodiesel
(B7)2).
On the Indian market, your vehicle will only be able to run on diesel fuel compliant with standard IS 1460/Bharat IV. If diesel fuel which complies with this
standard is not available, you can refuel with diesel fuel according to standard
IS 1460/Bharat III in case of emergency.
Operation in winter - Winter-grade diesel fuel
In the cold season, only use “winter-grade diesel fuel” which will still operate
properly even at a temperature of -20 °C.
It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel
fuels available have a different temperature characteristic. ŠKODA Partners
and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with information regarding the diesel fuels available.
Preheating fuel
The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter preheating system. This secures operation of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of
-25 °C.
Diesel fuel additives
Additives, so-called “flow improvers ” (petrol and similar agents) should not be
mixed with the diesel fuel. This can cause serious damage to engine or exhaust system parts.
In Germany also DIN 51628, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in Russia GOST R 52368-2005 / EN 590:2004.
In Germany according to the DIN 52638 standard, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590.
Inspecting and replenishing
181

CAUTION
Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the
standard, can cause severe damage to parts of the engine, the fuel and exhaust system!
■ If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above mentioned standards (e.g. petrol) is used by mistake do not start the engine or
switch on the ignition! Extensive damage to engine parts can occur! We recommend that you have the fuel system cleaned by a specialist garage.
■ Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults.
■
CAUTION
■ Your vehicle cannot be operated with biofuel RME, therefore this fuel must
not be refuelled and driven. The use of biofuel RME can cause considerable
damage to parts of the engine or fuel system.
■ Do not mix any fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and similar
agents) into the diesel. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the
engine or the exhaust system!
Engine compartment

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Opening and closing the bonnet
Engine compartment overview
Radiator fan
Windscreen washer system
183
184
184
184
WARNING
Injuries or scolding or risks of accident or fire may occur when working in
the engine compartment. For this reason, it is essential to comply with the
warning instructions outlined below and with the general applicable safety
rules. The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area!
WARNING
Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment
■ Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key.
■ Firmly apply the handbrake.
182 General Maintenance
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gearshift lever into Neutral, or if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox, move the
selector lever into position P.
■ Allow the engine to cool.
■ Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant escaping from the
engine compartment – risk of scalding! Wait until no more steam or coolant
is escaping.
■
WARNING
Information for working in the engine room
■ All people, especially children, keep away from the engine compartment.
■ Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm. The fan might
suddenly start running!
■ Do not touch any hot engine parts – risk of burns!
■ Coolant is hazardous to health.
■ Avoid contact with the coolant.
■ Coolant vapours are harmful to health.
■ Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the
engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized!
■ When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir, cover it
with a cloth to protect your face, hands and arms from hot steam or hot
coolant.
■ If any coolant splashes into your eyes, immediately rinse out your eyes
with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible.
■ Always keep the coolant in the original container safe from people who
are not completely independent, especially in front of children - there is a
danger of poisoning!
■ If coolant is swallowed, consult a doctor immediately.
■ Never spill fluids on the hot engine. Such fluids (e.g. the antifreeze contained in the coolant) may ignite!
WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine running
■ Pay particular attention to rotating engine parts (e.g. V-ribbed belt, generator, radiator fan) and the high-voltage ignition system – risk to life!
■ Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system.

WARNING (Continued)
Avoid short circuits in the electrical system - particularly on the vehicle's
battery.
■ Always make sure that no jewellery, loose clothing or long hair can get
caught in rotating engine parts – risk to life! Always remove any jewellery,
tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before completing any
work.
Opening and closing the bonnet
■
WARNING
Information for working on the fuel system or the electrical system
■ Always disconnect the vehicle battery from the electrical system.
■ Do not smoke.
■ Never work near open flames.
■ Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby.
WARNING
■ Read and observe the information and warning instructions on the fluid
containers.
■ Always keep the working fluids in sealed original containers and safe
from people who are not completely independent, e.g. children.
■ If you intend to work underneath the vehicle, you must secure the vehicle
from rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks; the car
jack is not sufficient – risk of injury!
CAUTION
Always top up using the correct specification of fluids. This may result in major
operating problems and also vehicle damage!
For the sake of the environment
In view of the requirements for the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids
and the special tools and knowledge required for such work, we recommend
that fluids be changed by a specialist garage.
Notice
Please consult a specialist garage for any questions relating to fluids.
Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA Original Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges.
■
■
Fig. 160 Bonnet release lever/release lever

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 182.
Open flap
› Pull the release lever underneath the dash panel in the direction of the arrow 1 » fig. 160.
Before opening the bonnet, ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers
are correctly in place against the windscreen, otherwise the paintwork could
be damaged.
› Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow
2 and the bonnet is unlocked.
› Grasp the bonnet and lift up until it is held open by the pressurised gas
spring.
Close the flap
› Pull the bonnet down far enough to overcome the force of the pressurised
gas spring.
› Close the bonnet from a height of approximately 20 cm with a slight swing
WARNING
Check that the bonnet is closed properly.
If you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving, stop the
vehicle immediately and close the bonnet – risk of accident!
■
■
CAUTION
Never open the bonnet using the release lever » fig. 160.
Inspecting and replenishing
183
WARNING
After switching off the ignition, the fan may intermittently continue to operate for approx. 10 minutes.
Engine compartment overview
Windscreen washer system
Fig. 162
Engine compartment: Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Fig. 161 Principle sketch: Engine compartment

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and

auf Seite 182.
Explanation of graphic » fig. 161
1 Coolant expansion reservoir
2 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
3 Engine oil filler opening
4 Engine oil dipstick
5 Brake fluid reservoir
6 Battery (below a cover)
188
184
186
186
189
189
Radiator fan
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 182.
The radiator fan is powered by an electric motor. Operation is controlled according to the temperature of the coolant.
1)
In some countries, 5.5 ltr. applies for both variants.
184 General Maintenance
and
auf Seite 182.
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment » fig. 162.
Notice
The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and
diesel engines is practically identical.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
This contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or rear window and for the
headlight cleaning system.
The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 litres or about 5.5 litres on vehicles that
have a headlight cleaning system1).
Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights. We recommend using clean water together with a screen cleaner from
the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories (with antifreeze in winter), which will
remove any stubborn dirt.
In Winter, the washing water should always be mixed with antifreeze even if
the vehicle has heated windscreen washer nozzles.
Under exceptional circumstances, methylated spirits can also be used if no
screen cleaner with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methylated
spirits must not be more than 15 %. The freeze protection at this concentration

is sufficient only to -5 °C.
WARNING
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the engine compartment » page 182.
■ Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top
up the engine oil . Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
■ If the oil level is above level A » fig. 163 on page 186,  do not continue
to drive! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
CAUTION
Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added
to the windscreen washer fluid.
■ If the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system, only cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be
added to the windscreen washer fluid.
■ Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when refilling, as this may cause contamination of the liquid transportation system,
leading in turn to a windscreen washer system malfunction.
■
Engine oil

CAUTION
Do not pour any additives into the engine oil – risk of serious damage to the
engine parts!
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Specifications and capacity
Checking the oil level
Replenishing
Changing
■
185
186
186
186
The engine has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil that can be use
throughout the year - except in extreme climate zones.
The engine oils are undergoing continuous further development. Thus the information stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the time of publication.
ŠKODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by the manufacturer. We therefore recommend that the oil change be completed by a
ŠKODA Service Partner.
The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following can be indicated separately or together with other specifications on the bottle.
The oil capacities include oil filter change. Check the oil level when filling; do
not over fill. The oil level must be between the markings » page 186.
Notice
Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle.
■ We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
■ If your skin has come into contact with oil, it must be washed thoroughly.
■
Specifications and capacity

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 185.
Specifications and capacity (in l) for vehicles with fixed service intervals
Petrol engine
1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI
Diesel enginea)
2.0 ltr/103 kW TDI CR DPF
a)
Specification
Filling level
VW 502 00
4.6
Specification
Filling level
VW 507 00
4.3
Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF.
Inspecting and replenishing

185
CAUTION
If the above engine oils are not available, a different engine oil can be used in
an emergency. To prevent damage to the engine, a maximum of 0.5 litres only
of the following engine oils may be used until the next oil change:
■ For petrol engine models: ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or API SN/API SM;
■ For diesel engine models: ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
■
Checking the oil level
Fig. 163
Principle sketch: Dipstick
The engine consumes a little oil. The oil consumption may be as much as 0.5 l/
1 000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which
you operate your vehicle. Consumption may also be higher than this during the
first 5000 kilometres.
The oil level must be checked at regular intervals. We recommend after each
time you refuel or prior to making a long journey.
We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range A , but not above, if
the engine has been operating at high loads, for example, during a lengthy
motorway trip during the summer months, towing a trailer or negotiating a
high mountain pass.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster will indicate whether the oil level
is too low » page 35,  Engine oil level. Check the oil level using the dipstick
as soon as possible. Add oil accordingly.
CAUTION
The oil level must not exceed level A » fig. 163 - risk of damaging the exhaust
system!

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 185.
Replenishing
The dipstick indicates the engine oil level » fig. 163.

Checking the oil level
Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has
reached its operating temperature.
› Check the oil level » page 186.
› Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening » fig. 161 on page 184.
› Replenish the oil in portions of 0.5 litres in accordance with the correct speci-
› Switch off the engine.
Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough.
› Open the bonnet.
› Pull out the dipstick.
› Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop.
› Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level.
Oil level within range A
No oil must be refilled.
Oil level within range B
Oil can be refilled. Afterwards, the oil level can lie in the range A .
Oil level within range C
The engine must be topped up with oil so that the oil level at least reaches the
range B .
186 General Maintenance
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 185.
fications » page 185.
› Check the oil level » page 186.
› Carefully screw on the oil filler opening cap and push the dipstick in fully.
Changing

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 185.
The engine oil must be changed according to prescribed service intervals or according to the » service interval schedule.
Vehicles exported to countries with a mild climate are already factory-filled
with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about -25 ℃. In
these countries, the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 40%.
CAUTION
The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must never be under
40%.
■ Over 60% of coolant additive in the coolant reduces the antifreeze protection and cooling effect.
■ A coolant additive that does not comply with the correct specifications can
significantly reduce the corrosion protection.
■ Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can consequently result in major engine damage!
■ Do not fill the coolant above the mark A » fig. 164 on page 188.
■ If a fault causes the engine to overheat, we recommend visiting a specialist
garage, as otherwise serious engine damage may occur.
■ Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
■ Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate are already factory-filled
with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about -35 °C. In
these countries, the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50%.

Coolant

■
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Capacity
Checking the coolant level
Replenishing
187
188
188
The coolant consists of water with coolant additive. This mixture guarantees
antifreeze protection, protects the cooling/heater system against corrosion
and prevents lime formation.
If a higher concentration of antifreeze is required for climatic reasons, the concentration of coolant additive can be increased up to a maximum of 60% (antifreeze protection down to approx. -40 °C).
When refilling, only use antifreeze with the name specified on the coolant expansion tank » fig. 164 on page 188.
WARNING
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the engine compartment » page 182.
■ Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to fill
with coolant under the current circumstances . Switch off the engine and
seek assistance from a specialist garage.
Capacity
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Coolant capacity (in litres)1)
Petrol engine
1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI
Diesel engine
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR
and
auf Seite 187.
Filling level
8.6
Filling level
8.4
■
1)
The coolant capacity is approximately 1 l greater on vehicles that are fitted with an auxiliary heater (auxiliary heating and ventilation).
Inspecting and replenishing
187
Replenishing
Checking the coolant level
Fig. 164
Engine compartment: Coolant
expansion reservoir

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 187.
Only top up with new coolant.
› Switch off the engine.
› Allow the engine to cool.
› Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and unscrew the
cap carefully.
› Replenish the coolant.
› Turn the cap until it clicks into place.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 187.
The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment » fig. 164.
Explanation of graphic » fig. 164
A
B
Mark for the maximum coolant level.
Mark for the lowest permissible level of coolant.
The coolant level should be kept between marks A and B .
If the coolant level is above the mark A , no coolant may be used to fill up.
If the coolant level is below mark B , coolant must be used to fill up.
Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available in an
emergency. In this case, use just water and have the correct mixing ratio of
water and coolant additive restored by a specialist garage as soon as possible.
Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid level
Changing
Check the status
■
Check the coolant level only when the engine is cold.
If the engine is warm, the test result may be inaccurate. The level can also be
at mark A » fig. 164.
Loss of coolant
A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system. Do
not merely top up the coolant. Have the cooling system checked by a specialist
garage.
188 General Maintenance
189
189
WARNING
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the engine compartment » page 182.
■ If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking » fig. 165 on
page 189,  do not continue your journey - risk of accident! Seek help
from a specialist garage.
■ Do not use used brake fluid - the function of the brake system may be impaired – risk of accident!
› Switch off the engine.
› Open the bonnet.
› Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle. » fig. 164.
If the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank is too low, this is indicated by
the warning light  lighting up in the instrument cluster » page 34,  Coolant.
We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from
time to time.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
CAUTION
Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.
■
■
Notice
The brake fluid is changed as part of a compulsory inspection service.
We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
The brake fluid must comply with the following standards or specifications:
Checking the brake fluid level
Fig. 165
Engine compartment: Brake fluid
reservoir
› VW 50114;
› FMVSS 116 DOT4.
Vehicle battery

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 188.
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment » fig. 165.
› Switch off the engine.
› Open the bonnet.
› Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir » fig. 165.
The level must be between the “MIN” and “MAX” markings.
A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear-andtear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads.
There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the fluid
level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” marking.
If the brake fluid level is too low, this is shown by the indicator light
 » page 33,  Brake system lighting up in the instrument cluster.
Changing

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 188.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Over time it therefore absorbs moisture from the
environment.
Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake
system.
The water content lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid.
Open cover
191
Checking the battery electrolyte level
191
Charging
192
Replace
192
Disconnecting or reconnecting
192
Automatic load deactivation
193
Warning symbols on the vehicle battery
Symbol
Importance





Always wear eye protection.
Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye protection.
Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the
vehicle battery.
When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture
is produced.
Keep children away from the vehicle battery.
WARNING
There is risk of injuries, poisoning, chemical burns, explosions or fire when
working on the battery and on the electrical system. It is essential to comply with the general applicable safety rules as well as the warning instructions outlined below.
■ Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely independent, especially children.
Inspecting and replenishing
189

WARNING (Continued)
Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
battery vent openings. Protect your eyes by wearing safety goggles or a
face shield – risk of blindness!
■ Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling
the vehicle battery.
■ The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be handled
with the greatest of care.
■ Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs.
■ Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and, if it comes into contact with the
skin, causes deep wounds that take a long time to heal. Repeated contact
with diluted acids causes skin diseases (inflammations, ulcers, slin cracks).
■ If any battery acid comes into contact with your eyes, rinse the affected
eye immediately with clean water for several minutes and consult a doctor
immediately!
■ Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as
possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water. If you swallow battery acid, consult a doctor immediately!
WARNING (Continued)
Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices.
Strong sparking represents a risk of injury.
■ Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch off the engine, the ignition and all electrical components and disconnect the negative
terminal (-) on the battery.
■
■
WARNING
It is prohibited to work with naked flames or lights.
It is prohibited to smoke or carry out any activities that produce sparks.
■ Never use a damaged vehicle battery – risk of explosion!
■ Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery – risk of explosion and
chemical burns!
■ Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels – risk of
explosion and chemical burns.
■
■
WARNING
When you charge a battery, hydrogen is released, and a highly explosive
gas mixture is also produced. An explosion can be caused through sparkling
over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is
on.
■ Creating a bridge between the poles on the battery (e.g. with a metal object or cable) creates a short circuit - risk of melting the lead bars, and risk
of explosion, battery fire and acid splashes.
■
190 General Maintenance
CAUTION
Improper handling of the battery can lead to damage. We recommend having
all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a specialist garage.
CAUTION
The vehicle battery must only be disconnected if the ignition is switched off,
otherwise the vehicle's electrical system (electronic components) can be damaged. When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system, first of all
disconnect the negative terminal (-) of the battery, followed by the positive
terminal (+).
■ When connecting the battery to the electrical system, first of all connect the
positive terminal (+) of the battery, followed by the negative terminal (-). Under
no circumstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly – risk of a
cable fire.
■ Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork – risk
of damage to the paintwork.
■ Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle battery housing from the effects of ultra-violet light.
■ If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery will
discharge. This is because certain electrical components consume electricity
(e. g. control units) also in idle state. Prevent the battery from discharging by
disconnecting the battery's negative terminal (-) or continuously charging the
battery with a very low charging current.
■ If the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips, the vehicle battery
will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge.
■
For the sake of the environment
A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste.
These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations.
Notice
You should replace batteries older than 5 years.
Checking the battery electrolyte level
Open cover
Fig. 167
Vehicle battery: Electrolyte level
indicator
Fig. 166 Engine compartment: Polyester cover of the vehicle battery/
plastic cover of the vehicle battery

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 189.
The battery is located in the engine compartment in a polyester cover
1 » fig. 166, in a plastic cover 2 » fig. 166 or in the left side of the
boot » page 99.
When working on the battery, the edge of the polyester battery cover
1 » fig. 166 is inserted between the battery and the side wall of the battery
cover.
Battery in the engine compartment
› Open the battery cover in the direction of the arrow 1 or press the interlock
on the side of the battery cover in the direction of the arrow 2 » fig. 166,
fold the cover up and remove.
The battery cover is installed in reverse order.
Battery in the boot
The battery is located in the left side compartment with the symbol
 » page 99.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 189.
On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator » fig. 167, the
electrolyte level can be determined by looking at the change in colour.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully
knock on the indicator before carrying out the check.
› Black colour - electrolyte level is correct.
› Colourless or light yellow colour - electrolyte level too low, the battery must
be replaced.
Vehicles with a START-STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for
checking the energy level for the recurring engine start.
We recommend that you have the acid level checked regularly by a specialist
garage, especially in the following cases.
› High external temperatures.
› Longer day trips.
› After each charge.
Winter time
The vehicle battery only has a proportion of the starting power in lower temperatures. A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures
just below 0 °C.
We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and, if necessary,
recharged by a specialist garage before the start of the winter.
Inspecting and replenishing
191

Notice
The battery acid level is also checked regularly by a specialist garage as part
of the inspection service.
■ For technical reasons, on vehicles with the description “AGM”, the electrolyte
level cannot be checked.
■
Charging

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 189.
A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine.
› Switch off the ignition and all of the electrical components.
› Only when performing a “quick-charge”, disconnect both battery cables (first
“negative”, then “positive”).
› Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals (red =
“positive”, black = “negative”).
› Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the
device.
› After charging has been successful: Switch off the charger and remove the
mains cable from the power socket.
› Only then disconnect the charger's terminal clamps.
› Reconnect the cables to the battery (first “positive”, then “negative”).
It is not necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you recharge the
vehicle battery using low amperages (for example from a mini-charger). Refer
to the instructions of the charger manufacturer.
A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or lower) must be used until full charging is achieved.
It is necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with high
amperages, known as “rapid charging”.
The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging.
WARNING
“Quick-charging” the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special
charger and specialist knowledge.
CAUTION
On vehicles with the START/STOP system, the pole terminal of the charger
must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery,
but only to the engine earth » page 208, Jump-starting in vehicles with the
START-STOP system.
Notice
We therefore recommend that vehicle batteries be rapid charged by a specialist garage.
Replace

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 189.
The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and the
same size as the original Battery. Suitable vehicle battery types can be purchased from a specialist garage.
We recommend having the battery replaced by a specialist garage, where the
new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be
disposed of in accordance with national regulations.
Disconnecting or reconnecting

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 189.
On disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery the following functions
are initially deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault-free.
Operation
Operating measure
Electrical power window (operational faults) » page 62
Panoramic sliding roof (operational faults)
» page 214
» User manual of the radio
Enter the radio/navigation system code
or » user manual of the naviganumber
tion system
Setting the clock
» page 30
Data in the multifunction display are de» page 41
leted.
Notice
We recommend having the vehicle checked by a specialist garage in order to
ensure full functionality of all electrical systems.
192 General Maintenance
Automatic load deactivation

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
Wheels
and
auf Seite 189.
The vehicle voltage control unit automatically prevents the battery from discharging when the battery is put under high levels of strain. This manifests itself by the following.
› The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to
the electrical system.
› Where necessary, large convenience consumers such as seat heaters and
rear window heaters have their power limited or are shut off completely in
the event of an emergency.
CAUTION
Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management, the
vehicle battery may be drained. For example, when the ignition is switched on
a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned
on during longer parking.
■ Consumers that are supplied via a 12-V power socket can cause the vehicle
battery to discharge when the ignition is switched off.
■
Notice
Driving comfort is not impaired by consumers being deactivated. The driver is
often not aware of it having taken place.
Tyres and wheel rims

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
194
195
196
196
197
198
198
198
Service life of tyres
New tyres
Unidirectional tyres
Tyre pressure monitor
Spare and emergency wheel
Full wheel trim
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts
WARNING
The national legal regulations must be observed for the use of tyres.
WARNING
Instructions for the use of tyres
■ For the first 500 km, new tyres do not yet provide optimum grip, and appropriate care should therefore be taken when driving – risk of accident!
■ Only use radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and
tread pattern on all four wheels.
■ For reasons of driving safety, do not replace tyres individually.
■ Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity for fitted
tyres – risk of accident!
■ Never exceed the maximum permissible speed for fitted tyres – risk of accident!
■ Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear impairs handling – risk of
accident!
■ Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of
tyre damage. If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged, immediately reduce your speed and stop! If no external damage is evident, drive slowly
and carefully to the nearest specialist garage to have the vehicle checked.
■ Only use tyres or wheel rims that have been approved by ŠKODA for your
model of vehicle. Failure to observe this instruction may impair the road
safety of your vehicle – risk of accident!
Wheels
193

WARNING
Information regarding tyre damage or wear
■ Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age.
■ Never drive with damaged tyres – risk of accident!
■ Immediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres.
■ You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the
wear indicators have been worn down.
■ Worn tyres impair necessary adhesion to the road surface, particularly at
high speeds on wet roads. This could lead to “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled
vehicle movement – “swimming” on a wet road surface).
WARNING
Information on tyre pressure
■ The tyre control display does not absolve the driver of the responsibility
to ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure. Check the tyre inflation pressure at regular intervals.
■ Insufficient or excessive inflation pressure impairs handling – risk of accident!
■ If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre will have to overcome a higher
rolling resistance. This will cause a significant increase in the temperature
of the tyre, especially at higher speeds. This can result in tread separation
and a tyre blowout.
WARNING
Information on the wheel bolts
■ The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily. Never treat them
with grease or oil.
■ The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
■ If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim
can come loose when the car is moving – risk of accident! A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result
in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim.
■ In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can loosen
when the car is moving – risk of accident!
WARNING
Information on the spare wheel
■ Only use the spare wheel while absolutely necessary.
■ Never drive with more than one spare wheel mounted.
■ The snow chains cannot be used on the spare wheel.
CAUTION
If a spare wheel is used that is not identical to the fitted tyres, the following
must be observed » page 197, Spare and emergency wheel.
■ Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuel.
■ Replace lost valve caps.
■ If, in the event of a puncture, it is necessary to fit a spare wheel with a tyre
without a dedicated running direction or with the opposite direction of rotation, drive carefully as the optimal characteristics of the tyre are no longer applicable in this situation.
■
For the sake of the environment
Tyres that are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption.
Notice
We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a specialist garage.
■ We recommend that you use wheel rims, tyres, full wheel trims and snow
chains from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
■
Service life of tyres
Fig. 168 Principle sketch: Tyre tread with wear indicators/open fuel filler
flap with a table detailing the tyre sizes and tyre inflation pressures
194 General Maintenance

Fig. 169
Replacing wheels
Tyre damage
Drive over kerbs and other such obstacles slowly and at right angles wherever
possible in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims.
We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures,
cuts, splits and bulges, etc.) on a regular basis. Remove foreign bodies (e.g.
small stones) from the tyre tread immediately.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 193.
The service life of tyres depends on the inflation pressure, driving style and
other circumstances. Following the advice below can extend the service life of
your tyres.
Tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressure, including that of the spare wheel, at least once a
month and also before setting off on a long journey.
The tyre pressures for tyres are shown on the inside of the fuel filler
flap » fig. 168 - .
The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle
at all times.
Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
higher pressure of warm tyres.
With greater additional load, adjust the tyre inflation pressure accordingly.
Driving style
Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres.
Balancing wheels
The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. When driving, however, there are a
range of factors that may result in an imbalance. This may become apparent by
a “vibration” in the steering.
Have the wheels rebalanced after replacing the tyres.
Wheel alignment errors
Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear leads to excess wear of the
tyres.
Replacing wheels
If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres, we recommend replacing the front wheels with the rear wheels as shown in the diagram » fig. 169 . You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the
tyres.
We recommend that you swap the tyres every 10,000 km in order to achieve
even wear on all tyres and to ensure optimal service life for the tyres.
Storing tyres
Identify disassembled tyres so that the previous direction of rotation can be
maintained if the tyres are reassembled.
Always store wheels or tyres in a cool, dry place that is as dark as possible.
Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright.
Wear indicators
The base of the tread of the tyres has 1.6 mm high wear indicators installed.
These wear indicators are evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre,
depending on the make » fig. 168 - . Markings on the walls of the tyres
through the letters “TWI”, triangular symbols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators.
Tyre age
Tyres age and lose their original characteristics, even if they are not being
used. Therefore, we recommend not using summer or winter tyres older than
6 or 4 years old respectively.
New tyres

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 193.
Only use radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and tread
pattern on one axle on all four wheels.
The tyre/wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in your vehicle documents.
Wheels
195

Where possible, replace tyres by axle. Always fit the tyres with the deeper
tread depth to the front wheels.
Explanation of tyre markings
205/55 R 16 94 V
What this means is:
205
55
R
Tyre width in mm » fig. 168 on page 194 - 
Height/width ratio in % » fig. 168 on page 194 - 
Code letter for the type of tyre – Radial » fig. 168 on page 194 
16
94
V
Diameter of wheel in inches » fig. 168 on page 194 - 
Load index »
Speed symbol »
The date of manufacture is stated on the tyre wall (possibly on the inside). e.g.
DOT ... 11 14 ..
means, for example, that the tyre was manufactured in the 11th week of 2014.
Load index
This indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual tyre.
91
615 kg
92
630 kg
93
650 kg
94
670 kg
95
690 kg
97
730 kg
99
775 kg
Speed symbol
This indicates the maximum permissible vehicle speed with fitted tyres in each
category.
M
130 km/h
Q
160 km/h
R
170 km/h
S
180 km/h
T
190 km/h
U
200 km/h
H
210 km/h
196 General Maintenance
V
W
Y
240 km/h
270 km/h
300 km/h
CAUTION
The information about the load index and the speed symbol is listed in your
vehicle documents.
Unidirectional tyres

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 193.
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the
tyre.
The indicated direction of rotation must be adhered to in order to ensure the
optimal characteristics of these tyres.
These characteristics mainly relate to the following:
› Increased driving stability.
› Reduced risk of aquaplaning.
› Reduced tyre noise and tyre wear.
Tyre pressure monitor
Fig. 170
Button for setting the tyre inflation pressure control value

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 193.
System settings
After changing the tyre inflation pressure, after changing one or several
wheels, the position of a wheel on the vehicle (e.g. exchanging the wheels between the axles) or when the warning light lights up while driving, a system
configuration must be carried out as follows.
› Inflate all of the tyres to the specified inflation pressure » page 195.

› Switch on the ignition.
› Press the symbol button  » fig. 170 for longer than 2 seconds.
Spare and emergency wheel
If the warning light  lights up and does not go out after the system configuration, this indicates a system fault.
Fig. 171
Securing the spare or emergency
wheel
If the warning light flashes , there is a system fault.
Tyre pressure indicator
The warning light  lights up when any of the following conditions are
present.
› The tyre inflation pressure is low.
› The structure of the tyre is damaged.
› The vehicle is loaded on one side.
› The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
when driving uphill or downhill).
› Snow chains are mounted.
› The spare wheel is mounted.
› One wheel per axle was changed.
WARNING
When the warning light  illuminates, immediately reduce speed and
avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible and inspect the tyres and their inflation pressure.
■ Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved roads), the warning light  can be delayed or does not light up at all.
■
CAUTION
The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss, e.g.
in case of sudden tyre damage. In this case carefully bring the vehicle to a
standstill without sudden steering movements or sharp braking.
■ To ensure a proper functioning of the tyre control display, it is necessary to
repeat the basic setting every 10000 km or once a year.
■ The tire pressure monitor does not replace the need for regular tire pressure
testing.
■

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 193.
The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is
fixed in place with a special bolt » fig. 171.
Take out the wheel
› Open the boot lid.
› Raise the floor covering in the boot » page 98.
› Remove the box with the tool kit.
› Unscrew the bolt » fig. 171 in a counter-clockwise direction.
› Take out the wheel.
Stow the wheel
› Place the wheel into the spare wheel well with the wheel rim pointing downward.
› Screw the bolt » fig. 171 in a clockwise direction until the wheel is safely secured.
› Place the box with the tool kit back into the spare wheel and secure it with
the tape.
› Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment.
› Close the boot lid.
Fit a wheel in the appropriate dimensions and design as soon as possible.
If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to
the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres or low-profile tyres), it must only be used briefly
in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is
adopted » .
Emergency spare wheel
A warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel.
Wheels

197
Please note the following if you intend to use the temporary spare wheel.
› The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel.
› Be particularly observant when driving.
› The temporary spare wheel is inflated to the maximum inflation pressure for
the vehicle » fig. 168 on page 194 .
› The tyre inflation pressure of the spare wheel R 18 is 420 kPa.
› Only use this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage,
as it is not intended for long-term use.
WARNING
Never drive with more than one spare wheel mounted!
Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged.
If the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the
tires fitted, never drive faster than 80 km/h (or 50 mph).
■ Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
■
■
■
CAUTION
Observe the instructions on the warning sign of the temporary spare wheel.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 193.
Installing
› Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening.
› Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks
correctly in place.
CAUTION
Use the pressure of your hand only, do not strike the full wheel trim. Avoid
heavy impacts when the trim has not yet been inserted into the wheel rim.
This could cause damage to the guide and centring elements of the trim.
■ When using the anti-theft wheel bolt, ensure that it is in the hole in the
valve area » page 204, Securing wheels against theft.
■ If wheel trims are retrofitted it must be ensured that an adequate flow of air
is assured to cool the brake system.
198 General Maintenance

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 193.
Extracting
› Push the extraction pliers » page 201 sufficiently far onto the cap until the
inner catches of the pliers are positioned at the collar of the cap.
› Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow » fig. 172.
Installing
Extracting
› Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit » page 201 into the reinforced
edge of the wheel trim.
› Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off
the wheel trim.
■
Fig. 172
Remove the cap
› Push the caps onto the wheel bolts up to the stop.
Full wheel trim

Wheel bolts
The wheel bolt caps are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel or in the
storage space for the spare wheel.
Wheel bolts

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 193.
Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. Each
time you fit other wheels rims, e.g. light alloy wheel rims or wheels with winter
tyres, you must also use the matching wheel bolts with the correct length and
dome shape. The right fastening of wheels depends on this.
Winter operation

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Winter tyres
Snow chains
199
199
Winter tyres
Fitting winter tyres will significantly improve the handling of your vehicle when
driving in wintry road conditions. Summer tyres have less grip on ice, snow and
at temperatures below 7 °C. This is especially true of vehicles fitted with wide
tyres or high-speed tyres.
CAUTION
The chains must be removed when driving on roads which are free of snow.
They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle, damage the tyres and are
rapidly destroyed.
■ Remove the full wheel trims » page 198 before installing the snow chains.
■
In order to achieve the best possible handling properties, winter tyres must be
fitted on all 4 wheels, the minimum tread depth must be 4 mm and tyres must
be no older than 4 years.
Winter tyres of a lower speed category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of these tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is higher.
The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the MAXI DOT display in the
menu item Winter tyres » page 44.
For the sake of the environment
Fit the summer tyres on again in good time as they provide better handling
properties, a shorter braking distance, less tyre noise, and reduced tyre wear
on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 °C.
The fuel consumption is also lower.
Snow chains
When driving in wintry road conditions, snow chains improve not only traction,
but also the braking performance.
Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.
For technical reasons, it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following wheel/tyre combinations.
Wheel size
7J x 16a)
6J x 16a)
6J x 17
a)
Depth (D)
45 mm
50 mm
45 mm
Tyre size
205/55
205/55
205/50
Not valid for vehicles with 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine.
Only use fine-link snow chains. They must not project more than 9 mm - including the chain lock.
Wheels
199
First-aid box
The compartment for stowing the first-aid box is located in the right of the
boot » fig. 173.
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help
Warning triangle
The warning triangle can be attached to the rear wall trim panel with rubber
straps » fig. 174.
Emergency equipment

Introduction
WARNING
The first-aid kit and warning triangle must always be secured safely so that
they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle
collision which could cause injuries to occupants.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
200
200
201
First aid kit and warning triangle
fire extinguisher
Vehicle tool kit
Notice
Pay attention to the expiration date of the first-aid kit.
We recommend using a first-aid kit from ŠKODA Original Accessories, which
are available from a ŠKODA Partner.
■
■
First aid kit and warning triangle
fire extinguisher
Fig. 175
Fire extinguisher
Fig. 173 Stowage compartment for the first aid kit: Superb / Superb Combi
Fig. 174
Placing of the warning triangle
The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a holder under the driver
seat.
Removing / attaching
› Loosen the two straps by pulling the buckles in the direction of the arrow » fig. 175.
› Remove the fire extinguisher.
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguisher.
200 Do-it-yourself

The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person once a year.
The national legal requirements must be observed.
4
WARNING
The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not
come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision
which could cause injuries to occupants.
6
5
7
8
9
10
Notice
The fire extinguisher must comply with national legal requirements.
Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. Proper functioning of the fire extinguisher is not assured once it has passed its expiry date.
■ The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only.
■
■
Vehicle tool kit
Towing eye
Clamps for removing the wheel trims
Car jack
Crank for the jack
Wheel wrench
Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps
Replacement bulb set
Screw the car jack back into its initial position after use in order to store it back
in the box with the vehicle tool kit.
WARNING
The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle.
Under no circumstances use it to lift heavier vehicles or other loads – risk of
injury!
■ Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the boot.
■ Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap.
■
Changing a wheel

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fig. 176 Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack are housed in a plastic box in the spare
wheel or in the storage space for the spare wheel. There is also space here for
the removable ball rod for the trailer towing device. The box is attached with a
strap on the spare wheel.
The components of the vehicle tool kit (depending on vehicle equipment) » fig. 176.
1
2
3
Screwdriver
Key for removing and installing the tail light
Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts
Preliminary work
Changing a wheel
Follow-up work
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts
Raising the vehicle
Securing wheels against theft
202
202
202
203
203
204
WARNING
If you are in flowing traffic, switch on the hazard warning light system
and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance! The national legal requirements must be observed.
■ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic. Park on
as flat and firm a surface as possible.
■ The following instructions must be followed if the vehicle is subsequently
fitted with tyres or rims that differ from the factory-fitted ones » page 195,
New tyres.
■
Emergency equipment and self-help
201

WARNING
Notes for vehicle lifting
■ If the wheel has to be changed on a slope, first of all block the opposite
wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away.
■ Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent
possible moving. A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move
the lifting jack, causing the vehicle to fall down. It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable
base. Use a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat) if the surface is smooth,
such as cobbled stones, tiled floor, etc.
■ Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this purpose.
■ Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
■ Never position any body parts, such as arms or legs under the vehicle,
while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack.
■ Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised – risk of injury.
WARNING
Information on the wheel bolts
■ The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily. Never treat them
with grease or oil.
■ The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
■ If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim
can come loose when the car is moving – risk of accident! A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result
in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim.
■ In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can loosen
when the car is moving – risk of accident!
Notice
The national legal requirements must be observed when changing a wheel.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 201.
Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible.
The following steps must be carried out before actually changing the wheel:
202 Do-it-yourself
occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road (they should instead
remain behind a crash barrier).
› Switch off the engine.
› Move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever for the automatic gearbox into position P.
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› Uncouple any trailers.
› Remove the vehicle tool kit » page 201 and the spare wheel » page 197 from
the boot.
Changing a wheel

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 201.
› Remove the full wheel trim » page 198 or caps » page 198.
› First of all slacken the anti-theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel
bolts » page 203.
› Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the
ground » page 203.
› Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper,
etc.).
› Remove the wheel carefully.
› Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts.
› Lower the vehicle.
› Alternately tighten wheel bolts opposite (diagonally) with the wheel wrench.
Tighten the anti-theft wheel bolt last » page 203.
› Replace the wheel trim or the caps.
Notice
All bolts must be clean and must turn easily.
Under no circumstances grease or oil the wheel bolts!
When fitting unidirectional tyres, ensure that the direction of rotation is correct » page 193.
■
■
■
Follow-up work
Preliminary work

› Have all of the occupants get out of the vehicle. While changing a tyre, the

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 201.
The following steps must also be performed after changing the wheel.
› Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special
bolt » page 197.

› Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the band.
› Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible.
› Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque
wrench as soon as possible.
› Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair options.
Notice
■ If it is determined that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn
when changing the wheel, the bolts must be replaced before checking the
tightening torque.
■ Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque
has been checked.
WARNING
Undo the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) provided that the vehicle
has not yet been jacked up. Otherwise the wheel could come off and fall
down – risk of injury!
Notice
If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end of the
wrench with your foodt. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and make
sure you keep your footing.
Raising the vehicle
Fig. 178
Jacking points for positioning
lifting jack
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts

Fig. 177
Changing a wheel: Loosening the
wheel bolts

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 201.
Release
› Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop1).
› Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn in the direction
of the arrow » fig. 177.
Tightening
› Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop1).
› Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt against the direction of the
arrow » fig. 177, until it is tight.
1)
Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti-theft wheel bolts » page 204.
Emergency equipment and self-help
203
Securing wheels against theft
Fig. 180
Principle sketch: Anti-theft
wheel bolt with adapter
Fig. 179 Attach lifting jack

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 201.
Position the lifting jack below the jacking point closest to the faulty
wheel » fig. 178. The jacking point is located directly below the engraving in
the lower sill.
› Insert the crank into the mount on the car jack » page 201.
› Position the lifting jack below the jacking point with the crank and move it up
until its claw is positioned below the vertical web of the lower sill.
› Align the lifting jack so that its claw grasps the web » fig. 179 - .
› Support the base plate of the lifting jack with its entire surface resting on
level ground and ensure that the lever is positioned vertically to the point at
which the claw grasps the web » fig. 179 - .
› Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the
ground.
■
■
WARNING
Only raise the vehicle at the attachment points.
Choose a flat and firm surface for jacking the vehicle.
204 Do-it-yourself

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 201.
The anti-theft wheel bolts can only be removed/tightened with the aid of the
adapter » page 201, Vehicle tool kit.
› Pry the cover off the anti-theft wheel bolt.
› Insert the adapter B » fig. 180 with its toothed side fully into the inner
toothing of the anti-theft wheel bolt A until the stop so that only the outer
hexagon is jutting out.
› Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter B up to the stop.
› Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt » page 203.
› After removing the adapter replace the cap on the anti-theft wheel bolt.
› Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible.
Notice
Make a note of the code number hammered into the rear side of the adapter
or the rear side of the anti-theft wheel bolt. This number can be used to purchase a replacement adapter from ŠKODA Original Parts if necessary.
■ We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with
you in the vehicle. It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit.
■ The anti-theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a ŠKODA
Partner.
■
Notice
Observe the manufacturer's usage instructions for the breakdown kit.
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Parts.
Immediately replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit, or
consult a specialist garage about repair options.
Tyre repair

■
■
■
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Breakdown kit
Preparations for using the breakdown kit
Sealing and inflating the tyre
Check after 10 minutes' driving
205
206
206
207
Breakdown kit
Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies
or a puncture with diameters up to approx. 4 mm.
A repair made using the breakdown kit is never intended to replace a permanent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist garage.
The wheel must not be removed during repair.
Do not remove foreign bodies, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances.
› There is damage to the rim.
› The outside temperature is less than -20 °C.
› The tears or punctures are greater than 4 mm in size.
› There is damage to the tyre wall.
› Driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre.
› If the use-by-date (see inflation bottle) has passed.
WARNING
■ A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard tyre.
■ Do not travel faster than 80 km/h.
■ Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
■ Check the tyre pressure after driving for 10 minutes.
■ The sealant is hazardous to heath. Remove immediately if it comes into
contact with the skin.
Fig. 181 Principle sketch: Components of the breakdown kit

auf Seite 205.
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compartment.
Components of the breakdown kit » fig. 181
1
2
3
4
5
6
For the sake of the environment
Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in
accordance with environmental protection regulations.
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
7
8
9
Valve remover
Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph”
Inflation hose with plug
Air compressor
Tyre inflation hose
Tyre inflation pressure indicator
Air release valve
ON and OFF switch
12 volt cable connector
Emergency equipment and self-help

205
10
11
› Firmly screw the inflation hose
Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent
Replacement valve core
The valve remover 1 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core.
This is the only way in which you can remove and re-install the valve core from
the tyre valve. The same also applies to the replacement valve core 11 .
Preparations for using the breakdown kit

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 205.
The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the breakdown kit.
› Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic. Park on as
flat and firm a surface as possible.
› If you are in flowing traffic, switch on the hazard warning light system and
set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance! The national legal requirements must be observed.
› Have all of the occupants get out of the vehicle. While changing a tyre, the
occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road (they should instead
remain behind a crash barrier).
› Switch off the engine and move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the
selector lever on the automatic gearbox into position P.
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit » page 205.
Uncouple any trailers.
› Remove the breakdown kit from the boot.
› Stick the sticker 2 » fig. 181 on page 205 onto the dash panel in the driver's
line of vision.
› Do not remove the foreign body, e.g. screw or nail, from the tyre.
› Unscrew the valve cap.
› Use the valve remover 1 to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean
surface (rag, paper, etc.).
Sealing and inflating the tyre

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 205.
Sealing
› Forcefully shake the tyre inflater bottle
forth several times.
206 Do-it-yourself
10
» fig. 181 on page 205 back and
3 onto the tyre inflator bottle 10 in a clockwise direction. The film on the cap is pierced automatically.
› Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto
the tyre valve.
› Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing
agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre.
› Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve.
› Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 1 .
Inflating
› Screw the air compressor tyre inflation hose 5 » fig. 181 on page 205 firmly
onto the tyre valve.
› Check that the air release valve 7 is closed.
› Start the engine and run it in idle.
› Plug the connector 9 into 12 Volt socket » page 89, Cigarette lighter.
› Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 .
› Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar is achieved.
Maximum run time of 8 minutes »
› Switch off the air compressor.
› If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation
hose 5 from the tyre valve.
› Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent
to “distribute” in the tyre.
› Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 5 back onto the tyre valve and repeat
the inflation process.
› If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either, this
means the tyre has sustained too much damage. You cannot seal with tyre
with the breakdown kit » .
› Switch off the air compressor.
› Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve.
Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar is reached, continue the journey
at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes » page 207.

WARNING
The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is being inflated – there is a risk of injury.
■ Do not place the hot tyre inflation hose or hot air compressor on flammable materials – there is a risk of fire.
■ If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bar, this means the damage
sustained was too serious. The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the
tyre.  Do not drive the vehicle. Seek help from a specialist garage.
WARNING
A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not jump start with the battery of another vehicle – there is a risk of explosion.
■ Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the engine compartment » page 182.
■ The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each
other – there is a risk of short circuit.
■ The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery
must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle
– there is a risk of short circuit.
■ Do not clamp the jump-start cable to the negative terminal of the discharged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery
being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being started.
■ Route the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating parts in the engine compartment.
■ Do not bend over the battery – there is a risk of caustic burns.
■ The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly.
■ Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering cigarettes, etc.)
away from the battery – risk of explosion!
■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels – risk of
explosion and chemical burns.
■
■
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest – there is a
risk of overheating. Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before
switching it on again.
Check after 10 minutes' driving

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 205.
Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes!
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or less
›  Do not drive the vehicle! You cannot properly seal with tyre with the
breakdown kit.
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or more
› Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the correct value (see inside of fuel filler
cap).
› Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
Jump-starting

CAUTION
There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current
may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected.
■ The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the vehicle.
■ We recommend you buy jump-start cables from a car battery specialist.
■
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
Jump-starting in vehicles with the START-STOP system
Jump-starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot
208
208
208
Emergency equipment and self-help
207
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
Fig. 182
Jump-starting: A – flat battery, B
– battery providing current

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
Negative cable - colour coding in the majority of cases is black.
Jump-starting in vehicles with the START-STOP system
Fig. 183
Engine earth: START-STOP system
auf Seite 207.
The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump-start your vehicle if the engine will not start because the battery is flat. Jump-start cables are required for
this purpose.
The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence.
› Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery
A » fig. 182 .
› Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying power B .
› Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying power B .
› Attach the clamp 4 to a solid metal component firmly connected to the engine block or to the engine block itself.

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 207.
On vehicles with the START-STOP system, the jump-start cable of the charger
must never be connected directly to the negative pole of the vehicle battery,
but only to the engine earth » fig. 183.
Jump-starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot
Fig. 184
Detail of the engine compartment: Jump-starting point
Starting engine
› Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle.
› Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
› If the engine does not start, halt the attempt to start the engine after 10 seconds and wait for 30 seconds before repeating the process.
› Disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order to the one described
above.
Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the battery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of
the discharged battery in your vehicle.
Jump-start cables
Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section and
insulated terminal clamps. Observe the instructions of the jumper lead manufacturer.
Positive cable - colour coding in the majority of cases is red.
208 Do-it-yourself

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 207.
On vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot, the positive terminal of the
battery supplying the power can only be connected to the jump-starting point
in the engine compartment of the vehicle being started by means of a jumpstart cable » fig. 184.
› Open the protective cap of the jump-starting point in the direction of the arrow » fig. 184.
› Connect the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power with the
jump-starting point.

› Attach the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power to a solid
If using a tow rope, ensure that it is always kept taught.
metal part firmly connected to the engine block or to the engine block itself.
› Start the engine.
› After starting the engine, close the protective cap of the jump-starting point.
Towing the vehicle

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front towing eye
Rear towing eye
Vehicles with a tow hitch
210
210
210
Vehicles with manual transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow
rope or with the front or rear wheels raised.
Vehicles with automatic transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow
rope or with the front wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the automatic gearbox is damaged!
A tow bar is the safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimises any shocks.
Only use a tow rope if a suitable tow bar is not available.
When towing, the following guidelines must be observed.
Driver of the tow vehicle
› Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the accelerator particularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
› On vehicles with a manual transmission, only push down on the accelerator
pedal once the rope is taught.
The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
Driver of the towed vehicle
› Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is not locked and so that
the turn signal lights, horn, windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system can be used.
› Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
CAUTION
Do not tow start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the
catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jumpstart aid » page 207, Jump-starting.
■ If the gearbox no longer contains any oil because of a defect, your vehicle
must only be towed with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground or on a
special breakdown vehicle or trailer.
■ The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer if it
is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km.
■ To protect both vehicles when tow-starting or towing, the tow rope should
be elastic. Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a
similarly elastic material.
■ While towing, take care to avoid impermissibly high tensile forces or jerky
loads. There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the
points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a
vehicle which is not standing on a paved road.
■ Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes » page 210, Front
towing eye or » page 210, Rear towing eye to the detachable ball head of the
towing equipment » page 163.
■
Notice
We recommend using a tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories, which is
available from a ŠKODA Partner.
■ Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice. Both drivers
should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle. Unskilled
drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in.
■ When towing, respect the national legal provisions, especially those which
relate to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed.
■ The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in
the front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle.
■
Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the
engine is running. If the engine is not running, significantly more physical force
is required to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle.
Emergency equipment and self-help
209

Front towing eye
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 209.
› Press onto the bottom part of the cap in the rear bumper » fig. 186 -  and
remove it.
› Screw in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop » fig. 186 - 
and tighten as much as possible. For tightening purposes, we recommend,
for example, using the wheel wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a
similar object that can be pushed through the eye.
› After unscrewing the towing eye, put the cap on and press into place. The
cap must engage firmly.
On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, there is no mount for the
screw-in towing eye behind the cap » page 210, Vehicles with a tow hitch.
Fig. 185 Removing the cap/installing the towing eye

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 209.
› Remove the cap from the front bumper » fig. 185 - .
› Screw in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop » fig. 185 - 
and tighten as much as possible. For tightening purposes, we recommend,
for example, using the wheel wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a
similar object that can be pushed through the eye.
› After unscrewing the towing eye, put the cap on and press into place. The
cap must engage firmly.
CAUTION
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.
Rear towing eye
CAUTION
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.
Vehicles with a tow hitch

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 209.
On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, there is no mount for the
screw-in towing eye behind the cap.
Use the built-in detachable ball rod for towing » page 163, Towing device.
Towing the vehicle using the towing device is a viable alternative solution to
using the towing eye.
If the towing device is removed completely, it must be replaced with the
standard reinforcement of the rear bumper which is part of the mount for the
towing eye.
If this procedure is not observed, the vehicle may not meet the national legal
provisions.
CAUTION
The detachable ball rod and/or the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable
tow bar is used.
Fig. 186 Removing the cap/installing the towing eye
210 Do-it-yourself
Notice
The detachable ball rod must always be in the vehicle so that it can be used for
towing, if necessary.
› Flip out the key.
› Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver in the
Radio remote control

region of the arrows 1 .
Introduction
› Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down in
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Replacing the battery in the remote control key
Synchronising the remote control
Replace the battery in the remote control of the auxiliary heater (parking
heater)
the region of the arrow 2 .
211
211
212
CAUTION
The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original
battery.
■ We recommend having faulty rechargeable batteries replaced by a ŠKODA
service partner.
■ When replacing the battery, pay attention to the correct polarity.
■
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions.
Replacing the battery in the remote control key
› Insert the new battery.
› Place the battery cover on the key and press it down until it clicks into place.
Notice
The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked
with the remote control key after replacing the battery » page 211.
■ If a key has an affixed decorative cover, this will be destroyed when the battery is replaced. A replacement cover can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
■
Synchronising the remote control

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 211.
If the vehicle does not unlock when pressing the remote control, the key may
not be synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the remote control
key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the
equipment or the battery in the remote control key was replaced.
Synchronise the key as follows.
› Press any button on the remote control key.
› Pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1
minute.
Fig. 187 Remove cover/take out battery

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 211.
The battery is located under a cover A » fig. 187.
We recommend having the key batteries replaced by a specialist garage. However, if you would like to replace the discharged battery yourself proceed as
follows.
Emergency equipment and self-help
211
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
Replace the battery in the remote control of the auxiliary heater
(parking heater)
Fig. 189
Handle on the driver's door: covered locking cylinder
Fig. 188
Radio remote control: Battery
cover

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
› Pull on the handle.
› Push the vehicle key into the recess on the bottom side of the cover in the
auf Seite 211.
region of the arrow and fold it upwards » fig. 189.
› Insert the vehicle key (the buttons facing upward) into the locking cylinder
The battery is located under a cover on the back of the radio remote control » fig. 188.
and lock/unlock the vehicle.
› Insert a flat, blunt object, such as a coin, into the gap of the battery cover.
› Turn the cover against the direction of the arrow up to the mark to open the
cover.
› Replace the battery.
› Return the battery cover.
› Turn the cover in the direction of the arrow up to the initial marking, engage.
CAUTION
Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency locking/unlocking.
Locking a door
Fig. 190
Left rear door: Emergency locking
Emergency unlocking/locking

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
Locking a door
Unlocking the tailgate
Selector lever-emergency unlocking
212
212
213
213
An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors
which have no locking cylinder, it is only visible after opening the door.
› Remove the panel A » fig. 190.
› Insert the key into the slot B and turn it into the horizontal position in the
direction of the arrow (mirror-inverted on the right doors).
› Replace the cover.
212
Do-it-yourself

After closing the door, it cannot be opened from the outside. The door is unlocked by pulling on the door opening lever and is then opened from the outside.
Selector lever-emergency unlocking
Unlocking the tailgate
Fig. 192 Selector lever-emergency unlocking
Fig. 191 Emergency unlocking: Superb / Superb Combi
Unlocking (Superb)
› Fold the rear seat backrest forward » page 85, Seat backrests.
› Insert the vehicle key into the slot in the trim panel as far as the
stop » fig. 191 - .
› Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
› Open the boot lid.
Unlocking (Superb Combi)
› Fold the rear seat backrest forward » page 85, Seat backrests.
› Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening of the trim as far as it
goes » fig. 191 - .
› Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
› Open the boot lid.
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› Grasp the cover 1 in the area of arrow
2 » fig. 192 and carefully pull upwards.
› Also unlock the cover on the other side.
› Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in the direction of the arrow 3 .
› At the same time, press the locking button in the selector lever and move
the selector lever to position N.
If the selector lever is moved again to position P, it is once again blocked.
Emergency operation of the sliding/tilting roof

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation
Activation after un-clamping and re-clamping the battery
Emergency equipment and self-help
214
214
213
Operation
Activation after un-clamping and re-clamping the battery
The panoramic sliding/tilting roof (referred to form now on as just the sliding/
tiling roof) and the sun screen must be activated after disconnecting and reconnecting the battery.
To activate the sliding/tilting roof, press the notch on the control dial downwards and forwards for approx. 10 seconds.
To activate the sun screen, press and hold the switch G » fig. 47 on page 64
for approx. 10 seconds.
Fig. 193 Point for positioning screwdriver/opening for positioning the key
The sliding/tilting roof can be closed or opened manually if a fault occurs. The
emergency operation of the sliding/tilting roof is located underneath the
glasses storage box 1 » page 91, Glasses storage box.
› Open the glasses storage box.
› Carefully insert an approximately 5 mm wide screwdriver into the slot in the
positions shown by the arrows 1 » fig. 193.
› Carefully fold the glasses storage box downwards by gently pressing down
and turning the screwdriver.
› Insert an Allen key, SW 4, up to the stop into the opening 2 and close or
open the sliding/tilting roof.
› Reinstall the glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs and then
pushing the entire part upwards.
Have the fault on the sliding tilting roof rectified as soon as possible by a specialist garage.
Notice
It is necessary after each emergency operation to move the sliding/tilting
roof into the basic position.1) This is why the rotary switch must be set to the
switch position A » fig. 45 on page 62 and pressed forward for about 10 seconds.
■ After each emergency operation, it is necessary to activate the
roof2) » page 214.
■
1)
2)
Applies to emergency operation of the Superb sliding/tilting roof.
Applies to emergency operation of the Superb Combi sliding/tilting roof.
214 Do-it-yourself
If the sliding/tilting roof or sun screen is not fully closed or pushed shut when
disconnecting and reconnecting the battery, they must first be closed or pushed shut » page 64, Opening/closing the sun screen » page 64, Operation. Only
then is it possible to perform the activation.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
WARNING
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons. These can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
215
215
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Fig. 195
Rear window wiper blade
Fig. 194
Windscreen wiper blade

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 214.
Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade, put the windscreen wiper arms
into the service position.
Service position for changing wiper blades
› Closing the bonnet.
› Switch the ignition off and on again.
› Within 10 seconds, press the lever in position 4 and hold it for around 2 seconds » fig. 62 on page 76.
The windscreen wiper arms move into the service position.
Removing the wiper blade
› Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen.
› Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and unlock the securing mechanism
1 » fig. 194.
› Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 2 .

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
auf Seite 214.
Removing the wiper blade
› Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen.
› Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and unlock the securing mechanism
1 » fig. 195.
› Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
2.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
› Push the windscreen wiper blade to the stop until it locks into place.
› Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.
› Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
› Push the windscreen wiper blade to the stop until it locks into place.
› Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.
› Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
› Turn on the ignition and press the lever into position 4 » fig. 62 on page 76.
The windscreen wiper arms move into the home position.
Emergency equipment and self-help
215
CAUTION
“Never repair” fuses or replace them with a fuse of a higher amperage – risk
of fire! This may also cause damage at another part of the electrical system.
■ If a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, have the electrical
system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage.
■ A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip. Replace the faulty
fuse with a new one of the same amperage.
Fuses and light bulbs
■
Fuses

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
216
218
218
Fuses in the dash panel
Fuses in the engine compartment
Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses.
Switch off the ignition and the corresponding power consuming device before
replacing a fuse.
Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operating » page 216, Fuses in the dash panel or » page 218, Assignment of fuses in
the engine compartment.
Notice
We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle. A box of
replacement fuses can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
■ There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse.
■ Multiple fuses may exist for a single power consuming device.
■
Fuses in the dash panel
Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers, which
switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been
eliminated.
Fuse colour
Maximum amperage
light brown
dark brown
red
blue
yellow
white
green
orange
red
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 182.
216 Do-it-yourself
Fig. 196 Cover of the fuse box in the control panel / fuses

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 216.
The fuses are located on the left side of the dash panel behind a cover.
Replacing fuses
› Remove the cover » fig. 196.
› Remove the plastic clip from the holder in the fuse box cover in the dash
panel.
› Clip it onto the respective fuse and pry out.
› Insert a new fuse.
› Return the clip to its original place.
› Re-insert the cover of the fuse box .

Fuse assignment in the dash panel
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Power consumer
Diagnostic socket, engine control unit, fuel pump relay, fuel pump
control unit
ABS control unit, ESC switch for tyre pressure warning, brake sensor, for START-STOP coil of the starter relay only
Switch and airbag control unit
WIV, tail lights, dimming mirrors, pressure sensor, telephone pre-installation
Control unit for headlight beam adjustment and headlight swivel,
control unit for parking aid, control unit for park assist
Instrument cluster, control unit for electromechanical power steering, selector lever lock, power supply for data bus
Heated opening of the crankcase ventilation, air flow meter
Control unit for trailer detection
Relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation
Adaptive left main headlight
Adaptive right main headlight
Not assigned
Diagnostic socket, light switch, rain sensor, clock
Central locking system and bonnet lid
Central control unit - interior lights
The air conditioning system
Not assigned
Phone
Instrument cluster, wind-shield wiper lever and turn signal lever,
the relay coil for heating wind-shield
KESSY
KESSY ELV
Air blower for Climatronic
Front power window, central locking of the front doors
Selector lever lock
Rear window heater, relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation
Power socket in the boot
No.
Power consumer
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Fuel pump relay, control unit for fuel pump, injection valves
Electric boot lid
Haldex
Climate controlled front seats
DVD pre-installation
Front power window, central locking system of the rear doors
Electric sliding/tilting roof
Alarm, spare horn
front and rear lighter
Headlight cleaning system
Heated front seats
38
39
Heated rear seats
Rear window wiper
Fan air-conditioning system, relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation
Not assigned
Light switch
Control unit for trailer detection
Control unit for trailer detection
Control unit for trailer detection
Switch for seat heating
Telephone preinstallation
Preparation for the aftermarket radio
Only for START-STOP: Central control unit, DC-DC converter, the
engine control unit
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Fuses and light bulbs
217
Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 197
Cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 216.
Fig. 198 Fuses: Type A / Type B
On some vehicles, the battery cover must be removed before removing the
cover for the fuse box » page 191.

Replacing fuses
› Move the safety catch of the cover of the fuse box A » fig. 197 in the direction of the arrow.
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment - version A
The symbol is displayed behind the catches .
› Remove the cover.
› Replace the appropriate fuse.
› Replace the cover on the fuse box and the safety clip
A move against the
arrow.
The symbol is displayed in front of the catches. .
The cover is locked into position.
CAUTION
The cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be applied
correctly. If the cover is not replaced properly, water may get into the fuse box
- leading to a risk of vehicle damage!
218 Do-it-yourself
Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 216.
No.
Power consumer
1
2
3-4
5
6-12
13
14
15
16
17
Front right main headlight, right tail light
Valves for ABS
Not assigned
Horn
Not assigned
Control unit for automatic gearbox
Not assigned
Coolant pump
Not assigned
Instrument cluster, windshield wiper lever and turn signal light lever
Audio amplifier (sound system)
Radio
Not assigned
Engine control unit
Data bus control unit
Not assigned
Fuel dosage valve
18
19
20-22
23
24
25-26
27

No.
a)
Power consumer
No.
Power consumer
28
29
30
31
32-37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Engine control unit
Main relay
Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit
Windscreen wipers
Not assigned
Radiator fan, valves
Clutch/brake pad sensor
Lambda probe
AKF valve
Lambda probe
Ignition
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
Engine control unit, Main relay
Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit
Data bus control unit
Engine control unit
Ignition
Lambda probe (petrol engine), glow plug system relay and fuel
pump (diesel engine)
Front right main headlight, right tail light
Horn
Audio amplifier (sound system)
Windscreen wipers
44-46
47
48
49
50-51
52
53
54
Not assigned
Front left main headlight, left tail light
Pump for ABS
Power supply for terminal 15 (ignition on)
Not assigned
Power supply relay - terminal Xa)
Power to the internal fuse carrier
Not assigned
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Valve for metering fuel, coolant pump, high pressure pump
Lambda probe
Clutch pedal switch
Coil of the coolant pump relay valves, high-pressure pump
Radiator fan
Pump for ABS
Front left main headlight, left tail light
Control unit for glow plug system
Windscreen heater
Power to the internal fuse carrier
Power supply for terminal 15 (ignition on)
15
In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical components of
this terminal are automatically switched off.
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment - version B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Power consumer
Not assigned
Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG
Measuring circuit
Valves for ABS
Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG
Not assigned
Power supply relay - terminal Xa)
Radio
Not assigned
a)
In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical components of
this terminal are automatically switched off.
Bulbs

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Headlights
Replacing the low beam bulb
Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights
Replacing bulb for main beam
Fuses and light bulbs
220
221
221
221 
219
Replacing the bulb for the fog light
Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light
Rear light (Superb Combi)
Replacing bulbs in rear light (Superb Combi)
221
222
222
223
Some manual skills are required to change a bulb. For this reason, we recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other expert help
in the event of any uncertainties.
We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage
after replacing a bulb in the main, low or fog beam.
■ In case of failure of a xenon gas discharge lamp or an LED diode, visit a specialist garage.
■
Headlights
› Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb.
› Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designation is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
› A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in
the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the boot.
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 182.
■ Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not sufficiently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty by other road users.
■ Bulbs H7 H8 and H15 are pressurised and may burst when changing the
bulb - risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
glasses when changing a bulb.
■ Gas discharge bulbs (xenon bulbs) operate with a high voltage, professional knowledge is required – risk of death!
■ Switch off the respective vehicle light when changing the bulb.
■
CAUTION
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest
amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth,
napkin, or similar.
Notice
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possible to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other
bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage.
■ We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the vehicle. Replacement bulbs can be purchased from ŠKODAOriginal Accessories.
■
220 Do-it-yourself
Fig. 199 Bulb arrangement: Headlight with halogen bulb/with Xenon bulb

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 220.
Headlight with halogen bulb
1 Low beam
2 Main beam, separate daytime running lights, and parking light
Headlights with Xenon light
3
4
Xenon gas discharge bulbs
Main beam
Replacing the low beam bulb
Replacing bulb for main beam
Fig. 200
Halogen headlight: Changing the
bulb for the low beam

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
› Remove the rubber cover 1
› Turn the plug with the bulb
and
auf Seite 220.
» fig. 199 on page 220.
A » fig. 200as far as the stop in the direction of
the arrow.
› Change the bulb.
› Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in an anti-clockwise direction as far as the stop.
› Insert the rubber cover 1 .
Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights
Fig. 201
Halogen headlight: Replacing
the bulb for main beam and separate daytime running lights

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
Fig. 202 Headlights with Xenon light: Changing the bulb for the main
beam

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 220.
› Unlock the protective cap in the direction of arrow 1 » fig. 202 and remove.
› Turn the plug with bulb C anti-clockwise to the stop and remove it.
› Change the bulb.
› Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in an anti-clockwise direction as far as the stop.
› Insert the protective cap in holder
2 and carefully push in.
The protective cover must engage firmly.
Replacing the bulb for the fog light
auf Seite 220.
› Remove the rubber cover 2 » fig. 199 on page 220 .
› Turn the bulb holder B » fig. 201 in the direction of the arrow as far as the
stop.
› Replace the bulb, insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in the
Fig. 203 Front bumper: Remove the protective grille/fog light

opposite direction to that of the arrow as far as it goes.
2 .
› Insert the rubber cover
Fuses and light bulbs
221
Fig. 204
Replacing the light bulb

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light
auf Seite 220.
Removing the protective grille
› Undo the protective grille in the area of the arrow » fig. 203 -  using the
clamp for removing the wheel trims » page 201, Vehicle tool kit .
› Remove the protective grille in the direction of the arrow 1 .
Changing light bulbs for fog lights
› Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the fog lamp » fig. 203 - .
› Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove the connector.
› Turn bulb holder A » fig. 204 in an anti-clockwise direction up to the stop
and remove.
› Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb into the headlight and turn in a
clockwise direction as far as the stop.
› Fit the connector.
› Replace the fog lamp by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow
2 » fig. 203 -  and screw tight.
› Insert the protective grille and carefully press it in.
Fig. 205 Remove the number plate light/replace the bulb

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 220.
› Open the boot lid.
› Push in the lamp in the direction of the arrow
1 » fig. 205.
The lamp comes loose.
› Swivel out the lamp in the direction of the arrow 2 and remove it.
› Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow
› Insert a new bulb into the holder.
› Reinsert the lamp in the opposite direction to the arrow 1 .
› Push on the light until the spring clicks into place.
3.
Check that the light is securely inserted.
Rear light (Superb Combi)
The protective grille must engage firmly.
Fig. 206 Removing: Cover/light
222 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION
Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when removing and installing the tail lamp.
Replacing bulbs in rear light (Superb Combi)
Fig. 208
Replacing the light bulb
Fig. 207 Seal expand / lighting connector

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 220.
Removing
› Open the boot lid.
› Insert the clamp for removing the wheel trims » page 201, Vehicle tool kit
into the hole at the position indicated by the arrow » fig. 206 - .
› Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow » fig. 206 - .
› Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the lamp » fig. 206 - .
› Grasp the rear light and carefully remove away from the direction of travel.
› Remove the rubber seal in the direction of arrow 1 » fig. 207 -  .
› Pull off the cable bundle with the plug cap » fig. 207 -  .
› Press together the interlocks on the connector in the direction of arrow
2 » fig. 207 - .
› Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp assembly in the direction
of the arrow 3 .

Lesen und beachten Sie zuerst
and
auf Seite 220.
› Turn the bulb holder
2 » fig. 208 in an anti-clockwise direction and remove
it from the lamp housing.
› Push the faulty bulb into the holder, turn in anti -clockwise direction up to
the stop and remove.
› Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the the
stop.
› Replace the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in a clockwise direction to the stop.
Installing
› Insert the connector into the lamp and lock it securely.
› Install the rubber seal in the body in the opposite direction to arrow
1 » fig. 207 -  .
› Insert the tail lamp with the holes 1 » fig. 208 on page 223 into the bolts on
the body » fig. 207 -  .
› Carefully press the tail light into the bolts on the bodywork.
Be careful not to pinch the cable bundle between the bodywork and light.
› Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover.
› Ensure that the cover engages firmly.
Fuses and light bulbs
223
The vehicle data sticker contains the following data.
Technical data
1
Technical data
2
3
Vehicle data

4
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicl Identification Data
Operating weight and payload
Measurement of fuel consumption and of CO2-emissions according to ECE
Regulations and EU Directives
Dimensions
Vehicle-specific information depending on engine type
224
224
225
225
226
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The listed performance values were determined without performance-reducing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
Vehicl Identification Data
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Vehicle type
Gearbox code/paint number/interior equipment/engine output/engine
code
Partial vehicle description
Type plate
The type plate » fig. 209 -  is located at the bottom of the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
The type plate lists the following data.
5
6
7
8
9
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Maximum permissible gross weight
Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer)
Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into
the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome. This number is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen
(together with a VIN bar code).
Engine number
The engine number (three-digit code letter and serial number) is stamped onto
the engine block.
WARNING
Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of accident and damage!
Operating weight and payload
Fig. 209 Vehicle data sticker/type plate
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker » fig. 209 -  is located on the base of the luggage
compartment and is also fixed in the service schedule.
224 Technical data
Operating weight
This value represents the minimum operating weight without additional
weight-increasing equipment such as air conditioning system, spare wheel, or
trailer hitch.
The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only.

The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver (75 kg), the weight
of the operating fluids, the tool kit, and a fuel tank filled to 90 % capacity.
Operating weight of the vehicle » page 226, Vehicle-specific information depending on engine type.
Payload
It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference
between the permissible total weight and the operating weight.
The payload consists of the following components.
› The weight of the rider.
› The weight of all luggage and other loads.
› The weight of the roof, including the roof rack system.
› The weight of the equipment that are excluded from the operating weight.
› Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer (max. 80 kg).
Notice
If required, you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist
garage.
Measurement of fuel consumption and of CO2-emissions according
to ECE Regulations and EU Directives
The data on fuel consumption and CO 2 emissions were not available at the
time of going to press.
The data on fuel consumption and CO 2 emissions are given in the ŠKODA websites or the sales and technical vehicle documentation.
The measurement of the intra-urban cycle begins with a cold start of the engine. Afterwards urban driving is simulated.
Notice
The fuel consumption and emission levels given on the Škoda websites or in
the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been identified in
accordance with rules and conditions that are set out by legal or technical regulations for the determination of operational and technical data of motor vehicles.
■ Depending on the complexity of the equipment, the driving style, traffic conditions, weather influences and vehicle condition, using the vehicle can in
practice result in fuel economy figures being achieved that differ from the fuel
consumption values listed on the ŠKODA websites or in the commercial and
technical vehicle documentation.
■
Dimensions
Vehicle dimensions (mm)
Superb
Length
Width
Width including exterior mirror
Height
Clearance
Wheel base
Track gauge front/rear
a)
b)
4833
1817
2009
1462/1482 a) / 1447b)
139/159a)/124b)
2761
1545/1518
Applies to vehicles with a rough road package.
Applies to vehicles with a sport chassis.
In the extra-urban driving cycle, the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in
all gears, corresponding to daily routine driving conditions. The driving speed
varies between 0 and 120 km/h.
The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of
about 37 % for the intra-urban cycle and 63 % for the extra-urban cycle.
Technical data
225
Vehicle-specific information depending on engine type
The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational
and technical data for motor vehicles.
1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI engine
Output (kW per rpm)
Max. torque (Nm per rpm)
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
118/4500-6200
250/1500-4500
4/1798
Superb MG6
222
8.4
1496
Superb DSG7
222
8.4
1508
Performance and Weights
Top speed (km/h)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s)
Operating weight (kg)
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
a)
b)
1500a)/1700b)
750
Slopes up to 12 %
Slopes up to 8 %
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW per rpm)
Max. torque (Nm per rpm)
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
103/4200
320/1750-2500
4/1968
Performance and Weights
Top speed (km/h)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s)
Operating weight (kg)
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
226 Technical data
Superb DSG6
212
10.1
1554
1800
750
Airbag system
Air conditioning system
Air outlets
A
Climatronic
Abroad
Manual air conditioning system
Driving abroad
150 Air outlets
Unleaded petrol
150 Air recirculation
ABS
Climatronic
152 Alarm
Function
Warning light
36
Switching off
Accessories
169
Triggering
Adaptive headlights (AFS)
68 Anti-theft alarm system
Adjust
Activating/deactivating
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilaTrailer
117 Antilock Braking System (ABS)
tion)
Adjusting
Armrest
Belt height
13
front
Exterior mirrors
78
rear
Head restraints
81 Artificial leather
Interior mirror
77 Ashtray
Manual air conditioning
112
ASR
Seats
79, 80
Warning light
Steering wheel
8
Assist system
Adjusting the seats
7, 79
ABS
Adjustment
Assist systems
Headlight beam
66
ABS
Aerial
173
ASR
See windows
175
Cruise Control System
AFS
68
DSR
indicator light
36
EDL
Airbag
14
ESC
Deactivating
19
HBA
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
20
HHC
Deployment
14
Park assist
Front airbag
15
Parking aid
Head airbag
18
START-STOP
Knee airbag
16
TCS
Modifications and damage to the airbag system 171 Auto-Check Control
Side airbag
17 Automatic driving lamp control
Warning light
38
Index
14
108
108
113
110
108
115
54
54
54
168
152
85
85, 94
178
89
35
152
151
36
35
158
152
152
35, 151
152
153
154
153
159
152
31
68
Automatic gearbox
Selector lever-emergency unlocking
213
Starting-off and driving
144
Tiptronic
143
Automatic load deactivation
193
Automatic retractable cargo cover (Superb
Combi))
99
Automatic transmission
142
Kickdown
144
Malfunction
144
Selector lever lock
143
Using the selector lever
142
AUX
Installation in the storage compartment
90
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila116
tion)
Adjust
117
Radio remote control
118
Switching on/off
117
Avoiding damage to the vehicle
Driving through water
149
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
149
B
Ball head
Check fitting
Fitting
Ready position
Removing
Battery
In the remote control key
iReplace the remote control of the auxiliary
heater (parking heater)
Belts
Belt tensioners
Bonnet
Closing
Opening
Warning light
Index
165
164
164
165
211
212
10
13
183
183
34
227
Boot
Automatic retraction (Superb Combi)
Class N1 vehicles
Extending variable loading floor
Folding hook
Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi)
Removable Light (Superb Combi)
Roll-up boot cover (Superb Combi)
Side compartment with battery
Boot cover (Superb Combi)
Boot lid
automatic locking
Warning light
(Superb Combi)
Brake
information messages
warning light
Brake booster
Brake fluid
Changing
Checking
information messages
Brake pads
warning light
Brakes
Brake assist systems
Brake booster
Brake fluid
Handbrake
Running in
Braking
Information on braking
Breakdown kit
Break recommendation
See Fatigue detection
Bulb failure
Warning light
Bulbs
Replacing
Warning light
228 Index
99
96
103
97
100
101
99
100
99
55
56
34
56
33
33
141
188
189
189
33
38
151
141
189
141
145
140
205
162
36
219
36
Button in the driver's door
Electric power windows
59
C
Car care
Car Computer
see multifunction display
Car park ticket holder
Carrier
Cavity protection
CD changer
Central locking
Central locking button
Changing
Brake fluid
Engine oil
Wheels
Changing a wheel
Follow-up work
Preliminary work
Remove and attaching a wheel
Charging a vehicle battery
Check
Fit ball head properly
Checking
Battery electrolyte level
Brake fluid
Coolant
Engine oil
Oil level
Windscreen washer fluid
Children and safety
Child safety
Side airbag
Child safety lock
Child seat
Classification
ISOFIX
on the front passenger seat
169
41
87
106
176
133
48
52
189
186
201
202
202
202
192
165
191
189
188
186
186
184
21
22
53
23
23
21
TOP TETHER
Use of child seats
Use of ISOFIX child seats
Chrome parts
refer to Taking care of your vehicle
Cigarette lighter
Cleaning
Alcantara
Artificial leather
cloths
Covers of electrically heated seats
Headlight lenses
Natural leather
Plastic parts
Wheels
Climatronic
Air recirculation
automatic mode
Control elements
Controlling blower
Cooling system
Defrosting windscreen
Setting the temperature
Clock
Clothes hook
Cockpit
12-Volt power outlet
Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
General view
Lighting
Practical equipment
Storage compartments
Comfort control
window
COMING HOME
Compartments
Computer
see multifunction display
24
23
24
174
89
169
178
178
178
178
175
177
174
176
113
115
114
113
116
114
116
114
30
92
90
89
89
27
71
86
86
61
70
86
41
Convenience operation
sliding / tilting roof
sliding / tilting roof (Superb Estate)
Convenience turn signal
Coolant
Checking
information messages
Replenishing
Temperature gauge
warning light
CORNER
See Fog lights with CORNER function
Correct seated position
Driver
Front passenger
Instructions
Rear seats
Counter for distance driven
Cruise control system
Activating/deactivating
Changing the stored speed
Storing and maintaining speed
Switching off temporarily
Warning light
Cruise Control System
Cup holders
63
65
67
187
188
34
188
29
34
69
7
7
8
9
9
30
158
159
159
159
39
158
88
D
DAY LIGHT
see Daylight running lights
Daylight running lights
De-icing the windscreen and rear window
Deactivating an airbag
Decorative films
Delayed locking of the boot lid
see boot lid
Diesel
refer to Fuel
67
67
73
19
175
56
181
Diesel - particulate filter
Information messages
Diesel fuel
Operation in winter
Diesel particulate filter
Information messages
Warning light
Digital Clock
Time
Dipstick
Display
Compass points
Coolant temperature
Correct gear changes
Fuel supply
Service intervals
display of a low temperature
display of the alternative speed
Distance driven
Door
Child safety lock
Closing
Emergency locking the driver's door
Opening
Warning light for an open door
Door locking
Emergency
Doors
Emergency locking
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR)
Driving
Abroad
Driving through water on streets
Emissions
Fuel consumption
Driving economically
Economical gear changing
Driving through water
DSR
DVD-preinstallation
37
181
37
37
30
186
29
46
29
40
30
46
40
31
30
53
53
212
53
34
212
212
152
150
149
225
225
146
149
152
134
E
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
145
Economical driving
Ballast
147
Driving at full throttle
147
Idling
147
146
Looking ahead
Regular maintenance
148
Saving energy
148
Short distances
147
Tyre inflation pressure
147
EDL
152
function
Electrical power windows
61
Button in the driver's door
59, 60
Button in the rear doors
61
Operational faults
62
Electric boot lid
Force limit
57
Manual operation
57
Electric luggage compartment lid
Acoustic signals
59
Adjusting the top lid position
59
Deleting the top lid position
59
Malfunctions
59
Operating
57
Electric sliding/tilting roof
62
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
152
Electronic immobilizer
136
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
151
Emergency
Activation of the sliding/tilting roof
214
Changing a wheel
201
Door locking
212
Hazard warning light system
70
jump-starting
208
Jump-starting
207
Locking the driver's door
212
Index
229
Selector lever-unlocking
Sliding/tilting roof
Start engine - KESSY
Switching off the ignition –KESSY
Towing the using the tow hitch
Towing the vehicle
Tyre repair
Unlocking the driver's door
Unlocking the tailgate
Emergency equipment
Fire extinguisher
First aid kit
Jack
Vehicle tool kit
Warning triangle
Emergency spare wheel
Emissions
Engine
Running in
Engine compartment
Brake fluid
Coolant
Overview
Vehicle battery
engine number
Engine oil
Capacity
Changing
Checking
Replenishing
Specifications
warning messages
Engine oil level
Warning light
Engine oil pressure
Warning icon
Entry lighting
Environment
Environmental compatibility
Environmentally friendly driving
230 Index
213
214
139
140
210
209
205
212
213
200
200
201
201
200
197
225
145
182
189
187
184
189
224
185
185
186
186
186
185
34
35
34
73
145
148
145
EPC
Warning light
ESC
Function
Warning light
Exhaust inspection system
Warning light
Extending variable loading floo
Partial extension
Extending variable loading floor
Divide boot
Movable lashing eyes
Extrending variable loading floor
Fixing set
37
151
35
36
103
103
103
105
104
F
Fastening elements
Fatigue detection
Function
Information messages
Films
Fire extinguisher
First aid kit
Floor covering
Fixing
Fog lights
Warning light
Fog lights with CORNER function
Folding hook
Fold in passenger's mirror
Footmats
see footmats
Force limit
Electric boot lid (Superb Combi)
Power windows
Sliding/tilting roof
Sliding/tilting roof (Superb Combi)
Front airbag
Front door warning light
97
162
162
162
175
200
200
98
69
39
69
97
78
142
142
57
61
62
64
15
72
Front interior light
71
Fuel
179
Diesel
181
Fuel gauge
30
refer to Fuel
179
Refuelling
180
Unleaded petrol
180
Fuel consumption
145, 225
Fuel reserve
Warning light
37
Fuses
Assignment
216
Colour coding
216
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment 218
216
Replacing
G
Gear change
Gear recommendation
Information on the selected gear
Gear changing
Gear stick
gears
warning messages
General view
Cockpit
Generator
warning light
Glasses storage box
Glow plug system
Warning light
GSM
40
40
141
31
27
33
91
36
122, 124
H
Handbrake
Warning light
Hands-free system
Voice control
Hazard warning light system
141
33
129
70
HBA
Head airbag
Headlight cleaning system
Headlight cleaning system
Headlights
Driving abroad
Headlight cleaning system
Replacing a bulb
Head restraint
Heater
Windscreen and rear window
Heating
Exterior mirrors
Seats
HHC
Hill Hold Control (HHC)
Horn
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
152
18
77
150
77
220
81
73
78
83
153
153
27
152
I
Ignition
Immobilizer
Individual settings
Locking
Unlocking
Inertia reels
Information message
see KESSY
information system
display of a low temperature
multifunction display
Information system
Compass point display
Door warning
Gear recommendation
MAXI DOT display
Service interval display
using
136
136
52
52
13
51
40
41
39
46
41
40
44
46
40
Instrument cluster
Auto-Check Control
Counter for distance driven
Display
display of the alternative speed
Fuel gauge
Overview
Revolutions counter
see the Instrument cluster
Speedometer
Temperature gauge
Warning lights
Interior monitor
Internet connection
ISOFIX
28
31
30
29
31
30
28
29
28
29
29
32
54
127
23
J
Jack
Jacking points
Raise vehicle
Jump-starting
201
203
207, 208
K
KESSY
Information message
Lock / unlock the steering
locking
Starting the engine
Switch ignition off
Switch ignition on
Switching off the engine
unlocking
Key
Starting the engine
Stopping the engine
Knee airbag
50
51
138
50
139
138
138
139
50
136
137
16
L
LEAVING HOME
Lever
Main beam
Turn signal
Windscreen wipers
lever lock / tempering (KESSY system)
warning light
Licht
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME
Light
Cockpit
Fog lights with CORNER function
Replacing bulbs
Travel mode
Light bulbs
Rear light (Superb Combi)
Lighting
Luggage compartment
Lights
Adaptive headlights (AFS)
Automatic driving lamp control
Daylight running
Fog lights
Hazard warning light system
Headlight beam adjustment
Headlight flasher
Instrument lighting
Low beam lights
Main beam
Parking lights
Rear fog light
Switching on and off
Tourist lights
Turn signal
Warning lights
Lock
Remote control
Vehicle key
locking
KESSY
67
67
76
39
70
71
69
219
69
222
95
65
68
68
67
69
70
66
67
66
66
67
66, 71
69
66
69
67
32
49
49
50
70
Index
231
Locking
Individual settings
52
Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside
52
Long-cargo channel
94
Low beam
Warning light
39
Low beam lights
66
Luggage compartment
95
Cover
98
Emergency unlocking
213
Fastening elements
97
Fix floor covering
98
97
Fixing nets
Lighting
95
Luggage net
98
see boot lid
55
Side pockets
99
Unlocking the tailgate
213
Variable loading floor
102
Luggage compartment cover
98
Luggage compartment lid
55
Luggage net
98
M
Main beam
Warning light
Maintenance
Decorative films
Manual air conditioning
adjusting
Recirculated air mode
Manual gear changing
see gear changing
Manually setting air conditioning
Control elements
MAXI DOT
See MAXI DOT display
Settings
232 Index
67
39
148
175
112
112
141
110
44
44
MAXI DOT display
44
Main menu
44
using
40
MDI
Installation in the storage compartment
90
MFA
see multifunction display
41
Mirror
Exterior mirrors
78
Mirrors
Interior mirror
77
Vanity
74
Mobile phone
119, 122, 124
122, 124
Connecting to the hands-free system
Modes of the automatic transmission
142
Modifications
169
Modifications and technical alterations
Airbags
171
Service
170
Spoiler
171
Multifunction display
Functions
41
Information
42
Memory
42
using
40
Multimedia
131
AUX
133
133
MDI
N
N1
nameplate
Net partition
Behind the front seats
Behind the rear seats
Removing and refitting the housing
Nets
Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi)
96
224
105
106
105
106
97
100
O
Oil
See Engine oil
warning messages
Oil pressure
warning messages
on-board computer
see multifunction display
Open door
warning light
operating the
sun screen
Operating weight
Operation in winter
Diesel fuel
Vehicle battery
Outside temperature
Overview
Engine compartment
Warning lights
186
34
34
41
34
64
224
181
191
42
184
32
P
Paintwork
See Paintwork care
Paintwork care
Park assist
Finding a parking space
Information messages
Parking
Park Assist
automatic emergency braking
from a parking space parallel to the carriage
way
Operation
Parking
Park assist
Parking aid
Parking aid
Function
174
174
154
155
157
156
157
157
155
154
153
153
154
Parking lights
66
parking vehicle
unlocking
51
Part replacement
169
Passive safety
Before setting off
6
driving safety
6
Safety equipment
6
Passive Safety
6
Payload
224
Pedals
142
Footmats
142
Petrol
180
refer to Fuel
Polishing the paintwork
See Taking care of your vehicle
174
Power outlet
12 V
90
Power Steering / steering lock (KESSY system)
warning light
34
Power windows
Button in the front passenger door
61
Practical features
86
12-Volt power outlet
90
Storage compartment for umbrella
93
Storage compartment in rear centre console
93
Storage compartment on the passenger side
92
Storage compartment under the armrest, front 90
Storage compartment under the passenger
92
seat
Storage net in the front centre console
91
Storage pockets on the front seats
93
R
Radiator fan
Radio reception
See windows
Radio remote control
Auxiliary heating
184
175
118
Raise vehicle
203
Rear-view mirror
Exterior mirrors
78
Fold in passenger's mirror
78
Synchronous adjustment of rear-view mirror
78
Rear fog light
69
Warning light
36
Rear interior light
72
Rear mirror
77
Interior mirror
77
Rear seats
Seat folded forward Combi
86
Rear window - heater
73
Recirculated air mode
112
Manual air conditioning
Refuelling
180
Fuel
180
Remote control
lock
49
Replacing the battery
211
Synchronisation process
211
unlock
49
Remote control key
Replacing the battery
211
Removable lights (Superb Combi)
Changing rechargeable light batteries
101
Removable Light (Superb Combi)
101
Remove light
Removable ski bag
95
Removable variable loading floor
Fit and remove
104
Repairs and technical alterations
169
Replace
Vehicle battery
192
Replacing
Bulb for main beam
221
Bulb for main beam and daytime running lights 221
Bulb for the fog light
221
Bulb for the licence plate light
222
Bulb in rear light (Superb Combi)
223
Bulbs
Fuses
Fuses in the dash panel
Fuses in the engine compartment
Low beam bulb
Wiper blades
Replenishing
Coolant
Engine oil
Windscreen washer fluid
Revolutions counter
Roof luggage rack
Attachment points
Roof rack system
Roof load
Running-in
The first 1500 km
Running in
Brake pads
Engine
Tyres
219
216
216
218
221
215
188
186
184
29
107
106
107
145
145
145
145
S
SAFE
See Safe securing system
SAFELOCK
See Safe securing system
Safe securing system
Safety
Child safety
Child safety seats
Correct seated position
Head restraints
ISOFIX
TOP TETHER
Saving electrical energy
Screens
see Sun screen in the rear doors
Seals
Taking care of your vehicle
51
51
51
6
21
21
7
81
23
24
145
74
174
Index
233
Seat belt
warning light
Seat belts
Belt tensioners
Cleaning
fastening and unfastening
Height adjustment
Inertia reels
The physical principle of a frontal collision
Seat features
Seats
Armrest rear
Armtest, front
Convenience features of passenger seat
Electric adjustment
Head restraints
Heating
Manually adjusting
save
Seat backrests
Storing in memory of remote control key
Ventilated front seats
Seats and useful equipment
Adjusting the seats
see automatic gearbox
Manual shifting of gears on the multifunction
steering wheel
Selector lever
see Using the selector lever
Service
Service interval display
Service intervals
Setting the
Shelves
Shifting gears
Driving and saving energy
Side airbag
Side compartment in boot with battery
Side compartments in the luggage compartment
234 Index
33
10
13
178
12
13
13
11
83
85
85
84
80
81
83
80
82
85
82
84
79
79
143
142
170
46
169
30
86
146
17
100
99
ski bag
95
Sliding/tilting roof
Close (Superb Combi)
64
Closing
62
Closing the sun screen (Superb Estate)
64
Electric sliding/tilting roof
62
Emergency operation
214
Opening/closing the sun screen (Superb Estate)
64
Opening and tilting
62
Opening and tilting (Superb Combi)
64
Operation
62
Operation (Superb Combi)
64
Snow chains
199
197
Spare wheel
Speedometer
29
see speedometer
29
Speed symbol
See Wheels
196
Spoiler
171
START-STOP
159
Operating conditions of the system
160
operation in vehicles with automatic
160
operation in vehicles with manual
160
system-related automatic startup
161
START-STOPP
System deactivation/activation manually
161
137
Starting and stopping the engine - KESSY
Starting and stopping the engine using the key 135
Starting engine
Jump-starting
207
Starting the engine
Jump-starting
208
Key
136
see KESSY
139
START STOP
Information messages
161
Jump-starting
208
Steering lock / unlock
see KESSY
138
Steering wheel
Stopping the engine
Key
Storage compartment in rear centre console
Storage compartment on the passenger side
Storage compartments
Storage compartment under the passenger
seat
Storage pockets on the front seats
Storing skis
Sun screen
Sun screen in the rear doors
Sun visors
Swich ignition on
see KESSY
Switch
see Ignition
Switch ignition off
see KESSY
Switching lights on and off
Switching off the engine
see KESSY
Synchronous adjustment of rear-view mirror
8
137
93
92
86
92
93
94
74
74
74
138
136
138
66
139
78
T
Tailgate
TwinDoor
Taking care of the vehicle
Natural leather
Seat belts
Taking care of your vehicle
Automatic car wash system
Cavity protection
Chrome parts
Cleaning the wheels
Decorative films
Door lock cylinders
Headlight lenses
High-pressure cleaner
56
177
178
173
176
174
176
175
175
175
173
Plastic parts
Polishing the paintwork
Rubber seals
Taking care of the interior
Taking care of your vehicle exterior
Washing
Washing by hand
Wash system
Wax treatment
Taking care of your vehicles
Fabric covers
TCS
Operation
Technical data
Telephone
Tilting roof
see Electric sliding/tilting roof
Tiptronic
Tools
TOP TETHER
Towing
Towing a trailer
Towing device
Description
Drawbar load
Use and care
Towing eye
Front
Rear
Towing protection
Traction Control System (TCS)
Trailer
13-pin power socket
driving with a trailer
Loading
Safety eye
Trailer stabilisation
Transport
Luggage compartment
Roof rack system
174
174
174
176
173
172
172
173
174
178
152
224
122, 124
62
143
201
24
209
163
163
163
166
210
210
54
152
163, 166
167
167
166
167
168
95
106
Transporting children safely
TSA
Turn signal
Turn signal system
Warning light
Twindoor
see boot lid
Two-way radio systems
Tyre inflation pressure
Warning light
Tyre load-bearing capacity
See Wheels
Tyre pressure monitor
Setting
Tyre repair
Check pressure
Preparations
Sealing and inflating the tyre
Tyres
Inflation pressure
New
See Wheels
Sizes
Tyre wear indicator
21
168
67
38
55
119
38
196
196
207
206
206
193
194
195
195
194
194
U
Umbrella
Tray
Underbody protection
Unleaded petrol
Unlock
Remote control
Vehicle key
unlocking
KESSY
Unlocking
Individual settings
Unlocking and locking
93
176
150
49
49
50
52
48
Useful equipment
Ashtray
89
Car park ticket holder
87
Cigarette lighter
89
Clothes hook
92
Cup holders
88
Glasses storage box
91
Removable ski bag
95
Seat backrest with long-cargo channel
94
Storage compartment in the front centre console
88
Storage compartment on the driver's side
87
Storage compartments in the doors
88
Using the information system
40
142
Using the selector lever
V
102
102
102
103
Variable loading floor
Dividing the luggage compartment
Remove
slides off on aluminium rails
Vehicle battery
Automatic load deactivation
charging
Checking the battery electrolyte level
Cover
Disconnecting and reconnecting
Operation in winter
Replace
Safety instructions
Vehicle care
Alcantara
Artificial leather
Cloths
Vehicle condition
see Auto-Check Control
Vehicle data sticker
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle height
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
193
192
191
191
192
191
192
189
178
178
178
31
224
225
225
224
Index
235
Vehicle key
lock
unlock
Vehicle length
Vehicle tool kit
Vehicle width
Visibility
Visors
see Sun screen
see Sun visors
49
49
225
201
225
73
74
74
W
Warning at excessive speeds
Warning lights
Warning symbols
see Warning lights
Warning triangle
Washing
Automatic car wash system
by hand
Chrome parts
High-pressure cleaner
Water
Driving through
Wax treatment
See Taking care of your vehicle
weights
maximum permitted weights
Wheel bolts
Anti-theft wheel bolt
Caps
Loosening and tightening
Wheel rims
Wheels
Bolts
Changing
Emergency spare wheel
Full trim
General information
236 Index
43
32
32
200
169
173
172
174
173
149
174
224
204
198
203
193
198
201
197
198
193
Load index
Replacing wheels
Service life of tyres
Snow chains
Spare wheel
Speed symbol
Storing wheels
Tyre pressure
Tyre sizes
Tyre wear indicator
Unidirectional tyres
Winter tyres
Wi-Fi
Windows
Deicing
See electric power windows
Windscreen
Deicing
Heater
Windscreen washer fluid
Checking
Replenishing
Warning light
Winter
Windscreen washers
Windscreen washers
Windscreen washer system
Windscreen wiper
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Windscreen wipers
Operating
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Windscreen washer fluid
Windscreen wipers and washers
Winter
Deicing windows
Winter operation
Snow chains
Winter tyres
196
194
194
199
197
196
194
194
194
194
196
199
127
175
175
59
175
73
184
184
38
184
76
184
215
76
215
184
75
175
198
199
199
Winter tyres
See Wheels
WLAN
MAXI DOT
Network connection
Switching off
Switching on
199
127
128
128
128
128
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. pursues a policy of constant product and model development. We trust that you will understand that changes to models in terms of
shape, equipment and engineering, may be introduced at any time. The information about appearance, performances, dimensions, weight, standards and
functions of the vehicle is correct at the time of publication. Some equipment
might only be introduced at a later date, or might only be offered in certain
markets; information is provided by ŠKODA Partners. It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the data, illustrations and descriptions contained in this Owner's Manual.
Reprinting, reproduction, translation, or any other use, either in whole or in
part, is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s..
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
Subject to change.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2014
www.skoda-auto.com
You also can do something for the environment!
The fuel consumption of your ŠKODA and the related pollutant
emissions are determined crucially on how you drive.
The noise and the wear of the vehicle depend on the way how
you deal with your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual shows you how to use your ŠKODA vehicle with utmost care for the environment while driving economically at the same time.
Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner's Manual
that are marked  below.
Work with us – for the sake of the environment.
Návod k obsluze
Superb anglicky – Indie/Nepál 05.2014
S74.5610.18.91
3T0 012 791 AG